Home

Emerson Process Management MON2000 User's Manual

1. Component Mol Reid RelDens Rel Dens GPM GrossDry Net Dry AGA 8 Mice Name Wt Vapor Gas Liquid Lb Gal Factor BTU BTU Component I D No C6 57 28 14 94 1904 3 37386 3 25214 0 677086 5 64458 0 439881 5194 53 4812 82 C6mix4 11 Carbon Monoxide 28 01 0 0 9671 0 801 6 68 0 321 2 321 2 CO 15 Carbon Dioxide 44 0095 0 1 5195 0 81716 6 8129 0 170618 0 0 CO2 17 Cis 2 Butene 56 11 45 54 1 9372 0 6271 5 228 0 2835 3079 3 2877 6 n Butane 31 COS 60 08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 42 CS2 76 14 0 2 6298 0 0 0 1267 1267 None 41 Cyclohexane 84 16 3 264 2 9057 0 7834 6 531 0 3403 4492 1 4189 4 n Hexane T Cyclopentane 70 14 9 914 2 4215 0 7504 6 256 0 2961 3772 4 3520 2 n Pentane Diisobutyl 114 23 1 101 3 9439 0 6979 5 819 0 5185 6247 9 5793 9 n Octane x 2 3 Dimethbutan 86 18 7 404 2 9753 0 6664 5 556 0 4096 4756 4403 1 n Hexane 2 2 Dimethpenta 100 21 3 492 3 4596 0 6782 5 654 0 4682 5494 6 5091 4 n Heptane 2 4 Dimethpenta 100 21 3 292 3 4596 0 6773 5 647 0 4686 5499 4 5096 n Heptane laj 3 3 Dimethpenta 100 2 2 773 3 4596 0 6976 5 816 0 455 5501 5 5098 2 n Heptane Ethane 30 069 800 1 0382 0 35628 2 9704 0 267369 1773 79 1622 75 Ethane 01 Ethyl Alcohol 46 07 2 3 1 5906 0 794 6 62 0 1839 1602 8 1451 5 None Ethylbenzene 106 17 0 371 3 6655 0 8718 7 268 0 3858 5234 3 4982 n Octane Ethylene 28 0532 0 0 9686 0 0 0 1603 4 1502 47 Ethane 21 Ethylene Oxide 44 05 0 1 49 0 0 0 1459 4 1410 2 None 36 3 Ethylpentane 100 21 2 012 3 4596
2. re DETI t 1 HIGH t 2 HIGH t 3 HIGH t 4 HIGH t 5 HIGH t 6 HIGH t 7 HIGH t 8 HIGH t 9 HIGH t HIGH t HIGH t HIGH t HIGH t HIGH t HIGH t HIGH t LOW t 2 LOW t 3 LOW 200 Synchronization Failure Excess Response Factor Deviation 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Tal 72 T3 74 T9 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal sysal larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set larm set sysalarm set sysal sysal arm_set larm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysal sysal sysal arm_set arm_set arm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set 52 33 54 229 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 TI 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 Analog Output 4 LOW Analog Output 5 LOW Analog Output 6 LOW Analog Output 7 LOW Analog Output 8 LOW Analog Output 9 LOW Analog Output 10 LOW Analog Output 11 LOW Analog Output 12 LOW Analog Output 13 LOW Analog Output 14 LOW Analog Output 15 LOW Analog Output 16 LOW Analyzer Failure
3. 2 75 Offline Edit of GC Application 2 76 File Selection eese 2 77 Upload Application ccccccceceeeeeeneeeeeeaeees 2 78 Upload BOS icici codecs reete ce eret rec aka dann 2 81 Logging On coriis sra rei ivas iie ak ann ai 3 1 Logging Off ooi rore tune dinh ceva 3 3 MON2000 User Interface 3 3 Main Window essssseeee mem 3 4 GC Status B 3r z c ii secre e reas 3 5 View Menu esssssseeseen meme mene 3 8 IRE E 3 8 Data Entry and Function Features 3 8 Shortcut to Save or Print Data 3 9 Keyboard Shortcuts 3 9 Procedures Guide eese 3 11 Keylock Switch Control 3 15 Configuring Your Printer 3 16 Using Online Help 3 18 Operating Modes for Model 700 3 19 About MON2000 eene 3 19 Auto Sequere oic eco ont io din recs cu Gs 4 1 Single Stream oreet n kaa mka aje ia 4 2 Hall e koton S 4 3 JULY 2010 Getting Started iv TABLE OF CONTENTS MON2000 4 4 Calibration eese nnne 4 4 4 5 Baseline Run eeeeeeeen nennen 4 5 4 6 Auto BTU Start Up and Valve Timing 4 7 4 6 1 Initia
4. 1 5 Appendix D Analog Output Cal 2350A GO oi ake atake ka ntn etn ane 1 5 Appendix E Upgrade 2350A GC S W and 2350 EPROMG cccceceecesseeeeaeees 1 5 Appendix F Modbus Reg List for 2350A GC 1 5 Description of Online Help 1 6 Description of MON2000 1 6 System Requirements eseeses 2 1 Installing MON2000 2 3 Installing the CrypKey License Service for MON2000 PLUS ceeeeeeeennen nenne 2 4 Copying MON2000 to Disks 2 4 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License 2 6 Uninstalling MON2000 2 15 Starting MON20OO e esee 2 17 Performing Your First Logon 2 18 ii TABLE OF CONTENTS MON2000 2 8 1 The Initial Logon esses 2 18 2 8 2 Registering MON2OOO esee 2 19 2 8 3 Update MON20OOO isesseeenn 2 21 2 9 Checklist for Setting Up MON20O00 2 22 2 10 Communications eeeeeeee rennen 2 22 2 10 1 Connect to the GC Unit sesusesssss 2 22 2 10 2 Disconnect from GC Unit ssussssss 2 23 2 11 Customizing MON2000 2 24 2 11 1 Configure Users seeseeeeeeseeseenene 2 24 2 11 2 Set Up GC
5. No Name Options T EnableCalMan 2 2 EnableComAlm 2 4 aint_mode 1 5 Run_Aux_Seq 1 Options for EnableCalMan No Name 1 DISABLE 2 ENABLE Options for EnableComAlm No Name 1 DISABLI CI 2 ENABLE NC 3 ENABLE NO Options for Maint_mode No Name i OFF 2 ON Options for Run Aux Seq No Name 1 OFF 2 ON kok ko kk kk kk kk ck ck kk kk kk kk kk kk kk ck k ck ck k ck ck kk ck kk ck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck k ck ck KkCk ck kk k kk k kk ck k ck ck k ck k k ck kk kkkk k User Defined Text Report from 2350 001 2350 001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Name Size Text 1 rpt headerl 50 Company Daniel Industries 2 rpt header2 50 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Calculation Control Report from 2350_001 2350_001 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Description BIN Avg Limit Alarm Test Mole Percent Liquid Volume Weight Percent Normalize Results Gas Density Liquid Density Relative Density Gas Relative Density Lqd Compressibility Dry Gross Heating BTU Sat Gross Heating BTU Actual Gross Heating BTU Dry Net Heating BTU Sat Net Heating BTU Actual Net Heating BTU Wobbe Index Reid Vapor Pressure Gallons 1000 SCF C2 Gallons 1000 SCF C3 Gallons 1000 SCF C4 Gallons 1000 SCF C5 Gallons 1000 SCF C6 User Flag 1 Average Molecular Wg
6. cc cece eee eee eee 6 18 6 6 7 Forcing a Calibration cccccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeees 6 19 6 6 8 Toggling TEVs and CGM Components 6 19 6 7 Viewing Baseline Data 6 20 6 8 Viewing RAW Data esses 6 21 6 9 Display Options eese eee 6 21 Chromatogram Viewer JULY 2010 TABLE OF CONTENTS vii MON2000 REPORTS 7 1 Report Display eese 7 1 7 1 1 View Report from Live Data sess 7 1 7 1 2 View Report from File ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeenees 7 4 7 1 3 Print Report ssssssssessseseene meme menn 7 6 7 1 4 Save Report to DiSk ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 7 6 7 1 5 Report Contents cccccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaees 7 8 Analysis REPO Eurien te aaa kota dane ieii 7 9 Raw Data Report cccccecceceseeeeeeeeneeennneenaes 7 11 Calibration Report cocer enn 7 12 Final Calibration Report sssessssse 7 13 Average Reports cccccceceeeee eee eeeeeeeeaeeeaees 7 14 Sample 24 Hour Average Report 7 14 7 2 GC Report Request cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 7 15 7 3 GC Printer Control 7 16 7 4 MON2000 Printer Control 7 18 4 5 Archive Data ehe rin hn desas ken stein 7 20 7 b 1 View Data Model 500 Model 700 7 21 7
7. gt Accessories id 33 Daniel gt Documents L a Microsoft Office Tools gt Settin T Microsoft Word 3 a SnagIt Search a WordPerfect Office 11 gt Help 7 Windows Journal Viewer Y Y E g mi Run 2 ta Shut Aart SABA O AN Down PERFORMING YOUR FIRST LOGON The Initial Logon Each new GC unit is shipped with one super user named Emerson After logon ensure that this user name appears in the Users list as a super user see Section 2 11 1 To log on for the first time 1 Start the MON2000 software program by clicking the desktop icon or by using the Windowsg Start menu see Section 2 7 MON2000 Version 2 46 023 Copyright C 2002 4 Emerson Process Management EMERSON Pn Ma nt All Rights Reserved usur tee c User Name User PIN tea 2 Click in the User Name data field 9 Type emerson Note that the user name is not case sensitive MON2000 MON2000 A PIN is not required for the initial logon Performing Your First Logon JULY 2010 MON2000 iliMON2000 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 19 4 When you have successfully logged on the MON2000 main window appears 18 x File Application Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help tw AX di ei For Help press F1 File Application Reports Logs Chron PC Config Report Offline Edit GC Directory Users Change Admi
8. Gallons 1000 SCF Gas Density lbm 1000 ft3 Heating Value Gross BTU Dry Mole Percent 2 label 2 Gallons 1000 SCF 1 2 Gallons 1000 SCF 1 3 User Calc Result 1 1 Value 1 16 2 1 1 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK Limit Alarms Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Variable S C DO Type No entries found CK CK CK Ck Ck Ck CK CK kk kk Ck Ck CK C CC CC CK C Ck Ck CK kk kk CK CC CI CI CI CC CK C C Ck CK CI CI C CCS C C Ck CI CI CI CIC Ck Ck Ck Ck Sk S S A M kx Ck Sk Sk Sk A Ax X X Discrete Alarms Report from 2350 001 2350 001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Alarm Discrete Discrete Alarm Message No Input Output 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 kok kok kk kk kk kk kk kk kokck kk kk kk kk ck k ckck k ck ck kCck ck ck ck ck kCck ck kCck ck kCck ck kk ck kk ck kk k kk k kk ck k ck ck k ck k kk k k kk KK KK Streams Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Cal Data Base Condition No Name Use Det CD TE Tot Avg Start Int Auto PSIA F 1 Stream 1 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60 2 Stream 2 ANL Detl 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60 3 Stream 3 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y X 4 73 60 4 Stream 4 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60 5 Stream 5 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60 6 Stream 6 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60 7 Stream 7 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60 8 Stream 8 ANL Det1 5 3 07 00 24 Y Y 4 73 60
9. Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 15 MON2000 14 Click Finish The License Configuration screen displays l MON2000 PLUS License Configuration m Program License Help li Li Unlimited icense Site Code 1148 7C45 1EAC 2646 50 A Site Key MON2000 PLUS Thank you for your interest in MON2000 PLUS To obtain a license please click here GC CSCi emersonprocess com Please include the following with your authorization request 1 Your contact information 2 Your Company name 3 Your Site Code 4 Your purchase order no if available Once you receive your Site Key you can eanble MON2000 PLUS by MON2000 PLUS is now licensed for unlimited use on the targeted computer 2 6 UNINSTALLING MON2000 To uninstall MON2000 using Windowsg 95 Windowsg 98 Windowsg 2000 or Windowsg NT 1 Click the if Stat button see the taskbar JULY 2010 Uninstalling MON2000 2 16 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 Click Settings and then Control Panel The Control Panel dialog appears J Control Panel C Settings 3ComPACE Accessibilty AddNew Add Remove Date Time Config Options Hardware Programs y ws 5 mu Display Find Fast Intemet Keyboard 3 Double click the Add Remove Programs If using Windows XP click the Start button then Add Remove Programs 4 The Add Remove Program Properties dialog appears Add Remove Progr
10. VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL Si 7 7 VARIABL VARIABL VARIABILI A kri TRIN TRIN TRIN TRIN TRIN Q oO oO A A a TRIN kri kri kri TRING TRING TRING A stream_data strms strms stream_data strms totl_ikg_dry base_pres base_temp z FACEOR base_pres op_pressures op_pressures op_pressures stream_data btudry_gross op_pres_calc op_pres_calc op_pres_calc stream_data btusat_gross op_pres_calc op_pres_calc STRI STRI STRI STR STR STR STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO 13 25 14 32 250 Zou 32 250 251 32 81 82 83 29 29 43 39 39 VARIABLI GJ STRING STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABLE VARIABLE STRING STRING STRING kri VARIABL VARIABLE VARIABLE VARIABLE STRING STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABLE VARIABLE VARIABL kri STRING STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABLE VARIABL kri VARIABL kri STRING STRING VARIABLE VA
11. Average Setting Used Hourly Reset Time 24 Hour Day Reset Time Weekly Weekday Monthly Day Reset Time Averages 5 24 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 To set a custom time interval per calculation set the Type to Variable and enter the desired interval length in the Hours cell A setting of O means an average calculation will be performed for each analysis run of that stream Any GC analysis variable with defined alarm limits cannot be averaged or archived while in an active alarm state see Section 5 6 for more information on Limit Alarms To disable this feature use the Control Calculations function to set Avg Limit Alarm Test to OFF see Section 5 5 1 Note that this custom Hours setting overrides the Reset Time setting 3 Use the provided pull down menu to add a new variable to the list 4 To view an archive of averages for a given variable select the desired variable and click the Archive F5 button or press the F5 key The Archive Data dialog for that variable appears 24 Hour Archive Data for Average 6 x Averages JULY 2010 MON2000 An error message displays when the last available stream or component is reached Application System Component Data F Timed Events PS User Defined Calculations Control Limit Alarms Averages Discrete Alarms User Defined Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs
12. Component 6 GPM or Weight Component 7 GPM or Weight Component 10 GPM or Weight Component 11 GPM or Weight Component 12 GPM or Weight Component 13 7041 7044 7054 Actual BTU 7055 Average User Defined 1 User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 11 MON2000 G 3 continued SIM 2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST 7060 JULY 2010 User Modbus Register List F 12 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 G 3 continued SIM 2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST No 7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 7089 7090 7081 7092 7093 7094 7095 Response Factors 1 16 Component Table n where n CDT used during last run 7110 gt gt RR f f a fE f fE 7111 Response Factors 71 16 Component Table n where n CDT used during last run 7126 7127 Averages User Defined 1 36 7162 NOTE First fifteen or registers 7127 7141 are repeats of contents of registers 7055 7069 7163 Maximum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7198 7199 Minimum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7234 7235 First most recent Archive of Averages User Defined 1 36 7270 j NOTE First fifteen or registers 7235 7249 are repeats of contents of registers 7070 7084 7211 First most recent Archive of Maximum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7306 7307 First most recent Archive of Minimum values from Averages Use
13. Poll Command CGM on Alarm 9 22 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 General Configuration List of Commands Type Time GC Entry Jelay Condition Start 2 Select Condition Start from the pull down list in the Type column 3 Enter a description in the Command Description column 4 Select a default output file format by clicking either the Report or Data checkbox on the Polling Output File s table 5 Enter a default output file name Click the Poll Command Details button located at the bottom of the Configuration for Data Collection window The Poll Command Condition Start window appears Poll Command Condition Start Condition Start Configuration Register SIM 2251 1 Change Cancel 7 Select Register SIM 2251 or Register User Modbus from the Condition Data Type column 8 Enter the register number in the Condition Data Value column 9 Select Change from the Condition Status column Poll Command Condition Start JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 23 MON2000 10 To apply the configuration changes click OK To discard your changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window click Cancel 9 2 15 Poll Command Condition End Use the Condition End command to stop conditional polling To configure the Condition End command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands table select Poll from the Comma
14. 2 The GC Printer Control dialog displays GC Printer Control x Report Name 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 4M 12 00 AM 12 00 4M 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM LM NL UL ULL UL UTILI MEL UL UL UL UL UTILI Bi al zi El Ei Bi Ei Es zi Cancel 3 Use the provided data fields check and NOTICE combo boxes to select the desired settings See Table 7 8 for detailed descriptions You can for example set a report to print after each 4 Click the analysis and every 12 hours j button to accept your selections and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Table 7 8 Description of Settings for GC Printer Control Setting Description Anly Enables disables report printing after each analysis run regardless of report type selected Cal Enables disables report printing after each calibration run regardless of report type selected FCal Enable disable report printing after every final calibration run regardless of report type selected Time Time at which report should print at 24 hour intervals To disable this feature set Time to 00 00 or 12 00 AM The Time setting overrides the Hours setting and only applies to streams that are enabled i e checked ON for report printing JULY 2010 GC Printer Control 7 18 REPORTS MON2000 Table 7 8 Description of Settings for GC Printer Control Continued Setting D
15. 50 0 Componen Det Time View curent CGM A D valu GC Archive PC File 10 0 Save A D values 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 90 0 100 0 Print at end of run Time 3 Save at end of run Chromatogram pao Edit Aesults Desc Save Remove Eur Al save mp Edit Cursor Print TE Timed events event type valve or detector value time Double click right click or F5 to edit For Help press F1 JULY 2010 Chromatogram Viewer Function 6 2 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 4 Click the Close button to exit this dialog Any display changes or open data will be lost See Section 6 4 to save a chromatogram to disk 6 2 VIEWING A LIVE CHROMATOGRAM 6 2 1 From Online GC To view a live chromatogram trace from the online GC 1 Check the View current CGM option If a chromatogram contains data for more than one detector a Select Detector menu dialog displays Double click either Detector 1 Detector 2 or Both 2 MON2000 plots the current live chromatogram The corresponding data is dynamically displayed in the provided legends Use the Graph and Chromatogram functions to manipulate the display To zoom in on a particular point click and drag your mouse over that area repeat as necessary Use the Restore State or Zoom Out options from the right click menu see Section 6 9 to return to the original display You can display u
16. 6 22 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 Table 6 1 Display Options for Chromatogram Viewer Keystroke Right Click Option Description CTRL C Copy to clipboard allows you to copy this graph to another application such as MSWord or Excel F8 Cursor to nearest point snap cursor to nearest point in both the X and Y directions CTRL V Paste from clipboard allows you to plot a range of points from another application such as MSWord or Excel CTRL P Print Graph Area print currently displayed chromatograph area CTRLS Print Series All print all displayed chromatograms HOME Restore State restore last saved display settings for Live or Archived for the selected chromatogram CTRL HOME Save State save current or archived display settings for the selected chromatogram F4 Toggle Coarse Fine toggle cursor from coarse less accurate to fine more accurate F9 Toggle Lines Dots toggle graph from line s to dots CTRL F4 Toggle Mouse Position Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse while tooltip displays exact coordinates of the current point CTRL F9 Toggle Nearest Point Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse cursor NUM Zoom In zoom in on entire graph NUM Zoom Out zoom out from entire graph NUM gt Zoom X In zoom in on X axis NUM lt Zoom X Out zoom out from X axis NUM f Zoom Y In zoom in on Y axis NUM 4 Zoom Y Out zoom out from Y axis Display Options JULY 2010 REPORT
17. Configuration ld OpenFile for Data Collection window Start Auto New Fie 3 From the Polling Output File s table select Report and or Data type by clicking the appropriate check box Enter the Default Filename field for the chosen selections Polling Output File s Default Filename e Format Report X Sample Report Data M Sample Data 4 From the Commands pull down list select a command General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry 1 T IINE Await Connect Logon Command Description Delay Delay Seconds Disconnect End Poll Repeat Connect No Logon Delay Hours 5 Enter the necessary data and a description for the command 6 Use the add Insert Delete and Poll Command buttons to add edit modify the configuration 7 When you have finished adding editing modifying the commands click the Save button Create a New Polling Control File JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 7 MON2000 8 The Save Polling Control File dialog appears Enter a filename and click the Save button to save the apc file Save in a BIN z ek e a AutoPollTest_051004 apc jsjAutoPolTest new 12 spc 8 AutoPollTest a AutoPollTest_2_051004 apc la AutoPoliTest new 13 apc ja AutoPollTest la AutoPollTest new apc ja AutoPollTest new 2 apc ja AutoPollTest lan IA AutoPollTest la AutoPollTest new
18. DX New RF 91453e 6 11696e 6 28641e 6 32091e 6 39382e4 6 47663e 6 1 52511e 6 726170 0000 585221 0000 861836 0000 953929 0000 RPRRRRRE Cycle Time 240 Start Time 12 24 Table 7 6 Contents Guide for Final Calibration Report Related Function s RF amp Old RT New RT RT amp DEV DEV 0 35 34 3 34 3 0 15 0 01 50 8 50 8 0 00 0 04 65 8 65 8 0 00 0 13 73 5 73 4 0 07 0 15 86 0 86 0 0 06 0 37 108 3 108 3 0 00 0 39 120 2 120 2 0 00 0 07 145 1 145 1 0 00 0 05 149 4 149 4 0 00 0 09 179 9 179 9 0 00 0 01 207 2 207 1 0 02 Menu Section Component Name CDT Application gt Component 5 2 Cal Conc Data F6 Old RF standard GC application Application gt Component 5 2 New RF Data F6 RF Dev results of final calibration Old RT adjustments to response New RT factors RFs and retention RT Dev times RTs CDT additional columns Alarms Limit Alarms Application gt Limit Alarms 5 6 Report items marked with an asterisk were updated during calibration JULY 2010 Report Contents 7 14 REPORTS MON2000 Average Reports There are five types of Average Reports Hourly Average Report 24 Hour Average Report Weekly Average Report Monthly Average Report Variable Average Report Sample 24 Hour Average Report 24 Hour Averages from Mon Apr 03 10 50 58 1995 Analyzer AT401STD Company Daniel Industries Houston
19. c 1 Use the Reports gt Archive Data gt View Data MON2000 Printer Control Archive Data To view print copy or save archived data menu to access this function MON2000 displays the Date Range Selection pop up dialog Trend Data Export Data Reset 9 Date Range Selection x C All Dates Selected Dates Start Date End Date 3 21 2001 yi ca Select All Dates radio button or choose Selected Dates Select the Start date and End Date date range for the report to be archived JULY 2010 View Data Model 500 Model 700 7 22 REPORTS MON2000 3 Click the selection Or button to apply your Click the Cancel button to return to the View Data window MON2000 displays the message Reading GC Data in the status bar 4 The Select Archive Record dialog appears Stream 1 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 33 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 33 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 29 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 25 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 21 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 17 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 07 13 51 Stream 2 3 18 2004 07 08 51 Stream 1 3 w2004 06 57 51 Stream 1 3 1872004 065351 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 49 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 45 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 41 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 37 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 33 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 29 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 25 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 21 51 Stream 1 3 18 2004 06 17 51 1 1 1 1
20. in the status bar then actives the TEV Table 2 On 89 0 2 8 920 2 Click the Save button to save your N OTI C E changes or press the F8 key Press the ESC key to discard changes Save changes and discard changes options are available from the right 6 6 5 Viewing the Chromatogram Results click menit To read a table of calculation results for a selected chromatogram 1 Usethe Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Col Ill CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm Cur All Save Cmp vw W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cam a 2 Click the Results button A dialog appears asking if the results should be displayed using the calculation control flags 3 Click the Yes button to display the report using the calculations selected in the Application gt Control menu Viewing the Chromatogram Results JULY 2010 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 17 MON2000 Click the _No button to display the report using ALL calculations Calculation Results from 376326 stream 1 on 1 5 2000 10 45 20 AM Click the Cancel button to return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog JULY 2010 Viewing the Chromatogram Results 6 18 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 6 6 6 Entering a Description To enter a description for the selected chromatogram 1 U
21. BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION At this point install if any all mounting hardware and optional PC 104 boards onto the 2350A CPU Board 1 Install the 2350A CPU P N 3 2350 090 into slot 3 of the card cage assembly 2 Install cables on the CPU Board in the following sequence a Digital I O cable P N 3 2350 081 from CPU J7 to the System Interface Board J2 b Digital I O cable P N 3 2350 080 from CPU J4 to the System Interface Board J3 c COM1 COM2 and the printer cable P N 3 2350 083 from CPU J1 to the System Interface Board J4 J9 and J11 d COM8 and COMA can be configured two different ways To configure a system WITHOUT a keyboard and display connect cable P N 3 2350 084 from CPU J6 to the System Interface Board J8 and J10 This provides access to COM3 on J10 and COMA on J11 of the Field Termination board The serial port setup in the MON2000 Software for COMA must be selected as a PC port e For a system WITH a keyboard and display connect cable P N 3 2350 087 from CPU J6 to the System Interface J8 and J12 This provides access to COM3 on J10 and COMA is dedicated for use as a serial interface to the keyboard and display COMA will not be available at J11 of the Field Termination board BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION 2 50 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 The serial port setup in the MON2000 Software for COM4 must be selected as Front Panel see Figure 2 4 If all four serial ports are re
22. Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Control Serial Ports TCPIIP JULY 2010 5 5 3 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 25 To save this archive to disk right click the archive table and select the Save Sheet option from the pop up menu To copy the stream settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy S F button or press the F7 key This feature also increments the Stream value to the next available stream e g incrementing from Stream 2 to Stream 8 per the GC application To copy the component settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy C F8 button or press the F8 key This feature also increments the Component value to the next available component e g incrementing from Ammonia to Benzene per the GC application To copy the Restart setting from a highlighted row and apply it to the next row click the Copy Restart F3 button or press the F9 key Click the 1 button to accept your selections and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window User Defined Use this function to create and edit customized calculations on GC analysis data MON2000 will allow up to 20 user defined calculations 1 Use the Application gt Calculations gt User Defined menu to access this function User Defined 5 26 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 2
23. Limit Alarms for all application specific text variables LR Streams A i l m 1 Use the Application gt User Defined gt Text pro ut Strings menu to access this function Disrete Mou Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Gontrol Serial Ports TCPJTP Selection JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 21 MON2000 2 The User Defined Text Strings dialog appears Name Size String Company Daniel Industries 12345678902234567890323456789042345678905234567890 Cancel Double click the desired String cell and type the new text String length i e how many characters you can enter is limited to the number cited in 3 Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the main window tha Size cell Click the _ Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 5 5 CALCULATIONS These options allow you to activate and define how the output of standard or user defined chromatograph analysis data is used in various calculations ERES 5 5 1 Control System foe NE Use this function to designate by streams the User Defined Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature control Serial Ports TCPIIP JULY 2010 Averages User Defined standard calculations e g mole percent liquid volume gas density Wobbe index etc th
24. Program Settings Print Setup C i Register MON2000 Cance Update MON2000 Recent File Exit Note that the default password admin is not case sensitive This password is used as a security measure to deny unauthorized Customizing MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 File Application Reports Logs Chror Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PC Config Report Offline Edit gt GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 25 users access to the MON2000 Users submenu which allows Super users to add edit or change security levels se S Regular Regular Regular Regular Regular NOTE At least one user should be a superuser Cancel oad Users to GE F2 Use the File gt Change Administrator menu to change the Administrator password The Change Administrator Password dialog box appears Change Administrator Password BE xi Old Password New Password Confirm New Password k Cancel Insert the old password enter the new password and confirm the change Then click the your changes button to apply Configure Users 2 26 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 4 Toconfigure a new user or edit existing user parameters a Click the appropriat
25. STRING VARIABL kri STRIN STRIN STRIN STRIN STRIN STRIN GE oO oco oc A A a STRIN VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL A VARIABL A STRING VARIABL A VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABLI indicates index is incremented Field List used in Variable Avg avg_data avg_data avg_data avg_data avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel hivel hivel hive2 hivel hivel hivel hive2 hivel hivel hivel hive2 number label avg minimum maximum avg minimum maximum avg minimum maximum 1 1 1 1 1 TA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_headerl 1 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 HE 0 VARIABLE avg_data number TA T 0 VARIABLE avg data label TA T 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg data S 1E T 0 STRING 129 VARIABLE avg_data C 1 1 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel avg l 1 0 VARIABLE avg archivel minimum Tx 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel maximum TX 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archive2 VA TL 0 STRING 0
26. Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature control Serial Ports TCPIIP 5 5 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 23 Averages Use this function to designate by streams and components averages of standard calculations MON2000 should perform 1 Use the Application gt Calculations gt Averages menu to access this function 2 The Averages Calculations dialog appears Double click the desired cell and either type the new data or use the provided pull down menu to select the new setting Averages Calculations E Monthly ANN Vaariable MM Not Used EN le Percent e Percent e Percent le Percent e Percent e Percent e Percent e Percent e Percent e Percent e Percent Component Hours _ Restart EB 47 35 17 PROPANE KBUTANE nBUTANE NEDPENTANE KPENTANE nPENTANE Stream 1 NITROGEN Stream 1 METHANE Stream 1 10 CARBON DIOXIDE Stream 1 11 ETHANE Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 Stream 1 o 72 CD Cn 4 CO P9 w Heating Value Gross BTU Dry Stream 1 Gallons 1000 SCF Gallons 1000 SCF Gallons 1000 SCF Stream 1 1 CB 47 35 17 Stream 1 2 PROPANE Stream 1 3 i BUTANE Avg Molecular Weight Stream 1 Brchive FB Convery Bony CES ie HEN a Cancel JULY 2010 When changing the reset time note the following
27. VARIABLI Si 7 TRING TRING VARIABLI El Fl Li stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data sdry kcal kg idry kcal kg real rd gas real rd lqd rden lqd 15 totl unrml avg molwgt wobbe gas density gas dens m3 lqd density lqd dens m3 STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO 190 73 191 74 192 31 34 58 58 33 TI 35 35 36 36 36 ES 75 37 37 76 STRING 76 STRING 38 VARIABLE stream_data reid_vapor STREAM_NO 0 STRING 38 TABLE 200 TVAR anlin label 1 0 TVAR aincur jur 0 STRING 160 TABLE 160 TVAR calcs label I 0 TVAR calcval 1 0 indicates index is incremented Field List used in Raw Data Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 DATE DATE STRING 0 VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM NO 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE stream data cycl time STREAM NO 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE stream data stream num STREAM NO 0 VARIABLE strms name STREAM NO 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE stream data run mode STREAM NO 0 STR
28. avg avg avg avg avg avg avg 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 7096 7097 7098 7099 7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 sim r sim r sim r sim rf sim rf sim rf sim r sim r sim rf sim rf sim rf sim rf sim r sim r sim rf sim rf sim rf sim rf sim r sim r sim r sim rf sim rf sim rf sim rf sim r sim r sim rf sim rf sim rf sim rf avgs avgs avg avg Not Used Not Used No No No No 151 152 1538 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 16 L1 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Zu 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 sed sed sed
29. avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Not Not Not Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used 7492 7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505 7506 7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 7512 7513 7514 79515 7516 7517 7518 7519 7520 7521 7522 7523 7524 avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel h
30. hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used 7360 7361 7362 7363 7364 7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 T3795 7376 7377 7378 7379 7380 7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 7390 7391 7392 avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hiv
31. 5 Bm GC Directory File menu Use this function to create and edit entries in the GC Directory file GCDIR DAT which lists available GCs and their communications parameters Directory Description Station Name non edit name of application that has been downloaded to that GC controller Comm ID Modbus slave address 1 to 247 Comments a text string displayed in the connect to GC list Assists in identification PC Port select port COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 Baud Rate select baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 Data Bits select data bits 7 or 8 Stop Bits select stop bits 1 or 2 Parity select parity EVEN ODD or NONE Handshaking select handshaking RTS CTS or NONE RTS On Delay enter in milliseconds 0 to 5000 the delay between RTS on and start of data transmission RTS Off Delay enter in milliseconds 0 to 5000 the delay between the end of data transmission and RTS off Extra Delay The delay 0 to 10000 in milliseconds that is added to the default communications timeout The default communications timeout is 2000 milliseconds Ifthe GC controller s RTS on or off delays are used the extra delay should be set to at least the sum of the GC controller s on and off delays since the GC controller does not begin its response until after its RTS on delay has passed and is then not ready to receive another query until after its RTS off delay has passed Protocol s
32. 7 n PENTANE 3 4 CAL 10 4018 2 3715 72 15 n PENTANE 8 NITROGEN 3 2 CAL 10 0 28 01 NITROGEN 9 METHANE 3 3 CAL 10 1012 3 911 16 04 METHANE 10 CARBON DIOXIDE 3 4 CAL 10 0 44 01 CO2 11 ETHANE 3 5 CAL T0 X772 1622 30 07 ETHANE No Component Lb Gal GPMFactor Reid Vapor RelDenGas RelDenLqd 1 C6 47 35 17 5 6681 0 4462 3 0194 3 23132 0 68 2 PROPANE 4 227 0 2756 188 64 1 5226 0 507 3 i BUTANE 4 693 0 3271 42591 2 0068 0 5629 4 n BUTANE 4 869 0 3153 51 709 2 0068 0 584 5 NEOPENTANE 4 975 0 383 35 9 2 4911 0 5967 6 i PENTANE 5 206 0 3661 20 445 2 4912 0 6244 7 n PENTANE 53 2 61 0 3622 15 574 2 4912 0 6311 8 NITROGEN 6 748 0 1096 0 0 9672 0 8094 9 METHANE 2 5 0 1695 5000 0 5539 0 3 10 CARBON DIOXIDE 82 0 1704 0 1 5196 0 818 11 ETHANE 97 0 2675 800 1 0382 0 3562 No Component HVSupMJ m3 HVInfMJ m3 HVSupMJ kg HVInfMJ kg M RelDens 1 C6 47 35 17 196 98 1952252 48 557 44 99 0 6803 2 PROPANE 93 936 86 42 50 368 46 34 0 5078 3 i BUTANE 121 41 112 01 49 388 45 57 0 5635 4 n BUTANE 121 79 112 4 49 546 45 72 0 5846 5 NEOPENTANE 148 76 137 49 48 75 45 06 0 6 i PENTANE 149 36 138 09 48 949 45 25 0 6249 7 n PENTANE 149 66 138 38 49 045 45 35 0 6316 8 NITROGEN 0 0 0 0 0 8093 9 METHANE 37 708 33 948 55 575 50 034 0 3 10 CARBON DIOXIDE 0 0 0 0 0 8227 11 E
33. ALT V S to display and hide the GC Status Bar which displays the following Next Aniy Run Stream Cycle GC name of the GC currently online Alarm status Unacknowledged Detector number Mode e g analysis Calibration mode or Analysis mode Streams number current streams Next next stream number to run Anly analysis cycle Run run time Date current date is displayed Time current time is displayed The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the mouse pointer over the menu selection This area similarly shows messages that describe the actions of toolbar buttons as you press and hold them After viewing the description of the toolbar button command and you do not wish execute the command move the mouse pointer away from the toolbar command then release the mouse button JULY 2010 GC Status Bar 3 6 GETTING STARTED MON2000 The right areas of the status bar indicate which of the following keys are activated Indicator Description CENE GR CAP the Caps Lock key is ON NUM the Num Lock key is ON SCRL the Scroll Lock key is ON Your connection status is also displayed in the titlebar If Online Edit appears then MON20OOO is connected to the GC and is recognizing the existing application If Connected appears then MON2000 is connected to the GC but does not recognize the existing application If no connection data is
34. Archive Data Trend Data REPORTS 7 19 1 Use the Reports gt MON2000 Printer Control menu to access this function 2 The Printer Control dialog displays Printer Control x Report Name IET CA 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM 12 00 AM kl a ae kl a ee kaa a ae A ka a aa s ki kk a in la Ey kl ka a aa ay 12 00 AM Use the provided data fields check and combo boxes to select the desired settings See Table 7 9 for detailed descriptions You can for example set a report to print after each analysis and every 12 hours Each report generation interrupts all current functions Click the Cancel button to abort and JULY 2010 3 Click the button to accept your selections and return to the main window return to the main window Table 7 9 Description of Settings for MON2000 Printer Control Setting Description Anly enable disable report printing after each analysis run regardless of report type selected Cal enable disable report printing after each calibration run regardless of report type selected FCal enable disable report printing after every final calibration run regardless of report type selected Time time at which report should print every 24 hours 00 00 disables 24 hour setting 12 00 AM disables 12 hour setting Note that the Time setting will override the Hours setting MON2000 Printer Control 7 20
35. EE 031901 cgm B today cgm CES 3 zoom cgm cgm red6 13 02 cgm J LAST cgm File name fen 001 cam Files of type cam Files cam yi Cancel Li 2 Use the provided directory tree to locate the desired CGM file or CGM Comparison file and click the button to open From File on Disk JULY 2010 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 5 MON2000 3 The Chromatogram window displays Chromatogram Viewer T de x Component Det Time 4 GC Archivi n 0 0 25 5 51 0 76 5 1020 127 5 153 0 1785 2040 2295 266 0 m Print at end of run i Time s PC File Baselines Raw Data X Close TIT Chromatogram Graph 4 a Cursor Print If a chromatogram contains data for more than one detector a Select Detector menu dialog displays Double click either Detector 1 Detector 2 or Both JULY 2010 From File on Disk 6 6 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 4 MON2000 displays the chromatogram file kana The corresponding data is dynamically displayed in the provided legends 1 Integrate Use the Graph and Chromatogram functions to manipulate the display To zoom in on a particular point click and drag your mouse over that area repeat as necessary Use the Save State Restore State or Zoom In or Out options from the right click menu see Section 6 9 to return to the original display for both Live and Archived CGM views
36. Parameter List Maintenance Log JULY 2010 Description of MON2000 1 8 INTRODUCTION MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank Description of MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 1 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 1 This section lists the system requirements to run MON2000 and provides installation procedures as well as initial logon instructions communications setup and software configuration SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS To achieve maximum performance when running the MON2000 software ensure your PC system contains the following hardware PC with a 486 90MHz or higher processor Pentium 100M Hz or higher recommended running either Windowsg 95 service pack 1 or better or later equipment and Microsoftg Windowse operating system Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later is required to view spreadsheets or reports saved in HTML format If running Windows 95 with the 2350A optional Ethernet card the user must download Socket 2 from www microsoft com windows95 downloads to utilize MON2000 s ethernet feature JULY 2010 System Requirements 2 2 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Windowse 98 version 1 or later Windowse 2000 version 1 or later Windowsg XP version 1 or later see note for system requirements Windowsg NT Server version 4 service pack 3 or later Use the Settings gt Control Panel gt System General Page menu to check the system version number For
37. Press the ENTER key to save this description Use the X button or press the ESC key to exit this dialog without saving your entry 7 6 7 Print Trend To print the displayed trend graph click the Print button MON 2000 prints the report to your configured printer see Section 3 7 JULY 2010 Describe Trend 7 36 REPORTS MON2000 7 6 8 Save Trend To save a currently displayed trend to disk N OTI CE The table is saved as a 1 Click the Sav button binary file with a trd extension 2 Use the provided directory tree to select the desired file location and name then click the Save button 3 MON2000 saves the trend along with its graph settings 7 6 9 Read Trend Archive This feature is not available if the corresponding analysis record does not exist in the GC memory or if you are viewing this trend data offline from a file To read the Trend Archive 1 Click the Archive button If you are operating a Model 700 or 2350A GC then an Archive Range Selection dialog displays x Start Date a Toggle the appropriate radio button to select either All Dates or Selected Dates End Date To specify a date range use the Start Date and End Date pull down menus I button to continue b Click the E Save Trend JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 37 MON2000 2 The Archive dialog appears Calculation Results from 2350 001 stream 0 on 11712799 7 54 02 PM 3 C
38. Range None Even Odd Default None Handshake RTS On Handshaking method Range None RTS CTS XON XOFF Default None Delay in milliseconds between RTS activation and the start of data transmis sion NOTE If used it may be necessary to set an extra delay in the GC Directory accessed via the File gt GC Directory menu Range 0 to 5000 RTS Off Delay in milliseconds between RTS termination and the end of data transmis sion Range 0 to 5000 Protocol Transmission protocol Range ASCII RTU Default ASCII Serial Ports JULY 2010 MON2000 Setting Com ID APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 71 Table 5 13 Description of Serial Port Settings Continued Description Modbus slave address To use the address defined by the GC Controller DIP switches set to 0 Read Write Read write setting Range R Read only W Write only RW Read and write This parameter only functions with slave ports Mode Only applies to 2850A CPU board P N 2 3 2350 190 or Model 700 CPU board P N 2 3 0700 036 Sets the communication protocol directly instead of through jumper settings Range RS232 RS422 RS485 Click the button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 5 17 1 Serial Ports Configuration Each GC Controller port number is listed in the Port column of the Serial Ports dialog T
39. Selection of Start End time Most Recent n Days Since Last Collected or Entire Log Maintenance Log Selection of Start End Time Most Recent n Days Since Last Collected or Entire Log Registers Both User Modbus and SIM 2251 single and multiple register queries are supported Reports Archive data accessible via Reports gt Archive Data View Data menu are available selection based on most recent number of days date range single stream or all streams Selections are based on the various GC model and are consistent with the capabilities of those models and specific applications MON2000 Overview JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 3 MON2000 Condition Start Start of conditional polls The poll commands following the Condition Start are run only when the condition is met The condition is defined through the status change of a Modbus register SIM_2251 or User_Modbus Condition End End of conditional polls The poll commands following the Condition End are run normally Use these Data Collection functions to configure a polling control file and start the Auto Sequencing module Configuration Open File Open or edit an existing Polling Control file Configuration New File Create a new Polling Control file and use the Commands to configure the polling settings Start Auto Initiate the Auto Sequencing module During Auto Sequencing a Status display is maintained
40. Text Files txt Archive Export Data 7 26 REPORTS If the GC you are using is a Model 2350A the Data Selection Range dialog appears Choose the date range as All dates radio button or Selected Dates radio button Start date End date Also note that the Date Range dialog only displays when files are archived for more than one day 5 Click the button to apply your selection Click the button to abort and return to the Trend Data window Cancel 6 The Select Archive Records dialog appears Select Archive Reco 25 Ei ILEAK 5 Steam 5 9 19 03 143313 1 Stieam1 9 19 03 14 29 13 11 Stream11 Anl 39 9 03 142513 7 Steam 7 Any 9 19 03 142113 5 Stieam 5 Any 9 9 03 141713 1 Steam 1 Anl 959 03 14 13 13 11 Steam 11 Anly 319 03 140813 7 Stream 7 Anl 919 03 14 05 13 5 Sueam 5 Any 3 9 03 140113 1 Steam 1 Anl 9 19 03 135713 11 Steam11 Anl 9 19 03 135313 7 Stieam 7 Any 9 1903 134913 5 Stieam 5 Anl 9 9 03 134513 1 Stieam 1 Anl 9 1903 134113 11 Stream11 Any 9 19 03 133713 11 m 11 7 Steam 7 Anl 9 19 03 133313 7 Steam 7 Anly 5 Steam 5 Anl 9 19 03 132913 5 Steam 5 Anly 1229 13 1 Stream 1 99 03 132513 1 Sueam1 Anly 1325 13 11 Stream 11 9 19 03 132113 11 Stream11 Anl 132113 v Select Archive Select Archive Record Default Record Selection To Select all records the op
41. The User Defined Calculations dialog appears User Defined Calculations X Edt Cale F2 Cancel Alphanumeric field 3 Click the calculation name you wish to edit or click in the next available blank Label cell The Label field accepts 15 characters N 0 TI CE 4 Click the EdiCalc F2 button to edit or Your user defined calculation create the calculation function The Edit ee a variable that can be User Defined Calculation dialog appears used when Neg sep era ae oes assigning alarm limits Variable Stream Component 1 Avg Molecular Weight 1 Stream 1 2 calculating analog outputs Gallons 1000 SCF C2 1 Stream 1 generating bargraphs and Mole Percent 1 Stream 1 reports 1 Stream Nisa ee 1 E i 1 Steam T e creating other user defined 3 Stream 3 calculations 8 Stream 8 User Defined JULY 2010 MON2000 The calculation completes each step from top to bottom JULY 2010 Application System Component Data F6 Timed Events F5 User Defined gt Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Go Serial Ports TCPYIP 5 6 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 27 a To change the calculation function click the appropriate cell and use the pull down menu to choose the desired operator To change or add a variable name u
42. To edit the settings displayed double click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus See Section 5 10 1 for more details MON2000 a Gallons 1000 SCF C4 EN Gallons 1000 SCF C5 EE Gallons 1000 SCF C6 ANA Gas Density Ibm 1000 ft3 EM Gas Density kg m3 EE lue Gross BTU Dry ue Gross BTU Sat ue Gross BTU Act lue Net BTU Dry lue Net BTU Sat lue Net BTU Act lue Sup MJ m3 Dry ue Sup MJ m3 Sat lue Sup MJ m3 Act Inf MJ Inf MJ t ue Sup MJ kg Dry Value Inf MJ kg Dr Multiple streams can be entered by separating the stream numbers with commas e g 2 3 Bargraph results will be produced for each stream Changing a Variable JULY 2010 MON2000 Variable wa Gallons 1000 SCF C4 F Gallons 1000 SCF C5 Ei Gallons 1000 SCF C6 ANN Gas Density Ibm 1000 ft3 ENN Gas Density kg m3 regen Heating Value Gross BTU Dry 10 Heating Value Gross BTU Sat Heating Value Gross BTU Act lue Net BTU Dry lue Net BTU Sat lue Net BTU Act ue Sup MJ m3 Dry ue Sup MJ m3 Sat ue Sup MJ m3 Act lue Inf MJ m3 Dr lue Inf MJ m3 Sat lue Inf MJ m3 Act lue Sup MJ kg Dry ue Inf MJ kg Dr Setting both adjustment values to 0 0 disables the scale adjustment See Appendix D for an alternative calibration method for analog outputs Appendix D includes an example of calibrating an output scale of O to 1200 JULY 2010 3 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 53 To change
43. avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc minim minim minim minim minim minim minim hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg um um um um um um um 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265 7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 3274 7272 7273 7274 7275 7276 7271 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284 7285 7286 7287 7288 7289 7290 7291 7292 7293 avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg
44. command in the Command Description field Connect Logon Command JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 11 MON2000 9 2 5 Connect No Logon Command The Poll Command Connect No Logon allows the Auto Sequencing function to execute without logging on to a GC Controller To configure the Connect No Logon Command 1 Select Connect No Logon from the General Configuration Command pull down list General Configuration List of Commands Commands IM Connect No Logon 2 From the GC Entry list that is configured in the File gt GC Directory menu select the desired GC Controller 3 Enter a description for the Connect No Logon command in the Command Description field 9 2 6 Delay Seconds Command Prior to executing the auto polling function the Delay Seconds Command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to delay for a specified interval of time The user enters the time delay in one second increments JULY 2010 Connect No Logon Command 9 12 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 To configure the Delay Seconds Command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands pull down list select Delay Seconds General Configuration List of Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay 5 E zu l I Delay Seconds Delay Seconds 2 Enter the time delay in one second increments in the Delay field 3 Enter a description for the Delay Seconds command in the Command Desc
45. menu to select the identification number of the discrete hardware input to be used for alarm purposes MON2000 Input values can range from 1 to N per the discrete hardware output identification N O TI G E number and the GC application A discrete input of O Not used indicates that no input has been assigned To configure discrete inputs see Section 5 11 4 Use the provided Discrete Output pull down menu to select the identification number of All alarms from digital inputs with assignments other than O are recorded in the Alarm Log Discrete Alarms JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 5 7 1 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 33 the discrete hardware output to be used for alarm purposes A discrete output can be used to monitor one or more inputs If you are using discrete outputs to reflect the status of GC analysis data alarms ensure that the output assignments set here coordinate with those set in the Limit Alarms dialog see Section 5 6 Output values can range from 1 to N per the discrete hardware output identification number and the GC application A discrete output of O Not used indicates that no output has been assigned To configure discrete outputs see Section 5 12 Delayed Discrete Alarms A delayed discrete alarm can be set to trigger a discrete alarm and activate the appropriate discrete output if a previously specified discrete input has been closed
46. n BUTANE NEOPENTANE i PENTANE n PENTANE NITROGEN METHANE CARBON DIOXIDE ETHANE JULY 2010 e Calibration Run 3 of 3 75 11 04 Analysis Time 60 Cycle Time Mode FCAL Cycle Start Time Strm Seq 1 RAW DATA 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 D 1 D 0 a 0 oO 2 9 1 5 oooooocooooono0 ooooooooooo OU cCco0ooOon0o0uouuonou oo 69 6 6 6c 6 6 0 6 MON2000 creates a temporary HTML file to display the generated report If you want to save this report to disk see Section 7 1 4 The display refreshes per the update setting configured in the Report Display dialog see Section 7 4 For example in the Report Display dialog if Stream is set to O Current and Update is set to Anly the report display will refre after the GC analyzes the stream selected via the Report Display dialog The refresh function displays the newly generated report and deletes the previous report unless already saved to disk Check the GC status bar for the run time and current stream Use the scroll bars to see other areas of the button to increase or decrease the font size displayed report Use the Font View Report from Live Data 7 4 REPORTS MON2000 See the following sections for instructions printing the displayed file or opening other report files from disk 6 Click the Close button or press the ESC key to exit th
47. op pres cal op pres cal op pres cal stream data op pres cal op pres cal op pres cal stream data op pres cal op pres cal op pres cal stream data op pres cal op pres cal op pres cal stream data op pres cal op pres cal op pres cal stream data op pres cal op pres cal op pres cal ssat kcal m3 sact kcal m3 idry kcal m3 isat kcal m3 iact kcal m3 STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO 21 33 19 33 20 32 10 22 34 11 23 35 12 24 36 185 68 186 69 187 70 188 71 189 72 Si 7 TRING TRING VARIABLI Si 7 VARIABL s Si VARIABL 7 VARIABL Si VARIABL 7 7 VARIABL 7 VARIABILI Si s VARIABL Si 7 TRING TRING TRING TRING El kri TRING TRING TRING TRING kri TRING CI TRING TRING TRING TRING VARIABLI 7 7 TRING TRING VARIABLI Si 7 TRING TRING
48. sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 any PIE 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avg maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um 36 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72 Tad 721 721 721
49. see Section 5 specific to a particular GC Controller For 2350A GC Controllers and the Model 700 controller application files app files are normally stored in the GC APP directory 3 Click the button to download the selected application file to the connected GC unit Click the Cancel button to exit and return to the main window 4 MON2000 reads the time at the GC vzw HAR Controller and the Set Time dialog appears posam E appears for you to edit or accept see Standard Time Section 4 7 2 for more information 5 A progress bar appears indicating the completion status See Table 2 10 for a listing of the automatically enabled function keys JULY 2010 Downloading an Application 2 74 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Table 2 10 Main Menu Function Keys Enabled by Download Key Function Description F1 Help Access context sensitive online help F2 Start Auto Sequence Initialize the Auto Sequencing function This function is also available via the Control gt Auto Sequence menu F3 Halt Stop a function at the end of the current cycle This function is also available via the Control gt Halt menu F5 Edit TEVs Display the Timed Event Tables This function is also available via the Application gt Timed Events menu F6 Edit CDTs Display the Component Data Tables This function is also available via the Application Component Data menu F7 View Current CGM Display chromatogram of the st
50. switch OFF the AC power source to the GC Controller either at the breaker box or the controlling power source switch Also disconnect the AC power cord from J21 before continuing working on the unit Disconnect Power and Disassemble JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 11 1 Disconnect AC power from the GC Controller When you have access to the GC Controller Terminal Board TB for field wiring accessed from the rear on rack mount versions and behind the front cover of explosion proof models disconnect the AC power cord from J21 before continuing working on the unit For newer model 19 inch rack mount and retrofit GC Controllers proceed as follows a Remove the right side access panel that is secured to the chassis with four thumbscrews b Unplug all cables connected to the boards in slots 2 through 6 of the Card Cage Assembly in order to access the SBC53 CPU Board c Proceed to Step 3 below For the explosion proof GC Controller or older rack mount GC Controllers proceed as follows a Access the GC Controller Terminal Board for field wiring On the explosion proof GC Controller remove outer housing bolts and lower the cover on its bottom hinge The TB faces the front On rack mount GC Controllers the TB is exposed and faces the rear b Loosen the six thumbscrews that secure the TB Then gently unplug the TB from its mating DIN connectors at
51. table cell Click the x button or press the ESC key to abort and return to the Component Data Table dialog To add a new row to the CDT click the last cell in the last row and press the ENTER key Standard Components x CB 47 35 17 C6 50 50 00 C6 50 25 25 C6 57 28 14 CARBON MONOXIDE CARBON DIOXIDE Select Standard Component s JULY 2010 MON2000 5 2 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 11 Select Standard Values To read the values for the standard components click the StdValues F3 button or press the F3 key to access the Standard Components dialog Standard Components ISO value x ACETYLENE Cancel Typically this function should only be performed when the MON2000 software is upgraded User defined components are not affected by this update JULY 2010 5 2 3 Click the Cancel button to return to the CDT Update Standard Component s Click the Update STD ir or press the F5 key to upgrade the Standard Components list of this CDT to match the MON2000 Standard Component menu Note that this function updates the standard component list for the current CDT MON2000 displays a confirmation dialog when a standard component is changed Select Standard Values 5 12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 2 4 View Raw Data To view the raw data for the displayed CDT 1 Select the desired row from the currently displayed CDT 2 Click the Raw Data
52. to access this function 2 The Analog Outputs dialog appears Analog Outputs Ea THANE Bargraph F5 Auto Cal F8 Cancel 3 Select the channel to be calibrated Output channels 1 and 2 can be scaled from either 4 20 mA or 1 5 V Channels 3 to 10 are scaled from 4 20 mA Although output channels for direct voltage measurement exist for analog output channels 1 and 2 it is recommended that they not be used for calibration purposes Instead use the current out terminals and the 250 ohm resistor as described All can be scaled with a percentage Calibrating by Percentages JULY 2010 MON2000 Your Voltmeter reading should be close to 1 0 V but does not have to be exactly 1 0 V If the reading is negative reverse the leads JULY 2010 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A D 7 To change a variable assignment click the appropriate Variable cell Use the provided pull down menu and click the desired variable to select it 5 5 Gallons 1000 SCF C4 ri Gallons 1000 SCF C5 zm Gallons 1000 SCF C6 LANM Gas Density Ibm 1000 ft3 ie Gas Density kg m3 i lue Gross BTU Dry ue Gross BTU Sat ue Gross BTU Act lue Net BTU Dry lue Net BTU Sat lue Net BTU Act lue Sup MJ m3 Dry lue Sup MJ m3 Sat lue Sup MJ m3 Act ue Inf MJ m3 Act ue Sup MJ kg Dry ue Inf MJ kg Dr Set Zero Scale to 0 and Full Scale to 1200 Set the Fixed Var parameter to Fixed Set Fixed Value to 0
53. whether the component data is standard or user defined If the component was added by the Select Standard Component function see Section 5 2 1 and no changes were made to the component data STD displays If the component was added manually by the user or modified USR displays Detector ID component detector number Retention Time time in seconds that apex of the component peak V will appear Range 0 to 6000 seconds Ensure that the component retention times do not exceed the analysis time as defined by the TEV Table see Section 5 3 MON2000 does not automatically prevent the user from defining excessive component retention times Response Factor equal to the raw data of component peak divided J by component concentration The maximum value is 1 0E 38 Component Data JULY 2010 MON2000 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 9 Table 5 2 Description of Standard Parameters in a CDT Continued Item Fixed Variable Function whether a component response factor is fixed or variable A fixed response factor will not be updated during calibration Edit Calibration Concentration component concentration in calibration gas To enter a PPM type Xp e g 4 0p will appear as 4 0 ppm Values above 90 PPM are converted to percentages Analysis Method used to determine component raw data value Use the pull down menu to select either area height fixed or the appropria
54. 0 Set Zero Scale Adjustment and Full Scale Adjustment to 0 0 Click the button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 10 Connect a 250 ohm resistor across the signal at the input of the device where this analog output is used Connect a Voltmeter across the resistor and measure the result 11 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and reselect the channel being calibrated 12 Set the Fixed Value to the Full Scale value entered in Step 5 Calibrating by Percentages D 8 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A MON2000 13 Click the 1 OK button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 14 Look at the voltmeter again and record the full scale reading NOTICE 15 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and Your voltmeter reading reselect the channel being calibrated should be very close to 16 Change the Zero Scale Adjustment to the in bie jid zero scale voltage reading and the Full ee span will be 4 Volts and Scale Adjustment to the full scale voltage ue accordingly reading 17 Click the button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 18 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and reselect the channel being calibrated 19 To quickly verify your changes enter the midpoint of your range e g 600 for the Fixed Value Click the j button to accept your change The resulting voltage output should be clo
55. 0 RTU 0 1 1 1 1 None None ORTU 8 8 9600 8 eport USER M DBUS ki mon SIM 2251 Registers F3 Cancel 2 Verify the MON2000 serial port Usage setting a Determine the GC Controller serial port to which you are directly connected N OTI C E b In the Serial Ports dialog ensure that the Usage setting for the port is either Consult accurate SIM 2251 or User Modbus documentation of the GC i installation or visually If the setting is incorrect change it by inspect the serial line connection at the GC using the provided combo box Controller Terminal Board 3 Verify the Baud Rate setting WinMB accepts the following baud rates 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 115200 4 Ensure the remaining serial port parameters are correct Revise as required and record for future reference Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 RTS On Off settings are required only when line settling is needed before data transmission begins Record the true Device ID number for future use JULY 2010 MODBUS TEST 10 5 Typical settings are Table 10 2 Typical GC Communications Parameters Parameter RTU Setting ASCII Setting Data Bits 8 7 Stop Bits 1 1 Parity None Even Handshake None None RTS On 0 0 RTS Off 0 0 Ptrel RTU ASCII Note that the RTU protocol permits a more efficient data transmission for it uses signif
56. 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Double click the desired archived report or record If no records are found an information dialog displays Select a range multiple of records to archive by left clicking the mouse at the beginning record and dragging the pointer to the last record to be archived Then press the ENTER key Or Left click the mouse pointer on the beginning record then move the mouse pointer to another location either further up or down the list and while holding down NOTICE the Shift key click the ending record All highlighted records will be automatically MON2000 limits the selected Press the Enter key to display all number of viewable of the selected records Archived Records to 100 View Data Model 500 Model 700 JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 23 MON2000 5 The Calculation Results from Ext Modbus window appears Calculation Results from Ext Modbus E x Save Clipboard Print Close Use the X button or press the ESC key to exit this function and return to the main window As applicable use the scroll bars to see other areas of the record JULY 2010 View Data Model 500 Model 700 7 24 REPORTS 6 To print copy to the clipboard or save the report to disk right click the Archive Data sheet and select the desired option from the popup menu Or use the Print Clipboard or Save buttons for these functions Use the Save File dialog to ch
57. 13 51 AM LAST cgm Cur All Save Cmp kisal W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cam a JULY 2010 Graph Functions 6 10 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 2 Click the Edit button The Edit Graph dialog appears Edit Graph EI X Min 0 0 r Display Option Lines x Max fi 00 0 sa Y Min 10 0 Y Max fi 00 0 Show labels Print Speed 2 IM Scroll newest X X Intervals o Y Intervals n Cancel 3 Use the provided attributes and options to change the chromatogram display and printer speed as desired 4 Click the button to accept your changes and return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog 5 The chromatogram display changes as specified Additional display options are available by right clicking the display area See Section 6 9 for more information 6 5 2 Changing Cursor Size To toggle the cursor size from coarse movement less accurate to fine movement more accurate click the Cusor button Changing Cursor Size JULY 2010 MON2000 To save the displayed chromatogram to disk see Section 6 4 To remove a chromatogram from view see Section 6 3 To toggle the TEV and CGM Component spreadsheet display see Section 6 6 8 JULY 2010 6 5 3 6 6 Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove GIGED E CGM 2 DanalyzerPRO Stream 1
58. 1564 34 1562 14 1561 41 1560 69 1429 12 1428 84 1428 74 1428 64 Ethyl Alcohol 46 07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ethylbenzene 106 167 0 4858 0 4207 0 4037 4613 14 4609 53 4608 32 4607 15 4387 77 4387 37 4387 2 4387 07 Ethylene 28 0532 0 0866 0 08 0 0775 1413 51 1412 11 1411 65 1411 18 1323 36 1323 24 1323 2 1323 15 Ethylene Oxide 44 05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 sudejBo1euloJu2 Sed 104 BILMIJLOS 000Z NOW 8 4 OLOC ATNNA oe qe eleq jueuodwo9 Table B 2 ISO Component Data Table Component Molar Sum Sum Sum CVSup CVSup CVSup Sus CV Inf CVInf d M int Name Mass jeu NC dec e E ures kJ Mol pe Gey Mol Mol 25 C 20 C 25 C 3 Ethylpentane 100 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H2S 34 0809 0 1 0 1 0 1 562 94 562 38 562 19 562 01 517 87 517 95 517 97 517 99 HCL 36 46 925 1 2588 0 8558 7 135 0 1349 0 0 0 0 0 0 Helium 4 0026 0 0006 0 0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hydrogen 2 0159 0 004 0 0048 0 0051 286 63 286 15 285 99 285 83 241 56 241 72 241 76 241 81 i Butane 58 1222 0 2049 0 1789 0 1703 2874 2 2870 58 2869 38 2868 2 2648 83 2648 42 2648 26 2648 12 i Butene 56 108 0 1871 0 1703 0 1673 2704 8 2702 2701 1 2700 2 2524 5 2524 3 2524 2 2524 1 i Pentane 72 1488 0 251 0 228 0 2168 3535 98 3531 68 3530 24 3528 83 3265 54 3265 08 3264 89 3264 73 i Propylbenzene 120 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i Octane 114 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Methane 16 0425 0 049 0 0447 0 0436 892 97 891 56 891 09 890 63 802 82 802 69 802 65 802 6
59. 1887 Reid Vapor 0 0 0 212 3 224 62 1055 63 05 55 448 20 60 188 62 51 567 63 05 15 576 3 01891 3 29 3 51579 Table B 1 Example Standard Component Data Table Rel Dens Rel Dens Gas 0 899 1 1 3792 0 588 2 6969 2 0068 1 9372 1 9372 1 8676 1 8676 1 5225 2 0068 1 9372 2 4911 3 31309 3 21755 3 21755 Liquid 0 615 0 87586 0 0 6173 0 8844 0 573515 0 6013 0 6097 0 658 0 6272 0 50719 0 5842 0 6013 0 63071 0 679907 0 676145 0 67556 Lb Gal 0 7 8022 0 5 15 7 373 4 78155 5 013 5 0833 5 486 5 229 4 2285 4 8706 5 013 5 2584 5 66853 5 63715 5 63228 GPM _ GrossDry Net Dry Factor 0 0 104759 0 0 0874 0 2798 0 32117 0 2956 0 2916 0 2604 0 2732 0 275429 0 315183 0 2956 0 362396 0 446214 0 43619 0 436267 BTU 1476 9 0 0 435 4 3750 5 3264 64 3087 3077 4 2946 7 2886 6 2521 92 3269 85 3087 4017 97 5288 71 5141 12 5141 09 1426 5 0 0 359 8 3599 2 3012 45 2885 4 2875 73 2795 5 2735 3 2320 36 3017 97 2885 4 3715 58 4900 62 4762 99 Daniel AGA 8 Sim 2251 BTU Component I D No Ethane 22 Airmix1 26 Argon 46 None ki n Hexane n Butane 33 n Butane 28 n Butane 32 n Butane 35 n Butane 34 Propane 47 n Butane 48 n Butane 29 n Pentane 49 C6mix1 08 C6mix2 09 C6mix3 10 4 162 99 sudejBo1euloJu5 Sed 104 eje 10S QOOZ NOW za OLOC An oe qe eleq jueuodwo9 Table B 1 Example Standard Component Data Table Continued
60. 3 Use the Output radio buttons to either save the report to disk print the report with or without form feeds or display on screen If you want to use the standard Windowsg Print dialog to select a printer uncheck the Use default printer option if the button or press the F4 key to generate your customized PC Config Report and print or save this file By default if a print option is selected MON2000 will print the report to your configured printer see Section 3 7 EXAMPLE REPORT This example PC Config Report on the following pages represents a typical report that includes all sections It is provided for reference only MON2000 If you are online with the GC Controller a PC Config Report that includes all options can require up to 20 minutes to generate and save Printing a full report can take longer If you press the ESC key MON2000 will stop after the current option is completed Example Report JULY 2010 System Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Description Value Stream Sequence 1 Aux Stream Sequence Analyzer Name 2350_001 Unit Type 2350 System Description 2350 Standard 1 64 avgs Chromatogram Buffers Size 21000 Max Peaks 64 Number of Valves 5 Daylight Saving Time Normal CGM Analog Output Config 0 Baseline Offset 12 CFG Baseline Number 1 Metric Base Conditions Off Max Archive Averages 64 Max Archive Avg Records 64 CFG Revision Level 150 CFG
61. Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output 16 Analyzer Failure Power F ailure HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW Fused Peak Overflow Noisy Baseline CPU Battery Low GC Idle Real Time Clock Failure Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input 1 CJ NO D og UC Dd H H H H L L L L IGH IGH IGH IGH OW OW OW OW User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 5 MON2000 90 IlImtalarm_set 6 1 91 lmtalarm set 7 1 92 lmtalarm set 8 1 93 imtalarm set 9 1 94 lmtalarm set 10 1 95 imtalarm set 11 1 96 Iimtalarm set 12 1 97 Imtalarm set 13 1 98 imtalarm set 14 1 99 imtalarm set 15 1 100 imtalarm set 16 1 101 Imtalarm_set 17 1 102 lmtalarm set 18 1 103 Imtalarm_set 19 1 104 Imtalarm_set 20 1 105 stream data stream togg 1 1 Stream 1 106 stream data stream togg 2 1 Stream 2 107 stream data stream_togg 3 1 Stream 3 108 stream data stream togg 4 1 Stream 4 109 stream data stream togg 5 1 Stream 5 110 stream data stream togg 6 1 Stream 6 1
62. Archive command to poll either the Last Analysis or Last Calibration CGM Archive for a specific stream The output file is in cgm format and the file name is based on the Analyzer Name Stream and Date Time The CGM file is stored in the NGCNSAVENCGM Archive folder To configure the CGM Archive Command 1 From the Configuration for Data Collection window click the ADD button to select another command 2 Next select the Poll command General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry SPD Com escription E Louni IE Poll CGM Archive CGM Archive 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Type field then select CGM Archive JULY 2010 Poll Command CGM Archive 9 20 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 4 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the CGM Archive command 5 Click the Pall Command Details button and the Poll Command CGM Archive dialog box appears Poll Command CGM Archive i XI CGM Archive Configuration Analysis Calibration 1 Last Analysis 6 Enter the Stream number for data collection O Save changes 7 Use the Analysis Calibration pull down list 3 and select the CGM Archive for the Last vw Analysis or Last Calibration 8 Click the OK button to apply the configuration changes MON2000 PLUS r
63. Base Name USASTD1 kok kok kk kk kk kk ck ck kk kk kk kk kk kk xk kckck kCkck kk ck kk ck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck kk k kk ck kk ck k ck ck k ck k k ck k k kk kk k Component Data Table Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Component Data Tabl 1 No Component U S DetID RetTim Resp Factor F V CalCone AnalMthd 1 C6 47 35 17 STD 30 2 2013490 VAR 0 0289 5 AREA 2 PROPANE STD 50452 1316330 VAR 1 0 AREA 3 i BUTANE STD 65 7 1520820 VAR 0 3 AREA 4 n BUTANE STD 136 1545350 VAR OSes AREA 5 NEOPENTANE STD 86 3 1651260 VAR 0 1 AREA 6 i PENTANE STD 109 4 1715050 VAR 0 0993 AREA 7 n PENTANE STD 121 6 1793230 VAR 0 0999 5 AREA 8 NITROGEN STD 149 5 782820 VAR 25 uS AREA 9 ETHANE STD 153 1 637330 VAR 89 5719 AREA 10 CARBON DIOXIDE STD 179 2 953088 VAR 1 0 AREA 11 ETHANE STD 200 6 1060440 VAR 5 0 AREA No Component RTDev SecDev Updt RFDev GRSBTU NETBTU MolWgt AGA8 1 C6 47 35 17 3 2 CAL 10 5288 7 4900 95 96 C mixl 2 PROPANE 3 2 CAL TO 25219 23205 44 1 PROPANE 3 i BUTANE 3 2 CAL 10 3259 4 3007 58 12 i BUTANE 4 n BUTANE 3 2 CAL 10 3269 8 3017 58 12 n BUTANE 5 NEOPENTANE 3 3 CAL 10 3993 9 3691 72 15 i PENTANE 6 i PENTANE 3 4 CAL 10 4010 2 3707 72 15 i PENTANE
64. Code Description Broadcast 1 Read Coil read one or more coil values 3 Read Reg read one or more register values 5 Set Single Coil set write one coil value J 5 Set Single Reg set write one register value V 15 Set Multiple Coils set write multiple coil values V 16 Set Multiple Regs set write multiple register values J 3 In the Data Addr data field type the starting register Note that the data type is set automatically by WinMB per the specified data address N 1 TI G E Use the Data Type pull down menu to select a different data type for these registers To ensure best data type assignments review a PC Table 10 5 Default Data Type per Register Range for SIM_2251 Contig Report see Section 2 16 3 to view a live report see Section 7 1 Register Range Default Type to view a report file see 1000 2999 Boolean Appendix A for a sample report 3000 4999 Integer 5000 6900 Long 7000 8999 Float To select data types for SIM_2251 registers 1000 to 9000 see Section 10 3 2 4 In the Quantity data field type the number of registers to be retrieved range from 1 to 2016 Getting Modbus Data JULY 2010 MON2000 Boolean registers are not user defined for either SIM 2251 or User Modbus and primarily contain alarm flags useful for debugging To view the contents of Boolean registers select the 1 Read Coil function code Numeric registers for User Modbus c
65. Controller memory New archived records will begin accumulating again as analysis and calibration runs occur Jl button to continue JULY 2010 Reset 7 28 REPORTS MON2000 7 6 TREND DATA This function allows you to view print or save graphical representations or trend lines of accumulated analysis data for the 2850A and the Model 700 GC Controllers 7 6 1 Trend Data Model 700 2350A GCs 1 Use the Reports gt Trend Data menu then click the Trend button to access this function 2 The Trend Data dialog appears TRDE Pt Value 1011 34 12721400 03 30 59 Use the enabled Graph and Trend push buttons to access the Trend Data features See the following sections for detailed information 3 Click the Cancel button to return to the main window Trend Data JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 29 MON2000 7 6 2 View Live Trend Online Model 700 2350A To view a live trend from the online Model 700 2350A GC You cannot view a live trend if the corresponding analysis record does not exist in the GC memory An error message will display ZAN No archive records 1 Click the Trend button 2 The Select menu for variable displays Avg Molecular Weight Compressibility Factor ue Gross BTU Sat ue Gross BTU Act ue Net BTU Dry lue Net BTU Sat lue Net BTU Act ue Sup MJ m3 Dry ue Sup MJ m3 Sat ue Sup MJ m3 Act ue Inf MJ m3 Dry Double click the desired vari
66. Defined Calculations Label User Value test ACTIVE 0 10 I ALARMS JULY 2010 lb gal PSIA Report Contents 7 10 REPORTS MON2000 Table 7 8 Contents Guide for Analysis Report Content Related Function s Menu Section Component Name Component Data Table CDT Application gt Component 5 2 Data F6 GC Analysis Data Calculations Control Application gt Calculations 5 5 1 variables std gt Control GC Analysis Data Calculations User Defined Application gt Calculations 5 5 8 variables user gt User Defined Alarms Limit Alarms Application gt Limit Alarms 5 6 Additional Base Compress ibility enabled Application gt Calculations 5 5 1 Pressures gt Control Streams Optional Pressure Application gt Streams 5 8 Report Contents JULY 2010 MON2000 Date Time 03 24 95 12 24 Stream 3 Stream 3 Analyzer AT401STD Company Daniel Industries Analysis Time 225 Cycle Mode ANLY Cycle Start Time 12 20 Strm Seq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Houston TX Raw Data Report ime 240 REPORTS 7 11 No RETENTION EAK PEAK DET MTHD INTEGRATION Peak Width IME AREA HEIGHT START END Half Height 1 25 7 1640 44 1 2 24 0 26 5 0 7 2 29 0 24864 409 1 3 26 5 33 6 1 4 3 48 8 3 66064e 005 4707 1 4 46 4 56 8 1 8 4 63 5 86164 792 1 2 59 5 68 0 2 5 5 71 5 90836 737 M 2 68 0 78 1 2 9 6 82 6 45000 299 1 3 78 1 90 3 3 6 7 105 7 49350 261 1 2 99 2 1
67. Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cgm CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 11 Printing the Chromatogram To print a currently displayed area of the chromatogram 1 Usethe Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Cal Cur All Save Cmp E CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm Y i CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030801 cgm LICGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM 030901 cgm 2 Click the Fint button CHROMATOGRAM FUNCTIONS Use the Chromatogram buttons to access any of the following chromatogram related functions gd Cur All Save cmp X Edit edit the Chromatogram Results view the CGM calculation results Desc save a description of the CGM Save save the displayed chromatogram to disk Remove removes a chromatogram from view Forced Cal perform a forced calibration Cur All toggle the TEV and CGM Component spreadsheet display Save CMP save multiple CGMs Printing the Chromatogram 6 12 6 6 1 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 Editing the Chromatogram Use the Edit Chromatogram function to change the x y offset values and other display parameters such as color 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced ca Cur All
68. Discrete Inputs Opt Pres 3 Discrete Outputs Valves ADEYOU P Serial Ports TCP IP to A A A CA vi Baseline Values F2 Cancel Optional pressure 1 c Scroll to the Opt Press columns and note these values along with the corresponding optional pressure and stream number s Setting Optional Base Results JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 91 MON2000 d If you wish to enter different pressure values do so now and then click the button to accept your changes Otherwise click the Cancel button to return to the main window 2 Use the Application gt Serial Ports menu to access this function Serial Ports xi Port Usage Parity Handshake 1 Report se00 8 1 None None 2 9600 8 1 None None 3 Report WS 8 1 None None 8 1 4 A a 9600 None None 3 From the Serial Ports dialog click the Registers F3 button or press the F3 key The Registers dialog appears mm Reg BEE Avo Molecular Weight Stream 1 2 12 Avg Molecular Weight Stream 1 22 Avg Molecular Weight Stream 1 33 Gas Density kg m3 Stream 3 36 Heating Value Gross BTU Dry Stream 3 344 Gallons 1000 SCF Stream 3 0 ojojojojojojojojo Edit Scales F2 Scale F5 Check FE Copy S F7 Copy C FB Cancel Integer field 0 8990 JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Results 5 92 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 4 From the Registers dialog
69. Dry Superior MJ m Dry Gross Heating Valueor Heating Value 2 14 26 Btu Sat Superior MJ m Sat Gross Heating Valueor Heating Value 3 15 27 Btu Act Superior MJ m Act Net Btu Dry Heating Value Inferior 4 16 28 MJ m Dry Net Btu Sat Heating Value Inferior 5 17 29 MJ m Sat Net Btu Act Heating Value Inferior 6 18 30 MJ m Act Real Relative Density Heating Value 7 19 31 Gas Superior kcal m Dry Gallons 1000 SCF C2 Heating Value 8 20 32 Superior kcal m Sat Gallons 1000 SCF C3 Heating Value 9 21 33 Superior kcal m Act Gallons 1000 SCF C4 Heating Value Inferior 10 22 34 kcal m Dry Gallons 1000 SCF C5 Heating Value Inferior 11 23 35 kcal m Sat Gallons 1000 SCF C6 Heating Value Inferior 12 24 36 kcal m Act JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Results 5 93 5 94 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Table 5 16 GC Analysis Variable Number per Optional Pressure Continued GC Analysis Variable US Metric Optional Pressure 1 2 Use the above index numbers to assign Results Opt Base Press to User Modbus registers TCP IP SUBNET AND GATEWAY MENU Use this function to configure the TCP IP Subnet and Gateway communication parameters for the 2350A GC Controller 1 Use the Application gt TCP IP menu to access this function 2 The TCP IP dialog displays See Appendix F for detailed instructions for th
70. F4 button or press the F4 key to access the Raw Data dialog 3 The Stream Selection dialog appears Double click the desired stream or click the X button to exit Only the streams associated with this CDT will display in the list menu 4 The Raw Data dialog appears listing the peak raw data from the last run of the N OTI C E stream represented by the CDT When first displayed during a cen MOI A 1 4 40 1042 73 dialog highlights the stream that has the most recent raw data Thereafter the previously selected stream is highlighted 5 The MON2000 operator can now copy the Retention Time from the Raw Data screen to the CDT as follows a Before pulling up the Raw Data screen click Component 1 of the CDT b Click the Raw Data button or press the F4 key to access the Raw Data screen c Press the ENTER key to copy the Retention Time the next component s View Raw Data JULY 2010 MON2000 Some methods are a combination of the above types e g 103 is LAST OF FUSED GROUP 3 and INHIBIT ON 100 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 13 RT is automatically targeted by MON2000 Then press the DOWN ARROW key to advance to the next Raw Data value d Repeat Step c until all Retention Times have been copied to the CDT Click the Close button to clear the Raw Data screen Following is an example of a Raw Data Table Table 5 8 Raw Data Table Description Meth
71. FID Pre amp mp Status FID FID ignition Number of ignition attempts B 4 Wait time between tries fo 4 seconds Igniter on duration B 4 seconds FID Flame temperature Flame n sense temperature Ro y DegC Flame status Igniter status Flame Out sense temperature io y DegC H2 valve status FID counts Electrometer gain High gt TCD Lightflame H20pen AutozeroFID Modiy Information concerning the current status of the FID Preamplifier Assembly displays in the upper left corner 2 To modify FID parameters do the following a Halt the analysis JULY 2010 FID Configuration 5 64 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 b Click Modify The blue background of the parameter fields will turn white indicating that they are now modifiable FID Configuration FID Pre amp mp Status FID Comm status FID ignition PreAmp Firmware Rev Pre amp mp Board Rev EC Number of ignition attempts FID High voltage FID 12v Wait time between tries 20 ui seconds FID 12v FID 5v Igniter on duration 5 EE seconds FID 5v FID Flame temperature Flame On sense temperature 100 ES Deg C Flame status Igniter status Flame Out sense temperature 130 Deg L H2 valve status FID counts Electrometer gain High sd TCD Light flame H2 Open Autozero iD Save The parameters that you can configure are FID ignition Select Manual if you wish to control the ignition of the FID default select Auto to
72. Fixed Value Current Value analog input value used during fixed operation current readout values of the analog inputs values reflect scale assignments GC GRI PAZ Gain Ratio Index GRI and Preamp Zero PAZ readouts from the GC preampli fier s 4 stages use as a troubleshooting aid Normal preamp stage gain operating ranges for Models 500 700 and 1000 GC units are shown in Table 5 8 below Zero Scale Calib Adjustment mA calibrated analog inputs for known zero scale electrical current levels Analog Inputs 5 46 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Table 5 7 Description of Analog Input Settings Continued Setting Description Full Scale Calib calibrated analog inputs for known full Adjustment mA scale electrical current levels Table 5 8 Gain Operating Ranges for Models 500 700 and 1000 GCs GC GRI PAZ Value PAZ Value 12 bit AD 12 bit AD 16 bit AD 16 bit AD 1 0 0 to 0 0 600 to 800 0 to 4095 4800 to 6400 32767 to 32767 2 0 8 to 1 1 600 to 800 0 to 4095 4800 to 6400 32767 to 32767 3 0 8 to 1 1 600 to 800 0 to 4095 4800 to 6400 32767 to 32767 4 0 8to 1 1 1150 to 1500 0 to 4095 9200 to 12000 32767 to 32767 3 To perform an automated input calibration a Select the desired channel by clicking anywhere in that row b Set the analog input signal to either its minimum level or the anticipated Zero Value This step may require adjusting a rheostat or another controlling device at
73. Logon Command 9 11 9 2 6 Delay Seconds Command 9 11 9 2 7 Delay Hours Command 9 12 9 2 8 Disconnect Command sssesesesss 9 13 9 2 9 End Command esssesesseseee 9 13 9 2 10 Poll Command Alarms sesesse 9 14 9 2 11 Poll Command Averages sesssse 9 16 9 2 12 Poll Command CGM Archive 9 19 9 2 13 Poll Command CGM on Alarm 9 21 9 2 14 Poll Command Condition Start 9 21 9 2 15 Poll Command Condition End 9 23 9 2 16 Poll Command Event Log ss 9 24 9 2 17 Poll Command Maintenance Log 9 26 9 2 18 Poll Command Registers 9 28 9 2 19 Poll Command Reports eseeeesee 9 32 9 2 20 Repeat Command eese 9 34 9 2 21 Run Command ssessseeeseee 9 35 Logs JULY 2010 MON2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS ix 9 3 Data Collection eee seen 9 35 9 3 1 Start Auto Sequencing ssessesssss 9 36 9 3 2 Transaction Log sssesseeseeeene 9 38 9 3 3 Auto Sequencing Status sussss 9 38 S 44d Status EOg ore etre ire uS 9 39 MODBUS TEST 10 1 Starting WinMB
74. No calibration streams defined Optional Base Pressures No Name Op Base Pres 1 Op Base Pres 2 Op Base Pres 3 1 Stream 1 0 0 0 2 Stream 2 0 0 0 3 Stream 3 0 0 0 4 Stream 4 0 0 0 5 Stream 5 0 0 0 6 Stream 6 0 0 0 7 Stream 7 0 0 0 8 Stream 8 0 0 0 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Analog Input Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Label Zero Scale Full Scale F V Fixed Value 1 AI 1 0 100 VAR 0 kok kok kk kk kk kk ck ck kk kckck kckck kk ck kk ck kckck kk ck kk ck ck ck ck kCk ck kk ck kk ck ck ck ck kk k ck ck k kk ck k ck ck kk ck k ck k k ck k k kk kk k Analog Output Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Variable S G 1 Mole Percent 1 1 No Zero Scale Full Scale F V Fixed Value 1 0 100 VAR 0 Bargraph No Variable Streams Component 1 ole Percent 1 2 Not Used 3 Not Used 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 Not Used 12 Not Used 13 Not Used 14 Not Used 15 Not Used 16 Not Used Scaling Values No Zero Scale Full Scale i 0 100 2 0 00 3 0 100 4 0 100 5 0 100 6 0 100 7 0 100 8 0 00 9 0 00 10 0 100 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 T5 0 0 16 0 0 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ko ko kk Discrete Input Report from 2350 001 2350 001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Label
75. Peak Width EET ee a a IM Detector2 v PAM Detector 1 Selection field For Help press F1 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer JULY 2010 MON2000 Save changes and discard changes options are available from the right click menu You must access the Component Data Table to add insert and delete retention times Use the Application gt Component Data menu or press the F6 key JULY 2010 6 6 3 6 6 4 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 15 2 Click the Save button to save your changes or press the F8 key 9 Press the ESC key to discard changes Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer To edit component retention from the Chromatogram Viewer window 1 Double click the left mouse button to edit the retention times from the CGM viewer Or Right click and use the drop down menu to modify retention times via the normal editing procedures Editing TEVs from Cursor To update Timed Events from the Chromatogram Viewer using the cursor 1 Right click the mouse button with the mouse pointer hovered over the Event Time legend Edit Timed Events Table Edit Timed Events Update Time from Cursor Gave Ghar c Discard Changes Save Sheet Copy to clipboard Print Sheet From the pull down menu select Update Time from Cursor Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer 6 16 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 Or Press the F9 key MON2000 displays the message Reading GC Data
76. Plug to External Modem DB 25 5 77 5 18 4 Corti 1D ceder n e EN Pe AN E ERES 5 78 5 18 4 Registers eee eer RR EORR ED 5 80 JULY 2010 Application Functions vi yy TABLE OF CONTENTS MON2000 5 18 5 Setting Optional Base Pressures 5 86 5 18 6 Setting Optional Base Results 5 90 5 19 TCP IP Subnet and Gateway Menu 5 94 CHROMATOGRAM _ 6 1 Chromatogram Viewer Function 6 1 VIEWER 6 2 Viewing a Live Chromatogram 6 2 6 2 1 From Online GC sess 6 2 6 2 2 From GC Archive seseeeseee 6 3 0 2 3 From File on DISK iier Br eter ene 6 4 6 3 Removing a Chromatogram from View 6 8 6 4 Saving a Chromatogram to Disk 6 8 6 5 Graph Functions eese nnne 6 9 6 5 1 Editing the Chromatogram Graph 6 9 6 5 2 Changing Cursor Size seuseesssse 6 10 6 5 3 Printing the Chromatogram 6 11 6 6 Chromatogram Functions 6 11 6 6 1 Editing the Chromatogram 6 12 6 6 2 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer 6 13 6 6 3 Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer 6 15 6 6 4 Editing TEVs from Cursor ss 6 15 6 6 5 Viewing the Chromatogram Results 6 16 6 6 6 Entering a DeSCription
77. Power Failure Fused Peak Overflow Noisy Baseline CPU Battery Low GC Idle Real Time Clock Failure Analog Input 1 HIGH Analog Input 2 HIGH Analog Input 3 HIGH Analog Input 4 HIGH Analog Input 1 LOW Analog Input 2 LOW Analog Input 3 LOW Analog Input 4 LOW Preamp Input 1 Out of Range DET2 Preamp Input 2 Out of Range DET2 Preamp Input 3 Out of Range DET2 Preamp Input 4 Out of Range DET2 Preamp Failure DET2 NA 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 sysalarm_set Imtalarm_set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data stream data doutcur doutcur doutcur doutcur doutcur stream stream stream stream stream stream stream stream togg togg togg togg togg togg togg togg 85 NA Strea Strea Strea Strea Strea Strea Strea Strea Numeric Registers 0 stream data 2 analys
78. Press the keyboard HOME key to force the CMG view to the N OTI CE default state Also pressing the keyboard The Sav State f nct n te HOME key sets the CGM view to the default available when viewing a state if the current application analysis live or archived CGM time is different from the previous application analysis time The MON2000 software looks for and finds the application s analysis time Pressing the Home key returns the user to the default CGM state Zoom In Num Zoom Out Num Zoom X In Num right arrow Zoom X Out Num left arrow Zoom Y In Num up arrow Zoom Y Out Num down arrow Restore State Cursor to Nearest Point F8 Toggle Coarse Fine Cursor F4 A 31 5 397 479 562 644 726 809 89 1 973 1055 1138 i Time s i Toggle Lines Dots Display F9 Toggle Mouse Position Tip Ctrl F4 Toggle Nearest Point Tip Ctri F9 Print Ctrl P Copy to clipboard Ctrl C Paste from clipboard Ctrlt Right Click Menu From File on Disk JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 7 You can display up to 8 chromatograms at one time Each chromatogram is color coded use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromat aA E Desc Save Remove Forced Calf CurZAll Save Cmp vw Model 500 2 Det 2 2 27 2001 8 47 08 AM today cam B E 05 et 1 6 GT E CGM 2 01 10 02 41 AM S51 60501 cgm E CGM 3 Model 5
79. Save Crp lll CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm Y W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cgm a 2 Click the Edit button The Edit Chromatogram dialog appears Last AnalysisICDT 11Stream 1 Trace 1 archive4 13 00 10 18 50 AM x xose E YON f points 2 Color Blue z 3 Use the X Offset and Y Offset values to change the chromatogram display as desired 4 Use the Color pull down menu to assign a different color to this chromatogram 5 Click the button to accept your changes and return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog Editing the Chromatogram JULY 2010 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 13 MON2000 6 6 2 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer NOTICE l l To edit the Timed Events Table TEV from the In the edit mode initial focus is Chromatogram Viewer window applied to the currently selected event in the table or to the 1 Double click the left mouse button while avant Wiin tHe CIBO EHI hovering over the TEV legend to edit the timed events from the CGM viewer see the NOTICE following figures If more than one CGM is Or displayed only the selected Right click and use the drop down menu to CGM Umad avants wil ba modify add insert and delete TEV s via the available to edit s normal editing procedures Chromatogram Viewer 400 o 127
80. Si 7 TRING TRING VARIABLI Fl Li stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data stream data stream data sup m3 act inf m3 dry inf m3 sat inf m3 act sup kg dry inf kg dry Sdry kcal m3 STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO 15 28 16 28 17 29 18 30 157 61 158 62 159 63 181 64 182 65 182 66 184 67 VARIABL A VARIABL VARIABL A STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL kri STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL kri STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABLE
81. TB down and out of the way held in place by its ground straps at the bottom of the board This exposes the Card Cage Assembly 5 Loosen the four screws that secure the Card Cage Assembly to the chassis Then remove the Card Cage Assembly away from its chassis mount so that it 1s easy to work on 6 Locate the System Interface and Driver board It is mounted to the top of the Card Cage Assembly 7 Remove all cables connected to the System Interface Board P N 3 2350 005 P N 3 2350 022 or P N 3 2350 023 8 Remove the I O48 Board assembly drawing P N BE 12973 and cables from the top slot of the Cage Card Assembly This board is not used on the 2350A GC Controller 9 Remove the CPU Board assembly P N CE 19281 and cables from the second slot of the card cage assembly This board is not used on the 2350A GC Controller Conversion Process JULY 2010 MON2000 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 45 10 Remove the DSPI O board assembly drawing P N CE 12976 and cables from the third slot of the card cage assembly This board is not used on the 2350A GC Controller 11 Remove any other optional boards such as memory expansion boards and associated cables These parts are not used on the 2350A GC Controller 12 Leave the Analog Board assembly drawing P N BE 18044 with attached cable in the card cage This board is used on the 2350A basic configuration 13 Change the fuse in the in line fuse holder from 1 amp to t
82. TX 1 Mole Percent S 1 Stream 1 C 1 C6 47 35 17 Start Mon Apr 03 06 00 00 1995 Stop Tue Apr 04 06 00 00 1995 Average Minimum Maximum Samples Current 10 03610 2 25780 23 63960 8 1 Mon Apr 03 06 00 00 1995 0 20443 0 01870 2 43300 37 2 Sun Apr 02 07 00 00 1995 0 01918 0 01900 0 01940 39 3 Sat Apr O1 06 00 00 1995 0 01918 0 01900 0 01940 38 2 Mole Percent S 1 Stream 1 C 2 PROPANE Start Mon Apr 03 06 00 00 1995 Stop Tue Apr O4 06 00 00 1995 Average Minimum Maximum Samples Current 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 8 1 Mon Apr 03 06 00 00 1995 3 74130 0 00000 4 79480 37 2 Sun Apr 02 07 00 00 1995 4 78225 4 77260 4 79290 39 3 Sat Apr O1 06 00 00 1995 4 78240 4 77300 4 78990 3824 e e 13 Net Heating Value Dry S 1 Stream 1 Start Mon Apr 03 06 00 00 1995 Stop Tue Apr 04 06 00 00 1995 Average Minimum Maximum Samples Current 2551 31000 1403 71000 4175 43000 8 1 Mon Apr 03 06 00 00 1995 1024 18000 906 22600 1647 33000 37 2 Sun Apr 02 07 00 00 1995 988 18100 288 03000 988 36700 39 3 Sat Apr 01 06 00 00 1995 988 18600 288 03300 988 30000 38 Report Contents JULY 2010 MON2000 Content Item Number Analysis data calcula Related Function s Calculations Averages REPORTS 7 15 Table 7 7 Contents Guide for Average Reports Menu Section Application gt Calculations 5 5 2 gt Averages tion Stream Component Old RF standard GC application n a n a New RF RF Dev results of ongoing or Old RT completed averages New
83. Table This appendix provides two sample Component Data Tables for reference only Appendix C Data Computations This appendix discusses the various equations and computations involved with acquisition and analysis tasks Appendix D Analog Output Cal 2350A GC This appendix demonstrates how to calibrate an analog output for a 2350A GC Controller using the MON2000 software Appendix E Upgrade 2350A GC S W and 2350 EPROMS This appendix describes how to upgrade the GC software and the 2350 GC Controller EPROMS the 2350A WinSystems CPU P C104 Bus and DiskOnChip Appendix F Modbus Reg List for 2350A GC This appendix explains the differences between SIM 2251 and User Modbus protocols and lists the corresponding Modbus registers used by the 2350A GC Controller JULY 2010 Description of Manual 1 6 INTRODUCTION 1 2 DESCRIPTION OF ONLINE HELP Use the User Guide online help file to quickly access information regarding any MON2000 function See Section 3 8 for more detailed information 1 3 DESCRIPTION OF MON2000 MONZ2000 is a menu driven Windows based software program designed to operate the gas chromatograph GCs MON2000 runs on an IBM compatible personal computer PC and serves as an interface between you and the GC unit MON2000 can run on a Windowsg 95 Windowsg 98 Windowsg 2000 Windowsg XP or Windowsg NT operating system MON2000 combined with the GC applica tion s offers a complet
84. Test menu see Section 10 1 for additional options Using Modbus Data 10 14 MODBUS TEST MON2000 Fy Modbus Test Program COM1 9600_E 7 1_ASCII_Daniel x r Modbus Function Selection Slave ddr Function DataAdd Quantity Repeat Record No pa foi AReadRea gt an 5 5 Transmit Log Data Data Type G Data Type Selection Save Sheet Use Combo box to decode registers Shor 16 E Error Print Sheet Use Template to decode registers Edit Template Ed i Help Use Template to decode logs Close Data List Repeat Count 0 HardEror Soft Errors 0 0 Value Register Port Setup Input Output 10 4 1 Set Log Parameters The Log Data function allows you to log the polled data to a specified file N O TI C E The Log Data function is not required for transmission of Modbus data 1 Click the Log Data button to access the To disable this function Log Data function The Log Data List dialog deselect the Enable Logging appears check box To set the log parameters for WinMB 2 Click the Enable Logging check box to turn this function ON and to access the Log Data Parameters Set Log Parameters JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 MODBUS TEST 10 15 3 Use the Logging Mode pull down menu to select either a Sampling or Continuous mode Log Data List x IV Enable Logging Data Registers and Values Log D
85. The following setup for U S Robotics Sportster 28 8 Kbps external FAX modems was verified at the GC assembly and checkout lab At the GC Controller the modem DIP switches were set to 5 and 8 UP the rest DOWN At the PC the modem DIP switches were set to 2 4 6 and 7 UP the rest DOWN Modem Initialization Strings Setup JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 39 MON2000 With these switch settings initialization string amp F was required See Table 2 4 for further explanation of these switch settings and the parameters they control Table 2 4 DIP Switch Settings for U S Robotics Sportster Modem Switch Function At GC At PC 1 UP off Normal DTR computer must provide DTR signal for modem to accept commands DOWN on Modem ignores DTR J 2 UP off Verbal word results DOWN on Numeric results J 3 UP off Suppress result codes DOWN on Enable result codes V 4 UP off Display keyboard commands DOWN on Suppress echo 5 UP off Modem answers on first ring or higher lt DOWN on Disable auto answer 6 UP off Modem sends carrier detect CD signal on connect and drops CD on disconnect DOWN on CD always on V 7 UP off For power on and ATZ reset the Y or Y1 y configuration is used from user defined nonvolatile memory NVRAM DOWN on For power on and ATZ reset the V generic template FO is used from read on
86. Use the Control gt Single Stream menu to e Valve Timing access this function GC Time 3 Stop Now 2 The Start Single Stream Analysis dialog appears Stream B Stream 2 IV Purge stream for 60 seconds Continuous operation tees 3 Select the desired stream from the Stream menu 4 Click the Purge check box to set the purging option Note that the default setting is ON Purging allows sample gas to flow through the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to beginning the first analysis 5 Click the Continuous operation check box to perform repetitive analysis runs Note that the default setting is ON Deselect this option if you want to perform only one analysis run MON2000 Det Mode Single Stream JULY 2010 MON2000 Use the Report Display option in the Reports menu to view the results of the Single Stream function EE vow ses Auto Sequence F2 Single Stream Calibration Baseline Run Valve Timing GC Time Stop Now Det Mode JULY 2010 4 3 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 3 Click the j button to accept your selections and continue Cancel Click the button to abort and return to the main window The Single Stream GC Analysis begins if you selected the Purge Stream option MON2000 performs this 60 second task first Use the status bar to monitor the progress of this function ERE HALT Use this func
87. VARIABLE avg archivel avg di 2 0 VARIABLE avg archivel minimum T 2 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel maximum TE 2 0 VARIABLE avg_archive2 T3 2 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel avg 1 3 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum PA 3 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum 1 3 0 VARIABLE avg_archive2 1 3 0 indicates index is incremented KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Communication Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Slave Name Slave ID Slave Type USER_MODBUS PLC Emulation Low Hi SIM 2251 Daniel 2500 Emulation USER MODBUS Modbus Variable Field Indices Data String Override Reg Name Name S C Type Length Keylock Boolean Coils 0 sysalarm set 1 1 Application Checksum Failure No 1 sysalarm set 2 7 ROM Checksum Failure No 2 sysalarm set 3 1 RAM Diagnostics Failure No 3 sysalarm set 4 1 A D Converter Failure No 4 sysalarm set 5 l Detector Oven Failure No 5 sysalarm set 6 1 Liquid Sample Valve Heater Failure No 6 sysalarm set 7 1 Sample System Oven Failure No 7 sysalarm_set 8 1 Catalytic Converter Failure No 8 sysalarm set 9 1 Heater 5 Failure No 9 sysalarm_set 10 il Heater 6 Failure No 10 sysalarm set 11 1 Heater 1 Controller Failure No 11 sysalarm_set 12 1 Heater 2 Controller Failure No 12 sysalarm set 13 1 Heater 3 Controller Failure No 13 sysalarm set 14 1 Heater 4 Controller Failure No
88. Value Click the i button to accept your change The resulting voltage output should be close to span midpoint e g 3 20 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and reselect the channel being calibrated 21 Set the Fixed Var parameter to Var and the Fixed Value to 0 0 29 Click the Mi changes j button to accept your The voltage output could change slightly from time to time and the MON2000 software will now maintain the correct span Calibrating by Volts JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 D 2 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A D 5 CALIBRATING BY PERCENTAGES This second example shown below demonstrates that it is also possible to calibrate your outputs as a percentage For instance you may wish to read directly values that may be scaled from 0 to 1200 Your voltage span is scaled from 1 to 5 volts so the range is approximately 4 Volts Thus 1200 divided by 4 equals 300 units per volt If you equate the difference as a percentage the midpoint in units equals 600 or approximately 3 volts With this information in mind you want to set zero units equal to 1 00 V and 1200 units to 5 00 V and let the software adjust the span as you calibrate This example assumes that an analog output channel needs to calibrated to a span of 0 to 1200 Calibrating by Percentages D 6 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A MON2000 To calibrate by percentages 1 Use the Application gt Analog Outputs menu
89. a variable assignment click the appropriate Variable cell Use the provided pull down menu and click the desired variable to select it Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the Analog Outputs dialog Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the Analog Outputs dialog 5 10 4 Performing a Manual Calibration To manually calibrate an analog output 1 e Select the desired analog output by clicking anywhere in the corresponding row Set the Zero Scale and Full Scale values as desired Set the Fixed Var parameter to Fixed Set Fixed Value equal to the Zero Scale value Set Zero Adjustment and Full Adjustment to 0 0 Click the j button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog Return to the Analog Outputs dialog Wait until the Current Value of the analog output 1s equal to the Zero Scale value see Step 2 Record the value in engineering units read by the receiving device e g a voltmeter Set Fixed Value equal to the Full Scale value see Step 2 Performing a Manual Calibration 5 54 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 10 Click the button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 11 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog Wait until the Current Value of the analog output is equal to the Full Scale value see Step 2 12 Record the value in engineering units read by the receiving device e g a v
90. after the CPU assembly is reinstalled and all cables reconnected to the System Interface board see Table 2 7 and Table 2 8 below 2350A Ethernet Installation 2 60 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 No software setup is required for this board Table 2 7 System Interface Board Cable Connections Connection Ribbon Cable J5 and J6 Analog I O J8 Com3 J10 Com4 J4 Printer J11 Com2 J2 and J3 Digital I O J12 Front Panel and Keyboard f installed Table 2 8 CPU Board Cable Connections Connection Ribbon Cable J1 Com1 Com2 and Printer J4 and J7 Digital I O J6 Com3 and Com4 a If the 2350A BOS version is v1 84 or later ensure that J6 Jumper on pins 13 14 of J1 has been removed see Figure 2 9 and Figure 2 10 7 Ifa modem is installed remove the phone cord 8 Install the Ethernet card and set the jumpers as shown below 2350A Ethernet Installation JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 61 MON2000 Figure 2 9 Ethernet Jumper Configuration BOS v1 82 and Earlier 2 4 6 8 10 1214 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 2 eecser eT ye ey if 0000000 o 0 o 13 5 7 9 1113 15 17 19 21232527 Figure 2 10 Ethernet Jumper Configuration BOS v1 84 and Later JULY 2010 2350A Ethernet Installation 2 62 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 15 4 Ethernet TCP IP Settings If you plan to connect via an Ethernet connection use the following instructions To configure the Ethernet TCP IP setting
91. application prior to version 1 50 compare the values of three variables from the System dialog Unit Type Max Archive Averages and System Description with the values found in Table E 2 You will also need to compare the maximum number of streams which can be determined from the Streams option under the Application menu There is one more possible complication If the variable System Description was edited it may not be the same value as described earlier in Table E 2 In such an instance it would be impossible to distinguish between the 2350_00n i e USASTD1 USASTD2 and USASTD3 and 2350ISOn 1 e ISOSTDI ISOSTD2 and ISOSTD3 applications To overcome this complication you can inspect one more variable 1 Use the Application gt User Defined gt Selection menu to access the Selection dialog 2 In the Selection dialog CVTABLE_pri will be the first variable listed if the application is one of the ISO applications Standard Applications Prior to v1 50 JULY 2010 MON2000 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 1 APPENDIX F MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC GC Controller Modbus registers that may be of interest to the developer are of two varieties SIM 2251 and User Modbus Differences are Table F 1 Comparison of SIM 2251 and User Modbus F 1 INTRODUCTION SIM 2251 amp USER MODBUS summarized in the following table SIM 2251 Serial slave port User Modbus Serial slave port Modified protocol
92. arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim 27 28 29 30 Sli 32 33 34 35 36 10 11 152 13 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 Not Not Not Not Not Not Not sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed No No No No 7294 7295 7296 7297 7298 7299 7300 7301 7302 7303 7304 7305 7306 7307 7308 7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 7317 7318 7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 7324 71325 7326 avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg a
93. component peaks 3 Adjusts the timed events based on peak integration times 4 Runs a calibration 5 Checks the range and order of response factors 6 Adjusts the retention time deviations to avoid peak overlapping You can also initiate a valve timing run which 1s the first step of the Auto BTU Start Up process independently of that process See Starting a Valve Timing Run on page 12 for more information Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run To launch the Auto BTU Start Up process do the following 1 If the GC is currently performing an analysis select Halt from the Control menu to put the GC in Idle mode after the current analysis run Auto BTU Start Up and Valve Timing 4 8 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 2 Select Valve Timing from the Control menu The Valve Timing window displays Start Valve Timing Run Stream 2 Calibration Purge stream for 60 seconds Auto BTU Start Up 6 sa Valve CDT Component 2 7 n PENTANE 3 11 ETHANE Q0 0 Notused MON2000 displays in the Stream field the calibration stream s to be used for the Auto BTU Start Up run Select the Auto BTU Start Up checkbox 4 To use the default Component Data and Timed Event tables select the Default CDT TEV checkbox Start Valve Timing Run Stream 2 Calibration Purge stream for 60 seconds Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run JULY 2010 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 9 MON2000 It is s
94. displayed AN SYS C SYSTEM TRANSFERRED A gt CD IMAGE A IMAGE gt COPY C BOS EXE PME16 EXE SCANDISK EXE SCANDISK INI AUTOEXEC BAT BOSCHECK EXE 6 FILE S COPIED A IMAGE gt CD A gt A gt 7 At the A gt prompt type C then ENTER Type PME16 then ENTER Procedure E 16 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 9 The Protected Mode Program screen displays Verify that a cold start initial message is displayed in the middle of the screen and LED D2 is blinking on the CPU assembly 10 Press ESC to exit the program and power down 11 Carefully remove the cable from J1 and J10 to prevent cracking the connector housing Install the program label on the end of DiskOnChip opposite the serial number E 8 2 Reprogramming the DiskOnChip Reprogram the DiskOnChip using the following instructions 1 Install either the programmed DiskOnChip into socket U1 on the CPU assembly noting the orientation of pin 1 or install the complete CPU assembly into card cage 2 Plug the floppy drive cable into J10 on the CPU assembly and the keyboard cable into J1 on the CPU assembly 3 Turn on the power The CPU assembly reboots and displays the Systems Configuration window The speaker on the CPU will chirp and the monitor will prompt ENTER NEW DATE mm dd yy Press ENTER ENTER NEW TIME Press ENTER The A gt prompt displays Verify that the programming disk is the current re
95. displays amp Function olx File Edit Bookmark Options Help covers ve Bw Modbus Test Program Help Index The Modbus communications program is intended for testing of Daniel equipment such as Gas Chromatography GC ultrasonic meter and flow computers The program allows the user to poll registers Boolean and numeric read and modify its content The Modbus main dialog offers the following functionality Modbus Function Selection Requires the user to enter parameters for a successful Modbus communication Port Setup Allows the user to set the default communication parameters Log Data Allows the user to log the data blocks to a file Save Sheet Saves the displayed sheet JULY 2010 Using Modbus Test Online Help 10 20 MODBUS TEST MON2000 10 6 2 How to Navigate To navigate within this help file Click the Contents button to display an index a topic tree contents menu and a search function e Click the _ Index button to display an index where you can select a specific term e Click the Back button to return to the last topic viewed Click the Pint button to print the current topic Use the scroll bars and arrows to display more of a topic You can also resize and or move the topic window for better viewing convenience When applicable a topic will contain links to other related topics Use these links as you need How to Navigate JULY 2010 MON2000 Output data for
96. ebmeimimele s z es s es s e 3046 checksum anlyzr D A 3 ps 3 D A2 D A2 D A 1 D A1 spare A D 2 A D2 A D 1 A D 1 spare spare failure failure high high low high low high low high low 3047 spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare spare adjust preamp ri 96 power preamp failure dev fail 3048 stream number 1 15 13 12 11 10 8 7 4 2 O D A low dn low low low low low low low low 1 low 3049 stream number 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 O D A high high high high high high hign high high high high high high 1 high 3050 stream number 2 14 13 11 8 7 4 O D A low low low low low low 1 low 3051 stream number 2 16 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 5 4 3 2 O D A high high high high high high high high high high high high 1 high 3052 stream number 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 4 3 2 O D A low low low low low low low low low low low 1 low 3053 stream number 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 O D A high high high high high high high high high high high high high 1 high 3054 stream number 4 15 14 12 11 8 7 4 3 O D A low low low low low low low low 1 low 3055 stream number 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2 O D A high high high high high high high high high high high high high 1 high 3056 stream number 5 l 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 4 3 O D A low low low low low low low low low low low 81 low 3057 str
97. eee ene 10 1 10 2 Establishing Communications 10 2 10 2 1 Comparison of Modbus Protocols 10 3 10 2 2 Set GC Com Parameters via MON20OOO 10 4 10 2 3 Set Up Port via WinMB e eese 10 5 10 3 Getting Modbus Data 10 7 10 3 1 Use Single Data Type eese 10 9 10 3 2 Use Template Mixed Data Types 10 10 10 4 Using Modbus Data 10 13 10 4 1 Set Log Parameters ssessessesss 10 14 10 4 2 Save Modbus Data eese 10 16 10 4 3 Assign Scale Ranges for User Modbus 10 17 10 4 4 Print Modbus Data eese 10 17 10 5 Troubleshooting Communication Errors 10 18 10 6 Using Modbus Test Online Help 10 19 10 6 1 How to Access sess menn 10 19 10 6 2 How to Navigate ccceceeeeeeee eee eee eee eeed 10 20 APPENDIX A PC CONFIG A 1 How to PAN L weed zele oka kosa A 1 REPORT A 2 Example Repott ccccccsseesceeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeeees A 2 APPENDIX B COMPONENT DATA TABLE APPENDIX C DATA C 1 Data Acquisition leeeeeeeee eene C 1 COMPUTATIONS JULY 2010 Modbus Test x TABLE OF CONTENTS MON2000 C 2 Peak Detection eese C 2 C 3 Analysis Computations esee C 5 C 3 1 Conc Analysis
98. extension click in the appropriate data field and type the desired directory Or click the Browse button and use the directory tree to select the desired location Select Program Settings JULY 2010 MON2000 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 69 4 Use the provided check boxes to turn the following settings on off Note that the default settings are ON Table 2 9 Optional Program Settings Setting Editing replaces existing text in tables Function If enabled replaces selected table cell entry with user input If disabled appends user input to end of the selected table cell entry Prompt to confirm discard changes Display confirmation dialog before exiting a dialog that contains changed data Prompt to confirm save changes Display confirmation dialog before saving changed data Synchronize GC Controller s time to PC on download etc Tab from spreadsheet to next control Program the GC Controller clock to match the PC clock upon download Move from field to field and button to button rather than from cell to cell within a spreadsheet or tabular display Enable display in PPM JULY 2010 If enabled percentages less than 0 99 are displayed in PPM parts per million rather than as a percentage 5 Click the 1 button to apply your changes and return to the main screen Click the Cancel button to exit and return to the main screen without applying your ch
99. for a user defined amount of time Delayed Discrete Alarms 5 34 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Discrete Alarms Discrete Input Discrete Output Alarm Text es IMID Not used 3 D03 DelydDiscrete Alarm 1 Discrete Output 3 2 Lu 3 O La Cs i Not used 0 Not used Not used D Not used Not used 0 Not used Not used 0 Not used Selection Field For Help press F1 For example if discrete input 1 is closed for 60 seconds discrete alarm 1 will be activated which will in turn activate discrete output 8 MON2000 will display an active alarm in the bottom row of the GC column of the GC Status Bar MON2000 will also copy the alarm description in the Alarm Text column to the appropriate Alarm screens The delayed discrete alarm feature is only available with the following apps installed 700_Mode0_v192 or later 700 DewUS v184 or later 700 Model v193 or later 2350A ModeO v183 or later 2350A Model v184 or later Delayed Discrete Alarms JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 35 MON2000 To set up a discrete alarm do the following 1 Select Applications gt User Defined gt Selection The User Defined Selections window displays User Defined Selections Name Option a 1 ENABLED ka OFF ENABLE ENABLE_NC Enabled OFF Fixed NO Cancel Selection Field For Help press F1 2 Locate the Delyd alm variable under the Name column and set its Option
100. inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim 10 11 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 aT 32 33 34 35 sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed No No No No PC CONFIG REPORT A 61 MON2000 7558 avg_archivel minimum 36 3 Not Used No KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK kk kk kk kk kk kk ck ck ck kck ck kck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc ck k k kk kkkkk KKKKKKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ck ck ck KKK ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck ck ck ck ck k ck ck k ck ck kc ck k kk kk kk kk TCP IP Report from Model 2350A 4 28 2005 2 00 51 PM Usage PC Comm ID 0 Host Name DANIELGC Use DHCP Specify an IP address Specify an IP Address IP Address 172 16 23 128 Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 Gateway 172 16 16 2 Read Write RW KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK kk kk kk kk kk kk ck ck ck ck ck ck kck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck k ck ck kc k ck k k kk kkkkt KKKKK Temperature Control Report from Mo
101. later remind me C Register later don t remind me lt Back Cancel 4 Click the button Registering MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 21 MON2000 2 8 3 Update MON2000 Provided there is an active internet connection to the computer on which MON2000 is installed clicking the File Update MON2000 submenu sends the user to the Emerson Chromatograph Controllers website www emersonprocess com daniel products G C NOTICE Controllers Productdetail htm Updating the software Use the File gt Update MON2000 menu to requires a previously installed download the latest versions of MON2000 and registered copy of MON2000 the BOS software programs To download the latest versions of the software Fie Application Reports Logs Chron 1 Use the computer on which MON2000 is kan installed and connect to the Internet Minimize the Internet window Cine 2 From MON2000 select the File gt Update GC Directory MON2000 menu This opens the Emerson SEE lo UEM Chromatograph Controllers website Modbus Test www emersonprocess com daniel products Program Settings GC Controllers Productdetail htm Print Setup Register MON2000 3 From the Emerson Chromatograph Controller website you can download the latest MON2000 and BOS updates view and or download catalogs brochures equipment specification sheets product manuals drawings application notes and white papers Other lin
102. let the GC control the ignition of the FID Number of ignition attempts Indicates the number of times the GC will try to light the flame If an Auto FID ignition sequence fails to light the flame after the specified number of attempts the GC will close the hydrogen valve switch the FID ignition parameter to Manual and set an active alarm Wait time between tries Igniter on duration Flame On sense temperature Flame Out sense temperature Electrometer gain Your choices are High and Low default c Click Save to accept the changes or Cancel to reject them FID Configuration JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 65 MON2000 3 If Flame status is OFF due to a power failure or maintenance for example you can restart the flame by doing the following a Click H2 Open The H2 valve status parameter displayed in the FID PreAmp Status table changes to OPEN b Click Light flame The Flame status parameter displayed in the FID PreAmp Status table will change to ON when the FID internal temperature exceeds the value set in the Flame On sense temperature field If FID ignition is set to Auto the GC will automatically restart the flame if it goes out 4 To enable or disable digital filtering do the following a Right click on the FID Configuration window The FID Advanced Configuration window appears FID Advanced Configuration Digital fitering Enabled Samples per second 50
103. mode eycl strt tm compnam cal conc raw ttf rfdev ft rtdev STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO DET NO CDT TBL N CDT TBL N STR GI D Z z STR STR Iri Dp Zz STR GI GI Dp Dp z zZ z O Oo Oo e oO Oo Oo STR GI D z z indicates index is incremented Field List used in Final Calib Type Variable SubField Name STRING STRING DATE DATE STRING VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM NO STRING VARIABLE stream data cycl time STREAM NO STRING VARIABLE stream data stream num STREAM NO VARIABLE strms name STREAM NO STRING VARIABLE stream data run mode STREAM NO STRING TIME VAR stream data cycl strt tm STREAM NO STRING VARIABLE anlyzr name 1 STRING VARIABLE seqtxt DET NO VARIABLE rpt_headerl VARIABLE rpt header2 I TABLE TVAR Cat compnam CDT_TBL_NO TVAR cdt cal conc CDT TBL NO TVAR cal results oldrf STREAM NO TVAR cal results newrf STREAM NO TVAR cal results updated STREAM NO TVAR cal_results rfdev STREAM NO 0 TVAR cal results oldrt STREAM NO 0 TVAR cal results newrt STREAM NO 0 TVAR cal results updated STREAM NO 0 TVAR cal results rtdev STREAM NO 0 ALARMS 0 indicates index is incremented F
104. mounted to the top of the Card Cage Assembly a Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on the System Interface Board then disconnect all CPU cables from the System Interface Board b Remove the CPU assembly and install the COM4A Board with associated mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC 104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly c Connect COM5 P22 and COM6 P23 on the Field Termination board via cable P N 3 2350 085 to J6 on COMAA d Connect COM7 P24 on the Field Termination board and COMS via cable P N 3 2350 086 to J3 on COMAA e Install the CPU assembly into the third slot of card cage Connect the CPU cables as detailed in Section 6 3 Basic 2350A Configuration f Install the DB9 connector from COM5 to P22 on the Field Termination board with jackpost assemblies g Install the DB9 connector from COM6 to P23 on the Field Termination board with jackpost assemblies h Install the DB9 connector from COM7 to P24 on the Field Termination board with jackpost assemblies The COM4A Board 2 54 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 i Install the ten position connector from COMS to J12 on the System Interface Board Connect the Analog cable to J6 on the System Interface Board With COMAA Boards installed Serial Port 8 is usually assigned via MON2000 Applica tion gt Serial Ports menu Select Front Panel from the Usage pull down menu see Figure 2 6 and Figure 2 7 Serial Ports W E E x None
105. n k order to calculate weight percent gt CONC MW i l where WTpercent weight percent of component n CONC concentration in mole percent of 66 component n Mw molecular weight of component n sum of weights of all components in sample JULY 2010 Heating Value Calculations C 14 gt DATA COMPUTATIONS Equation C 16 Average Molecular Weight AVGMW gt CONC MW i 1 where AVGMW average molecular weight i sum of weights of all components in gt sample Equation C 17 Liquid Volume Percent WTpercent D LVpercent X 100 b WTpercent D i 1 where LV percent liquid volume WT percent weight percent D density E sum of all components in sample MON2000 All components in the sample must be measured in order to calculate liquid volume percent from mole percent Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010 MON2000 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 15 Equation C 18 Reid Vapor Pressure where RVP k Y CONC VP i 1 100 RVP reid vapor pressure CONC normalized concentration of component i in mole percent VP vapor pressure at 100 F of component i GPA2145 94 Equation C 19 Liquid Relative Density All components in the sample must be measured k Icul LRDT sik ai Y LVpercent LRD LRD c P 100 where LRDT liquid relative density of sample relative to water at 60 F LRD liquid relative density of componen
106. press F1 If the Auto BTU Start Up run fails an alarm will be triggered and displayed in the Alarm Log Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 11 The following six potential system alarms can be triggered during the Auto BTU Start Up process e Valve Timing 1 Failure Triggered if the timing for valve 1 cannot be determined after a ten second change of VALVE OFF time e Valve Timing 2 Failure Triggered if the timing for valve 2 cannot be determined after a ten second change of VALVE OFF time e Valve Timing 3 Failure Triggered if the timing for valve 3 cannot be determined after a ten second change of VALVE OFF time e Auto BTU RT Failure Missing Peaks Triggered if not all the peaks are found after running the calibration stream to match all component peaks Auto BTU Response Factor Failure Triggered if all of the response factors are not within 50 of the default values after the calibration runs e Auto BTU Calib Failure RF Order Triggered if the response factors are not in the proper order after the calibration runs A triggered alarm will be posted in the Alarm Log See Section 8 3 for detailed instructions on reading Alarm Logs Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run 4 12 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 4 6 2 Starting a Valve Timing Run If the GC is in Auto Sequence mode halt the analysis See Section 4 3 and then return to the Valve Timi
107. replacement parts as specified by the manufacturer Use of unauthorized parts can affect the product s performance and place the safe operation of the product at risk When installing or servicing ATEX certified units the ATEX approval applies only to equipment without cable glands When mounting the flameproof enclosures in a hazardous area only flameproof cable glands certified to IEC 60079 1 must be used Technical assistance is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week by calling 1 713 827 6314 This page is intentionally left blank INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION AND SETUP TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Description of Manual es 1 1 Section 1 Introduction eeeeeereeerenresosensoone 1 1 Section 2 Installation and Startup 1 2 Section 3 Getting Started 1 2 Section 4 Control Functions 1 2 Section 5 Application Functions 1 3 Section 6 Chromatogram Viewer 1 3 Section 7 Reports scs esce stetur eia 1 3 Section 8 Lags uec et ete nere kite 1 3 Section 9 Data Collection 1 4 Section 10 Modbus Test seesese 1 4 Appendix A PC Config Report 1 5 Appendix B Component Data Table 1 5 Appendix C Data Computations
108. s for output 5 6 Application gt Limit Alarms 5 7 Application gt Discrete Alarms 5 10 Application gt Analog Outputs 5 12 Application gt Discrete Outputs stream sequences skipped number 5 1 Application gt System 5 8 Application gt Streams streams analyzed number 5 1 Application gt System 5 8 Application gt Streams streams analyzed sequence 5d Application gt System 5 8 Application gt Streams Valve on off times 5 3 Application Timed Events F5 Weight Percent on off 5 5 1 Application gt Calculations gt Control Wobbe value on off 5 5 1 Application gt Calculations gt Control Zero value for input 5 9 Application gt Analog Inputs Procedures Guide JULY 2010 MON2000 The keylock switch affects only online operations i e those that are performed while connected to a GC Controller The keylock switch feature is only available on controllers with BOS version 1 6 and later The GC Controller parameters protected by the keylock switch may vary slightly from version to version JULY 2010 3 6 GETTING STARTED 3 15 KEYLOCK SWITCH CONTROL If your GC unit has the keylock control enabled you will not be able to write changes or new data to the GC Controller The following error dialog will display MON2000 Lx ZAN GC controller locked no updates allowed To see which Modbus registers are affected by the keylock control view the Communications section of the PC C
109. select option Note that the default setting is ON i kaka is Calibration JULY 2010 MON2000 For either choice only VAR variable components on the CDT are updated See Section 5 2 for details Use the Report Display option in the Reports menu to view the results of the Calibration function Det Mode JULY 2010 Control View Help Auto Sequence F2 Single Stream Halt F3 Calibration Valve Timing GC Time Stop Now 4 5 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 5 Purging allows sample gas to flow through the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to beginning the first analysis Select the desired calibration type a Click the Manual radio button to perform a manual calibration The CDT for the selected stream s will not be updated with raw data that are outside the acceptable deviations as listed on the CDT For more information See Section 5 2 b Click the Forced radio button to perform a manual calibration The CDT for the selected stream s will be updated with raw data that are outside the acceptable deviations as listed on the CDT For more information See Section 5 2 Click the _ button to accept your selections and continue Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window The Calibration begins Use the status bar to monitor the progress of this function BASELINE RUN Use this function to initiate a single GC baseline r
110. select it To copy the component settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy C F8 button or press the F8 key This feature also increments the Component value to the next available component e g incrementing from Ammonia to Benzene per the GC application An error message displays when the last available component is reached To select a scale and range a Select the scale range to be replaced By assigning a scale range a floating point value can be converted to an integer value per the user defined scale assignment MON2000 Assigning a scale and corresponding range is an optional step The default scale assignment is O FloatPt which means the value is not converted to integer and is stored in two 2 adjacent Modbus registers Registers JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 83 MON2000 b Click the Scale F5 button or press the F5 key A menu list of all available scales and ranges appears c Double click the desired new scale and corresponding range Note that any of the available 33 scales can be redefined via the Edit Scales function see Step 10 10 To redefine a scale or create a custom scale a Click the Edit Scales F2 button or press the F2 key b The Edit Scales dialog appears Edit Scales Lx All 33 scaling options will display JULY 2010 Registers 5 84 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Regis
111. the maximum number of variable you can select is five if Include Mole Percents for current stream is not checked you can choose up to 25 variables 3 To select a new variable click on the appropriate drop down list under the Variable column 4 Select a stream from the drop down list in the Stream column If you want to use the current stream select 0 in this column To copy the stream settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy 5 F7 button or press the F7 key This feature also increments the Stream value to the next available stream e g incrementing from Stream 2 to Stream 8 per the GC application 5 Select a component from the drop down list in the Component column If you do not want to use a component select 0 in this column To copy the component settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy C F8 button or press LOI Status Variables 5 68 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS the Fs key This feature also increments the Component value to the next available component e g incrementing from Ammonia to Benzene per the GC application 6 Enter a value in the Precision column that indicates the number of decimal places to display for this particular variable For component concentrations the range of possible Precision values is between 2 and 6 For all other variables the range of possible values is betwee
112. the BOS to the selected file When the upload is complete normal MON2000 operations resume MON2000 MON2000 will not perform a BOS upload during an analysis run You must halt the analysis first see Section 4 3 or wait until the GC is idle A BOS upload usually takes 10 minutes to complete Upload BOS JULY 2010 GETTING STARTED 3 1 MON2000 GETTING STARTED This section shows you how to get started with the MON2000 software covering such functions as logging on navigation and configuring your PC printer for MON2000 3 1 LOGGING ON To log on clicking the desktop icon or using the Mi 1 Start the MON2000 software program by MON2000 Windowsg Start menu see Section 2 7 Loon n MON2000 Version 2 46 023 Copyright C 2002 i Emerson Process Management EMERSON All Rights Reserved Proc Mesagamest User Name User PIN Cancel 2 Click the User Name data field and type your assigned user name up to 12 characters Note that the user name 1s not case sensitive and can include characters pi je such as ete JULY 2010 Logging On 3 2 GETTING STARTED MON2000 3 If required click the User PIN data field and type your assigned PIN If you enter an incorrect user name or user PIN a error message appears x A Invalid user name or password Click the F button to exit and return to the Logon dialog 4 When you have success
113. the GC unit To successfully connect to the GC unit the COM IDs specified via the File gt GC Directory and the Application gt Serial Ports dialogs must match See Section 5 17 1 for more information Click the Comments cell to enter any helpful information regarding a particular GC unit such as location or purpose Use the dynamic pull down menus to select the desired PC Port Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity and Handshaking settings NOTICE The following parameters support an auto detect setting Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Protocol Set any of these parameters to autodetect and MON2000 will conform to the settings used by the GC unit 9 Use the provided cells to input RTS On Delay RTS Off Delay and Extra Delay values The Extra Delay field accepts numerical values 0 to 9000 milliseconds for additional time to be added to the current communication timeout delay 10 Use the Protocol pull down menu to select the desired Modbus communications protocol 11 If you plan to connect remotely to the GC unit via a modem or Ethernet connection use the Connection Type Direct Remote Set Up GC Directory 2 30 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 pull down menu for a Direct Connect option or a previously configured modem 2 11 3 Dial up Connection Use this command to run the Dial up dialog to configure the GC Controller modem The default properties from Windowsg Control
114. the PC Config Report depends on the GC Controller and its application Fie Application Reports Logs Chron Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PC Config Report Offline Edit GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit JULY 2010 PC CONFIG REPORT A 1 APPENDIX A PC CONFIG REPORT A 1 This appendix explains how to print a PC Config Report and provides an example for reference HOW TO PRINT Use the following instructions to print the current application settings for the online GC To view a PC Config Report already saved to disk see Section 7 1 2 1 Use the File gt PC Config Report menu to access this function The PC Config Report window appears 2 Click the check boxes see Select column to choose the option you want included in the configuration report PC Config Report E s ption r Output C File Printer with formfeeds C Printer without formfeeds C Screen IV Use default printer Select All Fal Clear All F3 Check to include in report For Help press F1 Close Click the Select All F2 button or press the F2 key to select all options Click the Clear All F3 button or press F3 to deselect i e clear all checked options How to Print A 2 A 2 PC CONFIG REPORT
115. the back top of the board c Lower the TB down held in place by its ground straps at the bottom of the board in order to expose the Card Cage Assembly Disconnect Power and Disassemble E 12 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 d Unplug the TB power supply cord from its connection at the Card Cage Assembly power supply e Loosen the four thumbscrews that secure the Card Cage Assembly to the chassis Then remove the Card Cage Assembly away from its chassis mount so that it is easy to work on f Unplug all cables connected to the boards in slots 2 through 6 of the Card Cage Assembly in order to access the SBC53 CPU Board 3 Remove the SBC53 CPU Board from slot number 2 second from the top of the Card Cage Assembly E 6 REPLACE EPROMS RESET CPU 1 For 2350 GC Controllers locate the EPROMs that will be replaced U18 and U19 They are near the card connector edge of the SBC53 CPU Board Carefully note which EPROMIs are labeled ODD and EVEN and which sockets hold them socket U18 EVEN EPROM P N 8 2350 001 socket U19 ODD EPROM P N 8 2350 002 2 Remove one at a time each of the old EPROMs and replace each with its upgrade H EPROM 3 Locate Jumper Pin Set J14 It is near the H 2 two EPROMs you have just replaced Note that Jumper Pin Set J14 has a single jumper shorting pins 1 and 2 3 e Replace EPROMS Reset CPU JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 23
116. the back top of the board 3 Lower the TB down and out of the way held in place by its ground straps at the bottom of the board This exposes the Card Cage Assembly 4 Loosen the four screws that secure the Card Cage Assembly to the chassis Then remove the Card Cage Assembly away from its chassis mount so that it is easy to work on 2350A Ethernet Installation JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 59 5 Locate the System Interface and Driver board It is mounted to the top of the Card Cage Assembly a Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on the System Interface Board then disconnect all CPU cables from the System Interface Board b Remove the CPU assembly and install the COM4A Board with associated mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC 104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly If an option board is already plugged into the PC 104 bus on the CPU the ethernet card and mounting hardware will be installed into the PC 104 connector on the option board If you are using the CSA approved Radicom modem ensure that it is the top card in the card cage assembly The connection configuration of the Radicom modem requires installation at the top of the assembly c Plug one end of the Ethernet extension cable P N 3 2350 088 into J5 of the Ethernet assembly The in line jack on the remaining end of the Ethernet extension cable attaches to the lower left inside wall of the card cage shield
117. the full path in title bar LI Hide file extensions for known file types O Show Map Network Drive button in toolbar I Show file attributes in Detail View Show pop up description for folder and desktop items O Allow all uppercase names Z3 Hidden files Q Do not show hidden or system files Q Do not show hidden files M R Visual Settings zi Restore Defaults OK Cancel Apply c In the Advanced Settings pane find the gray folder icon labeled Hidden Files d Click the Show all files radio button e Click the button Use the Windowsa Explorer directory tree to open the MON2000 Installation Files folder on your CD Place the MON2000 Install Disk 1 in your floppy drive Copying MON2000 to Disks 2 6 2 5 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 7 Open the Disk1 folder on your CD 8 Copy all files from the Disk1 folder to the MON2000 Install Disk 1 floppy 9 Remove the MON2000 Install Disk 1 from your floppy drive 10 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 to copy the Disk2 and Disk3 folders to your MON2000 Install Disk 2 and MON2000 Install Disk 3 floppy disks 11 Remove the MON2000 CD from your CD ROM drive TRANSFERRING A MON2000 PLUS LICENSE To physically transfer the license file from one computer to the other you will need a removeable storage medium such as a 3 5 inch floppy disk or a USB flash drive Also there must be a licensed version on MON2000 PLUS inst
118. to toggle Low High For Single Baseline use the pull down menu to toggle OFF BGN Begin ning END Except for AutoZero for all others use the pull down menu to toggle ON OFF Auto Zero does not have Value field Det enter the appropriate detector number that the event will effect Valid range is 1 or 2 Time input the time that the event is to occur LIMITS 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds Timed Events 5 16 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Spectrum Gain Events Detector use the pull down menu to select between detectors 1 and 2 Gain input the gain value for that detector LIMITS 0 to 24 Time input the time that the event is to occur LIMITS 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds To access the Timed events feature 1 Use the Application gt Timed Events menu or press the F5 key to access this function 2 The Timed Event Tables menu displays listing the TEVs available per associated stream s Timed Event Tables EI Table Asso Stre 1 A Cancel Choose the desired TEV The number of available TEVs depends on the GC unit configuration The standard GC application contains four TEVs MON2000 can operate GC Applications with up to five TEVs To assign a TEV to a stream use the Streams function see Section 5 8 See Section 6 6 for editing TEVs from CGM Viewer Application System Component Data F6 Timed Events User Defined gt Calculations Limit Ala
119. with any device including the GC Controller an ultrasonic meter or a flow computer FUNCTION NOT REQIURED FOR NORMAL GC OPERATION The Modbus test is reserved for advanced functions The Modbus Test function is not required for normal GC operation Skip this section unless you are developing software engaging in a software debugging process or designing a custom installation that directly accesses the GC Controller Modbus registers Traditionally Modbus registers are polled by using a data collection system DCS To facilitate installation and debugging the WinMB program emulates a DCS This section provides detailed instructions for using the WinMB program Use this program only if you are familiar with Modbus communication protocol and the operation of the MON2000 software 10 1 STARTING WINMB To start WinMB from MON2000 pull down the File menu and click the Modbus Test option Starting WinMB 10 2 MODBUS TEST MON2000 If MON2000 displays an error verify the installation directory via the Program Settings function see Section 2 16 2 The Modbus Test Program main window appears D Modbus Test Program COM1 9600 EVEN 7 1_ASCIIDaniel x Modbus Function Selection Slave Addr Function DataAddr Quantity Repeat Record No Eont Setup l 1 3 Read Reg 7 3016 12 1 4 Log Data paate Stop Save Data Use short 16 zi to decode renisters Use template to decode register
120. 0 Data Protocol Disabled Compression Disabled Flow Control None JULY 2010 Dial up Connection 2 32 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 4 Click the Advanced tab to configure the Hardware settings Conexant D850 56K 9x DF c Modem Connection Pasi Ed General Advanced r Terminal Window Bring up terminal window before dialing Bring up terminal window after dialing r Hardware Settings Data bits e zl Parity None zi Stop bits fi zi iesu The Advanced Data default settings are Table 2 2 Advanced Data Connection Preferences Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 5 Click the f button to apply your changes or click the Cancel button to discard the changes and return to the GC Directory dialog Dial up Connection JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 33 MON2000 6 Next from the GC Directory dialog scroll over to configure the following parameters The Baud Rate Data Bits and Stop Bits parameters were configured above Table 2 3 GC Directory Dialog Default Settings Heading Pull down Menu Selection PC Port COM1 COM2 COM3 Handshaking None RTS On Delay 0 RTS On Delay 0 Extra Delay 0 See note Connection Type Direct Connection Direct Remote Modem Telephone Complete number Area Code XXX XXXX Server Type XXX XX XX XXX IP Address 10 digits Retries M
121. 0 MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 35 9 2 21 Run Command 9 3 The run command future release instructs the Auto Sequencing module to start execution of a user program The user specifies whether the Auto Sequencing module waits for completion of the user program before processing the poll control file commands or continues immediately thus executing in parallel with the user program This feature allows you to further process the collected data As an example the user program might perform some validity checking on the data reformat it and then and store it in an Access database on the MON2000 PLUS PC DATA COLLECTION The Data Collection Start Auto function allows you to open an existing polling control file select to append or overwrite the existing output files select whether to enable Transaction Logging and start the automatic data collection Run Command 9 36 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 3 1 Start Auto Sequencing To initiate Auto Sequencing use the Data Col para collection lection gt Start Auto menu Configuration gt Start Auto 1 Click START AUTO and the Start Auto Sequencing dialog appears xi Polling Control File CAGCABIN AutoPolTTest_new_9 ape Open Output Files Append to the existing files C verwite the existing files IV Enable Transaction Logging 2 Click the button and the Open Polling
122. 0 0949 0 0837 0 0837 1301 86 1301 37 1301 21 1301 05 1256 79 1256 94 1256 98 1257 03 Air 28 9625 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Argon 39 948 0 0316 0 0283 0 0265 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ammonia 17 0306 0 1225 0 1095 0 1049 384 57 383 51 383 16 382 81 316 96 316 86 316 82 316 79 Benzene 78 114 0 3017 0 272 0 253 3305 03 3302 86 3302 15 3301 43 3169 81 3169 56 3169 48 3169 38 Butanes 58 1222 0 2059 0 183 0 1743 2879 01 2875 17 2873 98 2872 8 2653 64 2653 01 2652 86 2652 72 Butene 1 56 108 0 1871 0 1732 0 1673 2721 55 2718 7 2717 75 2716 82 2541 25 2540 97 2540 86 2540 76 Butenes 56 108 0 1923 0 176 0 1717 2713 09 2710 23 2709 31 2708 36 2532 79 2532 49 2532 42 2532 27 1 2 Butadiene 54 092 0 2121 0 1924 0 1871 2597 13 2595 12 2594 45 2593 79 2461 91 2461 82 2461 78 2461 74 1 3 Butadiene 54 092 0 1844 0 1703 0 1643 2544 13 2542 1 2541 43 2540 77 2408 91 2408 8 2408 76 2408 72 C3 44 0956 0 1682 0 1534 0 147 2461 51 2458 25 2457 23 2456 16 2264 71 2264 52 2264 38 2264 25 C4 58 1222 0 2281 0 2049 0 1947 3081 63 3077 47 3076 32 3074 97 2841 63 2841 98 2841 83 2841 68 C4 1 56 108 0 1871 0 1732 0 1673 2721 55 2718 7 2717 75 2716 82 2541 25 2540 97 2540 86 2540 76 C5 72 1488 0 2999 0 2651 0 2505 3754 2 3749 68 3748 71 3746 71 3464 63 3468 87 3468 75 3468 52 C6 47 35 17 95 9558 0 389 0 3459 0 3331 4663 16 4657 69 4655 86 4654 08 4316 22 4315 67 4315 46 4315 27 C6 50 50 00 93 1887 0 3704 0 3305 0 3183 4533 05 4527 71 4525 93 4524 19 4194 99 4194 46 4194 25 4194 07 C6 GPA 2261 99 93 1
123. 0 7028 5 859 0 4517 5513 4 5110 1 n Heptane a SUYABI60 EWOJYI sed 104 BIRMIJOS QOOZ NOW a jqe eleq jueuodwoj OLOZ AINF Table B 1 Example Standard Component Data Table Continued Component Mol Reid RelDens Rel Dens GPM _ GrossDry Net Dry AGA 8 is Name Wt Vapor Gas Liquid Lb Gal Factor BTU BTU Component I D No H2S 34 0809 395 1 1767 0 79886 6 6602 0 135156 638 57 588 15 H2S 40 HCL 36 46 925 1 2588 0 8558 7 135 0 1349 0 0 None al Helium 4 0026 0 0 1382 0 12486 1 041 0 101559 0 0 Helium 13 Hydrogen 2 02 0 0 0696 0 07 0 0 325 274 4 Hydrogen 12 i Butane 58 1222 72 644 2 0068 0 56283 4 6925 0 327158 3259 42 3006 94 i Butane 03 i Butene 56 11 63 4 1 9372 0 6004 5 006 0 296 3068 2 2866 5 n Butane 27 i Pentane 72 1488 20 474 2 4911 0 62514 5 212 0 365621 4010 16 3707 56 i Pentane 05 i Propylbenzene 120 19 0 188 4 1498 0 8663 1 223 0 4396 5976 6 5674 n Nonane ki i Octane 114 23 1 708 3 9439 0 6962 5 804 0 5199 6246 1 5792 2 n Octane Methane 16 0425 5000 0 5539 0 3 2 5 0 169487 1012 34 911 5 Methane 00 Methyl Alcohol 32 04 4 63 1 1063 0 796 6 64 0 1275 868 7 767 9 None i Methylcyclo C5 84 16 4 503 2 9057 0 7536 6 283 0 3538 4511 6 4209 1 n Hexane Methylcyclo C6 98 19 1 609 3 39 0 774 6 453 0 4019 5228 4874 9 n Heptane 2 Methylhexane 100 21 2 271 3 4596 0 683 5 694 0 4647 5507 3 5104 n Heptane 3 Methylhexane 100 21 2 13 3 4596 0 6917 5 767 0 4589 5511 3 5107 8 n Hepta
124. 00 Stream 3 Det 1 6 13 2002 2 12 58 PM cgm_ ted6 13 02 cqm E CGM 4 Model 500 _SNGL Stream 1 Det 1 8 10 2001 12 47 36 PM 81001 cgm CGM 5 Model 500 2 Det 2 2 27 2001 8 47 08 AM today cam Click the Save mp button to save the selected comparison file to disk The Save Chromatogram Comparison File dialog appears Save in Es save yi E ex Eg 022701 cgm E 030901 cgm E3 551 cgm2 cgm E 031901 cgm 3 today cgm e 81001 cgm 53 zoom cgm cgm red6 13 02 cgm J LAST cgm File name Save as type cam Files cam vi Cancel l l Enter the file name to be saved and click the Save button to save the file to disk Or Click the Cancel button to exit this dialog From File on Disk 6 8 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 6 3 REMOVING A CHROMATOGRAM FROM VIEW To remove a chromatogram trace from the Viewer display and close the cgm file if reading from disk 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Ca E CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm E CGM 1 DEA Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM RIEN c LJCGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM Cur All Save Cmp vw 2 Click the Remove button MON2000 removes the chromatogram from view and if applicable closes the cgm file 6 4 SAVING A CHROMATOGRAM TO DISK NOTICE To save
125. 1 apc ia AutoPollTest new 3 apc in AutoPollTest new 10 apc laa AutoPollTest new 4 apc lat AutoPollTest new 11 apc ja AutoPoliTest new 5 apc si File name C Save as type Poling Control File apc Cancel p A 9 2 2 Open an Existing Polling Control File To edit or modify the configuration of an existing file 1 From the MON2000 PLUS main window Sethi Meare use the Data Collection gt Configuration gt Open File menu 2 Click the button and the Open Polling Control File window displays Look in Sain et ef Ea a AutoPollTest_051004 apc AutoPollTest 2 051004 apc laa AutoPoliTest new apc ka AutoPollTest new 1 apc ka AutoPollTest new 2 apc File name Files of type Polina Control File apc vi Cancel L h 3 Select the desired polling control file then click the button JULY 2010 Open an Existing Polling Control File 9 8 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 4 MON2000 The Configuration for Data Collection window displays Configuration for Data Collection CAGC BIN AutoPollTest_new_5 ape Polling Control File Polling Output File s GC Entry Delay Ethernet Alarms E Poll Alarms Averages Poll Averages Event Log Poll Event Log Maintenance Log Poll Maintenance Log Registers D Pel Registers Reports CGM Archive CGM on Alarm Add Insert Delete Poll Command Details Fun Command Deta Save OK Cancel Ad inset _ Delete Po
126. 11 stream data stream togg 7 1 Stream 7 112 stream data stream togg 8 1 Stream 8 113 doutcur i 1 114 doutcur 2 1 115 doutcur 3 1 116 doutcur 4 1 117 doutcur 5 1 JULY 2010 User Modbus Register List F 6 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 F 2 1 SIM 2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST The information in the following tables is derived from engineering specification number ES 17128 005 Model 2251 Enhanced Specification Chromatograph Controller Modbus Communication Indices and has been updated for the 2350A GC Controllers Nop eseription 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 G 3 continued SIM 2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST 3007 Component Table n where n CDT used during last run Component Index 7 3008 Component Table n where n CDT used during last run Component Index 8 sou 3009 Component Table n where n CDT used during last run Component Index 9 A go e User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 7 MON2000 G 3 continued SIM_2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST No 3020 3024 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 kg d 3043 Cycle Start Time Year 3044 Cycle Start Time Hour 3045 Cycle Start Time Minutes JULY 2010 User Modbus Register List F 8 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 G 3 continued SIM_2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST Reg No Description BIT NUMBER o pos s
127. 12 3 4 5 8 117 8 50382 244 1 3 112 3 127 7 4 9 9 145 6 2 47 74e 005 4635 1 2 142 9 148 6 Leg 10 150 1 3 50245e 007 3 2258e 005 1 3 148 6 167 8 2 7 11 177 6 2 0876e 005 1804 1 1 ASI 189 4 2 8 12 203 6 5 87488e 005 3868 1 1 196 6 215 6 SF Table 7 4 Contents Guide for Raw Data Report Content Related Function s Menu Section Retention Time standard GC application n a n a Peak Area Peak Height Det ector Integration Start End Peak Width 1 2 Height Mthd method standard GC application peak Chromatogram 6 2 1 JULY 2010 derivation method non edit Viewer Report Contents 7 12 REPORTS MON2000 Calibration Report Calibration Run 1 of 1 Date Time 03 24 95 12 28 Analysis Time 225 Cycle Time 240 Stream 4 Stream 4 Mode ANLY Cycle Start Time 12 24 Analyzer AT401STD Strm Seq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Company Daniel Industries Houston TX COMPONENT CAL RAW DATA NEW RF RF NEW RT RT NAME CONC DEV DEV C6 47 35 17 0 02000 24840 00000 1 242e4006 9 07 29 0 0 35 PROPANE 0 50000 3 66212e 5 7 32424e6 5 4 24 48 8 0 00 i BUTANE 0 10000 86320 00000 8 632e 005 2 76 63 5 F L n BUTANE 0 10000 90784 00000 9 0784e 5 1 16 TLB 0 28 NEOPENTANE 0 05000 45084 00000 9 0168e 5 3 90 82 6 A0 3 36 i PENTANE 0 05000 48978 00000 9 7956e45 3 46 105 7 04 56 n PENTANE 0 05000 50064 00000 1 00128e 6 2 99 117 8 0 76 NITROGEN 0 60000 2 47
128. 14 sysalarm set 15 1 Heater 5 Controller Failure No 15 sysalarm set 16 1 Heater 6 Controller Failure No 16 sysalarm set 17 1 FID Flame out No 17 sysalarm set 18 Warmstart Calibration Failure No 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 5 26 27 sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 Valve Timing Failure 200 Invalid Non Volatile Data M200 Inval M200 Inval M200 Bad Options M200 Stac lid A Module Data lid B Module Data k Overflow M200 Hardware Shutdown Preamp Preamp Preamp Preamp Preamp Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog nalog nalog nalog nalog nalog nalog gt popo op P op pm nalog Analog Analog Analog Input 1 Out of Range Input Input Input Failu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu 2 Out of Range 3 Out of Range 4 Out of Range
129. 2 Stream03 Stream04 Stream05 Alphanumeric field For Help press F1 Valves dialog for Model 700 GC Valves dialog for 2350A GCs To edit the settings displayed double click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus JULY 2010 Valves 5 60 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 See the following table for details Table 5 12 Description of Valve Settings Setting Description Channel channel number assigned Label name used to identify the valve 12 characters maximum By default the 2350A GC stream valves are shown first and are labeled S1 S12 followed by the analytical valves AV1 AV5 Model 700 GCs analytical valves are shown first and are labeled AV1 AV5 followed by the stream valves S1 S8 Switch sets operational mode for this valve Auto valve operation is determined by the GC application Off valve is set to OFF On valve is set to ON Usage sets which digital output from the Timed Events function Model 700 and see Section 5 3 is assigned to this valve Model 500 GCs with 2350A Controllers Each Usage option is created per the following example 1 AVI where the digit 1 is taken from the valve number set by the Valve DO option see Timed Events see Section 5 3 and the name AV1 is taken from Label set in this Valve dialog The same Usage assignment cannot be used for multiple valves unless these valves are set to Unused Current Va
130. 2 42 3772 08 3771 95 3771 83 Trans 2 Butene 56 108 0 1975 0 1789 0 1761 2711 1 2708 3 2707 4 2706 4 2530 8 2530 5 2530 5 2530 3 Triptane 100 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Water 18 0153 0 2646 0 2345 0 2191 45 074 44 433 44 224 44 016 0 0 0 0 sudej801euj0JU2 sed 104 BILMIJOS QOOZ NOW LL 9 MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs Component Data Table JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 1 APPENDIX C DATA COMPUTATIONS C 1 DATA ACQUISITION The 2350A GC Controller performs a 12 bit analog to digital A D conversion every 25 milliseconds on channel 0 during an analysis period This is the period when the left side of the display is counting the elapsed time of the analysis The fixed number on the right side of the display is the total cycle time Exactly 40 equi spaced data samples are taken every second for analysis by the controller A sampling frequency of 40 Hertz Hz was chosen to reduce 60 Hz normal mode noise After each point on the chromatograph signal is sampled the resulting number is stored in a buffer area in the controller memory for processing During the analysis only the last 256 data points are available for processing Because the data analysis is done as the signal is sampled in real time only a limited number of past data samples is required to analyze any signal As a part of the data acquisition process groups of incoming data samples are averaged together before storing to th
131. 2000 JULY 2010 4 8 LEE view He Auto Sequence F2 Single Stream Hatt F3 Calibration Baseline Run Valve Timing GC Time CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 15 provided scroll arrows to increase or decrease the highlighted value 5 Click the 1 button or press the enter key to write the selected date time to the GC Controller Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window STOP NOW Use this function to immediately stop all analysis runs 1 Use the Control Stop Now menu to access this function 2 MON2000 prompts you to confirm your selection MON2000 Q Stop Now can affect the next analysis Do you really want to stop w Click the i button to proceed Click the No button to abort and return to the main window This function forces the system to the Idle mode If Stop Now is performed while an analysis is in progress the components will continue to elute from the columns per the Idle mode All resultant data will be lost Do not perform a Stop Now unless absolutely necessary Whenever possible use the Halt function Stop Now 4 16 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 3 Any GC function in progress is stopped The Mode field in the status bar displays Idle Det Mode Stop Now JULY 2010 MON2000 Application JULY 2010 Component Data Timed Events User Defined F6 FS b Calculations Limit Alarms D
132. 2010 Poll Command Maintenance Log 9 28 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 8 Click the button to discard your changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window 9 2 18 Poll Command Registers Blocks of Modbus Register data can be specified for collection To configure the Registers Command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands use the Commands pull down list and select the POLL command General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay MON2000 1 Pol Registers 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse Type field and select Registers from the pull down list 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the Registers command MON2000 PLUS reads all the configured Registers associated with the Modbus Type Sim 2251 or User Modbus if you are connected to a GC Controller If you are using a direct connection rather than an Ethernet connection the reading process could take a long time When initially building a polling control file you may want to use the MON2000 PLUS Offline Edit function with an as configured version of the application open to avoid these delays Poll Command Registers JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 29 3 MON2000 4 Click the
133. 3 Application Functions JULY 2010 TABLE OF CONTENTS v MON2000 5 5 3 User Defined sess enn 5 25 5 6 Limit Alarms esee enne 5 27 Limit Alarms Description sesseesese 5 30 5 7 Discrete Alarms eese 5 31 5 7 1 Delayed Discrete Alarms ssessse 5 33 5 8 Stream AE ae eee ie a e ki ne a ni e a a 5 38 5 9 Analog Inputs eueeueeeeeeeeeeeee 5 44 5 10 Analog Outputs eeeeeus 5 48 5 10 1 Analog Output Dialog Description 5 48 5 10 2 Changing a Variable seesessssee 5 52 5 10 3 Changing the Bargraph ssssssee 5 52 5 10 4 Performing a Manual Calibration 5 53 5 10 5 Performing an Automated Calibration 5 54 5 11 Discrete IMPUtS cossis orsoni n ace Ec kak 5 56 5 12 Discrete Outputs ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 57 Bhs Valves aise nm 5 58 5 14 Temperature Control 5 61 5 15 FID Configuration sess 5 62 5 16 LOI Status Variables 5 66 5 17 Serial Ports ion ande oben 5 68 5 17 1 Serial Ports Configuration sssue 5 71 5 18 GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations 5 74 5 18 1 GC DB 9 Serial to External Modem DB 25 5 76 5 18 2 GC Phoenix
134. 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cam H 2 Click the ForeedCal button Toggling TEVs and CGM Components To toggle the display of the TEV and CGM Component speadsheets 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove F al CurzAll Save Cmo Ill CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030301 cam BREYER CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM 030901 cgm 2 Click the OufAl button If multiple CGMs are displayed in the graph area the CUR ALL button toggles between showing all TEVs and all components for all CGMS to showing only the TEVs and components for the currently selected stream Forcing a Calibration 6 20 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 3 MON2000 toggles the display of the TEVs and Components spreadsheets and the CGM view Event Type Value Time a CGM Event Type Value Time 4 Component Det Time 4 TAN PROPANE 1 49 0 PROPANE Cur All View 1 Cur All View 2 6 7 VIEWING BASELINE DATA Use the Baseline function to display the retention times and baselines for the selected chromatogram 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Calf Cur All Save Cmp lll CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM L
135. 3271 67 Neohexane 86 177 0 2898 0 2627 0 255 4185 84 4180 83 4179 15 4177 52 3870 32 3869 8 3869 59 3869 41 Neopentane 72 15 0 2387 0 2121 0 2025 3521 72 3517 43 3516 01 3514 61 3251 28 3250 83 3250 67 3250 51 Nitrogen 28 0134 0 0224 0 0173 0 0173 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NO2 46 0006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NO 30 006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N20 44 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Xylene 106 167 0 5128 0 4427 0 4231 4602 17 4598 64 4597 48 4596 31 4376 8 4376 48 4376 34 4376 23 Oxygen 31 9988 0 0316 0 0283 0 0265 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Pentene 70 14 0 249 0 2258 0 2191 3381 29 3377 75 3376 57 3375 42 3155 92 3155 59 3155 45 3155 34 Propane 44 0956 0 1453 0 1338 0 1288 2224 01 2221 1 2220 13 2219 17 2043 71 2043 37 2043 23 2043 11 Propadiene 40 065 0 1414 0 1304 0 1265 1945 25 1943 96 1943 53 1943 11 1855 1 1855 09 1855 08 1855 08 Propylene 42 0797 0 1378 0 1265 0 1225 2061 57 2059 43 2058 72 2058 02 1926 35 1926 13 1926 05 1925 97 sudeJBo1euloJu2 Sed 104 a1eM1L0S 000Z NOW OL g8 OLOC ATNNA jqe 1 eleq jueuodwo9 Table B 2 ISO Component Data Table Component Molar Sum Sum Sum CVSup CVSup CVSup Sus CV Inf CVInf d M int Name Mass oa pen dec aa a ures kJ Mol pe Gey Mol Mol 25 C 20 C 25 C Propyne 40 065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p Xylene 106 167 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sulfur Dioxide 64 065 0 1549 0 1449 0 1414 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Styrene 104 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Toluene 92 141 0 3886 0 3421 0 3286 3952 72 3949 81 3948 84 3947 89 377
136. 4 Custom Strm Data Field 5 Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Setting Optional Base Pressures JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 89 6 To assign a scale ensure that the correct row is selected and click the _ Seale FS button or press the F5 key Double click the desired scale option to apply For instructions on creating or editing a scale see Section 5 18 4 The Optional Base Pressure variable should be listed with the settings specified Click the changes 1 button to accept your Setting Optional Base Pressures 5 90 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 18 6 Setting Optional Base Results As discussed in Section 5 18 4 you can assign GC analysis variables to various Modbus registers Follow the procedure below to add the Results Opt Base Press variable to the Registers List A group of 12 GC analysis calculations can be used to reflect the use of different base pressures See Section C 3 for more information To assign the Results Opt Base Press variable Application Reports Logs Chre 1 Verify the values for optional base pressures Ss Component Data F6 that have already been entered Timed Events F5 User Defined gt a Use the Application gt Streams menu to E imil arms access this function Discrete Alarms b The Streams dialog displays streams Analog Inputs
137. 4 COM 4A board installed the controller supports 8 ports 9 ports with the modem With the Multifunction board installed COM3 is the assigned port Usage Defines port usage such as a slave config uration i e User Modbus SIM 2251 PC communication port a Report or Serial Port as well as the general type of serial communications protocol To accommodate installations that use Modbus registers and the SIM 2251 protocol along with a data acquisition system MON2000 enables you to arrange data values for a more effective polling Note that the contents of all SIM 2251 Modbus registers are predefined and the values for component variables are predetermined However a cross index to these predefined assignments can be developed With the Multifunction board installed COM3 is the assigned port JULY 2010 Serial Ports 5 70 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Setting MON2000 Table 5 13 Description of Serial Port Settings Continued Description Baud Rate Baud rate setting Range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 For high performing PCs set the baud rate to 19200 If you experience a com munications failure at this rate set the baud rate to 9600 Baud rate settings less than 9600 may result in real time delivery that is unacceptably slow Data Bits Stop Bits Number of data bits Range 7 8 Default 8 Number of stop bits Range 1 2 Default 1 Parity Parity check method
138. 5 0 6457 5 383 0 3441 3835 4 3583 3 n Pentane 37 Propane 44 0956 188 62 1 5225 0 50719 4 2285 0 275429 2521 92 2320 36 Propane 02 Propadiene 40 07 0 1 411 0 0 0 2254 2 2254 2 Propane 24 Propylene 42 0797 227 3 1 4529 0 5226 4 3571 0 255087 2338 4 2187 05 Propane 23 Propyne 40 07 0 1 411 0 0 0 2246 2 2246 2 Propane 25 p Xylene 106 17 0 342 3 6655 0 8657 7 218 0 3885 5220 8 4968 6 n Octane baj Sulfur Dioxide 64 06 88 2 2117 1 397 11 65 0 1453 0 0 CO2 43 sudej801euj0Ju5 sed 104 eje 1108 QOOZ NOW 9 q e qe eleq jueuodwoj OLOZ AINF Table B 1 Example Standard Component Data Table Continued Component Mol Reid Rel Dens Rel Dens GPM GrossDry Net Dry AGA 8 is Name Wt Vapor Gas Liquid Lb Gal Factor BTU BTU Component I D No Styrene 104 15 0 24 3 5959 0 911 7 595 0 3622 5042 7 4841 n Octane Toluene 92 14 1 032 3 1812 0 8718 7 268 0 3348 4485 4 4283 5 n Heptane Trans 2 Butene 56 11 49 8 1 9372 0 61 5 086 0 2914 3075 1 2873 4 n Butane 30 Triptane 100 21 3 374 3 4596 0 6946 5 791 0 4571 5496 2 5093 n Heptane Water 18 0153 0 9505 0 62202 1 8 3372 0 057072 50 43 0 Water 44 sudeJBo1euloJu5 Sed 104 9eJew110S QOOZ NOW 9 4 oroz ATNNA oe qe eleq jueuodwo9 Table B 2 ISO Component Data Table Component Molar Sum Sum Sum CVSup CVSup CVSup a CV Inf CV Inf eae d Name Mass Ped deo A Wen pen Gn kJ Mol ao sey Mol Mol 25 C 20 C 25 C Acetylene 26 038
139. 5 2 Archive Export Data cesses 7 24 r c REC De 7 27 7 6 Trend Data ciere ay kan kan kon kai aka p a da kak Rud 7 28 7 6 1 Trend Data Model 700 2350A GCs 7 28 7 6 2 View Live Trend Online Model 700 2350A 7 29 7 6 3 View Trend from File on Disk 7 32 7 6 4 Edit Graph Display eese 7 34 7 6 5 Changing Cursor Size 7 34 7230 8 Describe Trend eere Ret ens 7 35 Jof Print LIrendz usciti cete ex xh sa ennt ities en 7 35 7 0 8 Save Trend scm nre Exe 7 36 7 6 9 Read Trend Archive ccceeeeeeee eee ee teeta eee 7 36 7 6 10 Display Options ccccccceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 7 37 JULY 2010 Reports viii TABLE OF CONTENTS MON2000 LOGS 8 1 Maintenance Log eese 8 1 8 2 Parameter List 1 1c orco eee aktik cereus 8 3 8 3 Alarm LOG 2 eontra nn exa nn m etn niin 8 6 8 4 Clear or Acknowledge Active Alarms 8 9 8 5 Everit Log corem Re tnm RRxDu ERR Shine 8 9 MON2000 PLUS DATA 9 1 OVERVIEW sic ik sake kose ae ea ia ene sis 9 1 COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 2 Data Collection Configuration 9 3 9 2 1 Create a New Polling Control File 9 6 9 2 2 Open an Existing Polling Control File 9 7 9 2 3 Await Command sssssseseen 9 9 9 2 4 Connect Logon Command sess 9 10 9 2 5 Connect No
140. 50 46 00 w 50 0 3 2 240 0 amp Edit Timed Events Table Edit Timed Events Update Time from Cursor SOVETSTETTHES oo 255 510 765 1020 1275 153 0 1785 2040 2295 2550 Discard Changes Time 8 Chromatogram Save Sheet Graph Es ness peso Save Copy to clipboard Edit Cursor Print i CGM 1 2350 PI Stream 1 Det 1 1 5 21 Print Sheet Timed events event type valve or detector value time Double click right click or FS to edit For Help press F1 JULY 2010 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer 6 14 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER Chromatogram Viewer o 127 50 45 00 MON2000 i age Summation goo Summation f Inhibit eoo Peak Width Inhibit 700 1 TH Summation i Summation mom H Inhibit a 50 0 la H 3 E i i goo la li n H 30 0 H i i i 200 H i aoo H f 0 0 d 10 0 I Save A D values i 00 255 510 765 1020 1275 1530 1785 2040 2295 2550 Pin atend ofun PO n n kn LE X M 7 Saye at end of run Chromatogram lad Edit Results Desc Save Hemove Forced Gal Cur All Save Erp Faw Data Edit Cursor Print CGM 2 2350 PI Stream 1 Det 2 1 5 2004 10 53 51 4 keci MON2000 displays the Timed Events Table dialog e Type V 1 4 AV 04 I inhibit nhibit Slope Sens Peak Width Slope Sens Peak Width nhibit nhibit nhibit nhibit nhibit nhibit Summation Summation nhibit
141. 50 EPROMS E 13 MON2000 4 To reset the CPU registers remove the jumper from J14 pins 1 and 2 and place it to short J14 pins 2 and 3 5 After briefly shorting J14 pins 2 and 3 remove the jumper again Place it back in its original position shorting J14 pins 1 and 2 E 7 REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES 1 Place and securely plug the SBC53 CPU Board into slot number 2 of the Card Cage Assembly 2 Reconnect all ribbon cables that were unplugged see Section E 5 Because the ribbon cables are arranged in layers it important to reconnect them in the order listed below Table E 1 2350 GC Ribbon Cables to Connect Part System Interface Number Board connection 3 2350 063 J12 Cable Originating from Board SBC53 3 2350 052 J9 3 2350 062 J11 SBC53 SBC53 3 2350 051 J4 SBC53 3 2350 064 J8 DSPI O 3 2350 053 J10 DSPI O 3 2350 054 J6 RTI1281 3 2350 055 J5 JULY 2010 RTI1281 Reassembly Procedures E 14 gt UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 3 Return and secure the Card Cage Assembly its original position in the chassis mounting Tighten the four screws 4 Return and secure the field wiring TB in its original position Tighten the six screws 5 Reconnect the AC power cord to J21 on the TB and restore AC power to the 2350A GC Controller E 8 SET UP AND PROGRAMMING The purpose of this procedure is to define the CMOS table set up and programmin
142. 68e45 4 128e4005 8 88 145 6 0 00 ETHANE 97 13000 3 50394e 7 3 60747e 5 2 69 150 1 0 20 CARBON DIOXIDE 0 40000 2 09216e 5 5 2304e 5 2 88 177 6 0 17 ETHANE 1 00000 5 88496e 5 5 88496e 5 1 49 203 6 0 25 ACTIVE ALARMS Table 7 5 Contents Guide for Calibration Report Content Related Function s Menu Section Component Name CDT Application gt Component 5 2 Cal Conc Data F6 Raw Data CDT additional columns Application gt Component 5 2 New RF Data F6 RF Dev New RT RT Dev Alarms Limit Alarms Application gt Limit Alarms 5 6 Streams used for analysis display O s in the calibration raw data columns see Section 5 8 Report Contents JULY 2010 MON2000 Date Time 03 24 95 12 28 Stream 4 Stream Analyzer AT401STD 4 REPORTS 7 13 Final Calibration Report Analysis ime 225 MODE ANLY Cycle Strm Seq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Company Daniel Industries Houston Component Name C6 47 35 17 PROPANE i BUTANE n BUTANE NEOPENTANE i PENTANE n PENTANE NITROGEN E HANE CARBON DIOXIDE ETHANE 0 Ber i NoooooonHnso ACTIVE ALARMS I Content c Cal onc 03000 00300 30100 30200 10000 09990 10000 44300 61810 00400 99900 Old RF 92126e 6 11689e 4 6 28687e 6 32258e4 6 39596e 6 l 4712e 6 1 51914e 6 726661 0000 585512 0000 861074 0000 953873 0000 Han pon
143. 721 721 721 721 721 721 195 196 197 198 199 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 7225 7226 7227 avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs axim axim axim axim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um um 33 34 35 36 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Not Not Not Not sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed No No No No No No 7228 7229 7230 7231 1232 7233 7234 7235 7236 7237 7238 7239 7240 7241 7242 7243 7244 7245 7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 7257 7258 7259 7260 avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avg arc avg arc avg arc
144. 887 0 3943 0 3503 0 3373 4697 93 4692 42 4690 58 4688 78 4348 61 4348 06 4347 84 4347 66 sudesBo1ewosyy sed 104 BILMIJOS QOOZ NOW L 9 jqe eleq jueuodwoj OLOc ANA Table B 2 ISO Component Data Table Component Molar Sum Sum Sum CVSup CVSup CVSup d CV Inf CVInf er L m Name Mass Wo a Gn pen ae oy Cee kJ Mol WO as Y Mol Mol 25 C 20 C 25 C C6 57 28 14 94 1904 0 3781 0 3367 0 3243 4580 15 4574 76 4572 96 4571 2 4238 87 4238 34 4238 12 4237 94 Carbon Monoxide 28 01 0 0265 0 0224 0 02 282 8 282 91 282 95 282 98 282 8 282 91 282 95 282 98 Carbon Dioxide 44 0095 0 0819 0 0748 0 0728 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cis 2 Butene 56 108 0 1975 0 1817 0 1761 2714 9 2711 9 2711 2710 2534 6 2534 2 2534 1 2533 9 COS 60 076 0 1225 0 114 0 1095 548 01 548 15 548 19 548 23 548 01 548 15 548 19 548 23 CS2 76 143 0 2145 0 1949 0 1871 1104 06 1104 32 1104 41 1104 49 1104 06 1104 32 1104 41 1104 49 Cyclohexane 84 161 0 3209 0 2864 0 2757 3960 67 3956 02 3954 47 3952 96 3690 23 3689 42 3689 13 3688 86 Cyclopentane 70 14 0 255 0 2302 0 2236 3326 14 3322 19 3320 88 3319 59 3100 77 3100 03 3099 76 3099 51 Diisobutyl 114 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 Dimethbutan 86 177 0 3 0 2739 0 2569 4193 63 4188 6 4186 93 4185 28 3878 11 3877 57 3877 36 3877 17 2 2 Dimethpenta 100 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 Dimethpenta 100 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 Dimethpenta 100 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ethane 30 069 0 1 0 0922 0 0894
145. A drive and press Next at the bottom of this dialog box If you are using a drive other than drive A enter its path here Jan Browse HN 4 Click Browse to select a disk path to the removeable storage medium that holds the license file Click OK to accept your selection Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 9 3 5 Click Next The Transfer License In Step 2 of 3 screen displays Transfer License In Step 2 of 3 Now the license needs to be copied to the floppy disk 1 Remove the floppy disk and take it to the computer with the licensed copy of this program 2 Run the licensed copy of this program and select Transfer Out 3 Bring the disk back to this computer and press Next If there is a significant delay between transfers for example you are moving a license from your work computer to your home computer you can suspend the transfer process and continue later Continue Transfer Later cme Remove the removeable storage medium from the targeted computer and insert it into the source computer Launch MON2000 PLUS on the source computer When the startup screen displays press Enter The License Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License 2 10 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Configuration screen displays with the message Unlimited license l MON2000 PLUS License Configuration m Program L
146. A COMPUTATIONS MON2000 where DRYBTU value from Equation C 7 CORRSATBTU corrected saturated BTU content per cubic foot of total gas sample at base conditions of BASE PRS and 60 F Z compressibility of total gas as calculated in Equation C 10 BASEPRS base contract pressure specified defaults to 14 73 PSIA f Compressibility and Base Pressure Compressibility and base pressure corrections for Dry BTU are Equation C 12 Dry BTU at Base Pressure ComDryRTU Bex Tan Base Pressure Goalie Pressure Z BasePressure where CORRDRYBTU value from Equation C 7 Z compressibility factor see Equation C 10 BASE PRESSURE base contract pressure specified defaults to 14 73 PSIA g BTU Calculations Note that the BTU calculations apply to Gross dry saturated actual BTU and Net dry saturated and actual BTU Equation C 13 BTU Calculations GrossActualBTU corr GrossDryBTU corr x 100 eT Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 13 MON2000 where WVC Water volume content provided by a live analog input Equation C 14 Wobbe Index Calculation CORR GROSS BTU JRD WI where W I Wobbe index value CORRGROSSBTU Corrected Dry BTU for total gas Sample as calculated in Equation C 10 RD real Relative Density as calculated in Equation C 9 NOTICE Equation C 15 Weight Percent Calculation All components in the WTpercent CONC MW x 100 sample must be measured in P
147. ABLE TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABLI seqtxt rpt_headerl rpt_header2 cdt cdt analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis analysis stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data stream_data Gycl strt tm stdusr compnam molpct wtpct liqvolpct gpm btu gross btu net rel den gas superior m3 inferior m3 superior kg inferior kg mole molwgt tl liqvol tl gpmc2 l btugros tl btu net tl rd gas tl sm3 dry tl im3 dry tl skg dry STREAM NO 1 DET NO Ji 1 CDT TBL NO CDT TBL NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO STREAM NO 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 54 25 56 51 VARIABLI STRING STRING VARIABLI STRING STRING VARIABLI STRING STRING STRING STRING VARIABL A Fl Pl STRING VARIABL VARIABL
148. AST cgm Y W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cam LJCGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM O30901 cgm 2 Click the Baselines button This removes the integration lines from a displayed Archive CGM 3 MON2000 displays a plot of the baseline values and lists the corresponding retention times in the legend table MON2000 Viewing Baseline Data JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 6 8 6 9 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 21 VIEWING RAW DATA Use the Raw Data function to display the Raw Data Table for the selected chromatogram 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Ce Ill CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm Cur All Save Crp vw W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 9 2001 2 44 40 PM 030901 cam LJCGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM O30901 cgm 2 Click the RawData button The Raw Data dialog displays and shows the raw data for all CGMs in the graph area Cancel 3 Click the Cancel button to return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog DISPLAY OPTIONS Right click the graph area to access these options or use the corresponding keystroke s Options are listed in alphabetical order See Table 6 1 for a complete listing of option names descriptions and keystroke sequences Viewing RAW Data
149. Alarms option EVENT LOG Use this function to track the system and operator events that have occurred with a given GC unit To view the Event Log 1 Use the Logs gt Event Log menu to access this function MON2000 retrieves the last 50 events from the GC unit Clear or Acknowledge Active Alarms 8 10 LOGS MON2000 2 The Event Log dialog appears displaying each system or operator event and the corresponding data UserID Time DANIEL 11 00 44 4M Maintenance Log Enti Cancel Table 8 3 Event Log Attributes Attribute Description User Id user name Date date event occurred Time time event occurred Event Message indicates event type 1 e describes event Old Value if applicable the value before the event New Value if applicable the value after the event 3 Click the Cancel button to exit and return to the main window Event Log JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 1 MON2000 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING NOTICE The Data Collection feature is only available with the MON2000 PLUS program 9 1 OVERVIEW The MON2000 PLUS program provides configurable automatic collection and storage of analysis and calibration data from the gas chromatograph controller Configuration of the specific chromatographs to be polled timing of polling and specific data to be collected from each is defined by the user through the setup of polling control files
150. An Auto Sequencing module interprets the commands in a polling control file and performs the collection and storage of data N OTI C fs Data collected is stored in text files txt or comma delimited files csv The emphasis is The MON2000 PLUS on the data being in a form suitable for import programis not design d Xo by standard spreadsheet and or database provide database capability programs for the data collected Reports collected are stored 1n text files txt formatted as ready to print or in comma delimited files csv that reduce white space and the output file size JULY 2010 Overview 9 2 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING All Model 500 and 1000 GC s with 2350A and older 2350 2360 GC Controllers and Model 700 GC Controllers are supported in the acquisition of the following types of data Alarms Selection of Alarm Log Active Alarms or Unacknowledged Alarms Averages Direct Access to single averages and or blocks of averages to include support for acquiring results from most recent averaging period as well as those for previous averaging periods number limited by number supported by specific model and application Access to average value maximum value minimum value and number of samples for the period to be supported e CGM Archive Selection of Last Analysis or Last Calibration and Stream number CGM on Alarm Poll the CGM when an alarm condition is set or cleared Event Log
151. Application ce Use this function to view and or edit the ee E Component Data Tables CDTs for a given GC tsapetined application fud Discrete eere a 1 Use the Application gt Component Data ere menu or press the F6 key to access this Mui p function Em Valves 2 The Component Data Tables menu appears Jenere Grid Serial Ports listing the CDTs available per associated TEPP stream s Associated Streams Choose the desired CDT The number of available CDTs depends on the GC unit configuration The standard GC application contains 4 CDTs MON2000 can operate GC applications with up to 5 CDTs To assign a CDT to a stream see Section 5 8 3 Click the button to accept your selection The Component Data Table dialog appears Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Component Data JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 7 MON2000 Component Data Table 1 Total Concentration 100 000 x 0289 Area 1 Area 0 3 Area 1545350 Var 0 3 Area 1651260 Var 0 1 Area 1715050 Var 0 0993 Area 1793230 Var 0 0999 Area 782820 Var 2 5 Area 637330 Var 89 5719 Area 953088 Var 1X Area 1060440 Var 5 Area Felons F2 Std Values F3 Baw Data F4 Update STD F5 Sort RT F6 Cancel 4 View or edit data Double click a given table cell or use one of the edit function buttons to N OTI CE make your changes To add a new component Some table cells will
152. B 9 male pin numbering scheme is also illustrated but for reference purposes only DB 9 MALE DB 9 FEMALE pin numbering socket numbering pinout for both DB 9 female jacks at GC Controller 5 4 3 2 1 GND DSR RxD TxD RLSD 9 8 7 6 RI RTS CTS DTR Figure 5 2 DB 9 Connector and Pinout P2 and P8 5 18 1 GC DB 9 Serial to External Modem DB 25 To make an RS 232 serial connection between one of the DB 9 serial ports of the GC and an external modem with DB 25 serial port you will need to manufacture a cable The cable will need DB 9 male and DB 25 male plug cable ends as illustrated in Figure 5 3 GC serial ports were wired to appear as DCE so that a straight through serial cable could be used instead of a null modem cable for direct serial connection between the GC Controller and the PC which is Data Terminal Equipment DTE The DB 9 jack on the GC serial port is wired to appear like a Data Communications Equipment DCE Therefore you use a custom GC DB 9 Serial to External Modem DB 25 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 77 MON2000 null modem type cable as shown below to make the connection between the GC and an external modem QOR H oop out 2 4 8 RTS 7 CTS 5 CTS out m 6 DTR o 2 5 GROUND 7 GROUND o 4 DSR 6 DSR out P 3 RxD 3 RxD out W 9 2T D 2 TxD in 1 RLSD DCD GC Male DB 25 plug for connecting female DB 9 jack to exte
153. Chars S C 1 cal run num Integer 2 sim abtu Float 3 sim alarm 16 Integer 4 sim anlytime Integer 5 sim cal Integer 6 sim cal abtu Float 7 sim cal comp Float 8 sim cal dbtu Float 9 sim cal gpm Float 10 sim cal rden Float 11 sim cal sbtu Float 12 sim cal unno Float 13 sim cal wobb Float 14 sim calcycle Long 15 sim char Char 16 sim compno 16 4 Integer 17 sim compress Float 18 sim cycday Integer 1 9 sim cychour Integer 20 sim cycmin Integer 21 sim cycmonth Integer 22 sim cyctime Long 23 sim cycyear Integer 24 sim day Integer 25 sim dbtu 1 1 Float 26 sim dummy 4 1 Float 27 sim_gpmwt 16 4 Float 28 sim_hour 1 T Integer 29 sim min 1 1 Integer 30 sim_molpct 16 4 Float 31 sim_month 1 1 Integer 32 sim_newdata 1 al Integer 33 sim_rden_gas 1 d Float 34 sim rf 16 4 Float 35 sim sbtu 1 1 Float 36 sim smask a 1 Integer 37 sim stream a 1 Integer 38 sim totgpm 1 1 Float 39 sim unnormal 1 1 Float 40 sim wobbe 1 1 Float 41 sim year 1 1 Integer KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK K Streams Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Structure Name No of Streams No entries found KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK Component Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Structure Name No of Streams No of Components per Stream No entries found KKKK
154. Click the Transmit button to retrieve the selected registers i e the specified data addresses from the GC Controller or other device Click the Stop button to cease transmission and return to the Modbus Function Selection options Note that the transmitted received packet displays in the Packet Input Output window 10 3 2 Use Template Mixed Data Types Use this function to create a new template or use an existing template file to directly decode Modbus register data retrieved from the GC Controller or other device Via the configuration of a given template WinMB imposes the specified data types etc onto the incoming registers The Template function 1s best used when decoding mixed data types To create a new template or use an existing template 1 Follow Steps 1 through 5 in Section 10 3 2 Use the Data Type radio buttons to select the desired template option to decode registers or decode logs Data Type to decode registers i j Edit Template C Use template to decode logs 3 Note that the Record No setting is now available Enter the desired record by typing in the provided data field or using the scroll arrows Record No 1 n ka Use Template Mixed Data Types JULY 2010 MON2000 MODBUS TEST 10 11 Table 10 6 Using Record Numbers with Templates Data Type Setting Other Setting s register template Enter Data Addr value Enter Record No value En
155. Component Data F6 calibration cycle time 5 3 Application gt Timed Events F5 calibration runs number averaged 5 8 Application gt Streams calibration runs number of 5 8 Application gt Streams calibration stream number 5 8 Application gt Streams communications baud rate at GC 5 17 Application gt Serial Ports JULY 2010 Procedures Guide 3 12 GETTING STARTED MON2000 Table 3 3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure Continued Task or Data Item Section s Menu Keystroke communications baud rate at PC 2 11 3 File gt COM ID component code and name 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 component full scale for output 5 1 Application gt System CGM Analog Output Config and Baseline Offset 5 10 Application gt Analog Outputs component s programmed for input 5 9 Application gt Analog Inputs 5 11 Application gt Discrete Inputs component s programmed for output 5 6 Application gt Limit Alarms 5 7 Application gt Discrete Alarms 5 10 Application gt Analog Outputs 5 12 Application gt Discrete Outputs component retention time 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 component zero for output 5 10 Application gt Analog Outputs Compressibility on off 5 5 1 Application gt Calculations gt Control current date 4 7 Control gt GC Time current time 4 7 Control gt GC Time cycle time 5 3 Application gt Timed Events F5 delete alarms 5 6 App
156. Control File dialog appears Open Polling Control File E aixi Look in ja BIN vi E ek E3 aa AutoPoliTest 051004 ape AutoPollTest 2 051004 apc a AutoPollTest new apc ka AutoPollTest new 1 apc ka AutoPollTest new 2 apc File name Files of type Polina Control File ape Cancel Ld 3 Select the desired polling control file and then click the button 4 From the Output Files selection click the desired radio button Append to the existing file Overwrite the existing file 5 In the check box select Enable Transaction Logging if desired Start Auto Sequencing JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 37 6 Click the OK button to confirm the start of automatic operation MON2000 PLUS begins the Auto Sequencing process and displays the Auto Sequencing Status window The Auto Sequencing module begins with the first command in the selected polling control file and performs the requested operation Processing continues sequentially through the file performing the operations requested by each command a If a Repeat command is encountered then the processing is restarted at the beginning of the file b If an End command or the end of file is encountered the module ends the command processing Start Auto Sequencing 9 38 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 3 2 Transaction Log To enable the Tr
157. Copy C F6 Cancel 3 To change the assigned variable stream or component click the appropriate cell and NOTICE use the provided pull down menu N OTI CE Note that you must first select a variable You can add a new variable before entering the related data only if an available row is blank The number of 4 To assign the discrete hardware output that allowed limit alarms is fixed will be set when the alarm is active click in by the GC application the appropriate cell and use the provided pull down menu Output values range from 1 to N per the discrete hardware output identification number and the GC application A discrete Limit Alarms JULY 2010 MON2000 An error message displays when the last available stream or component is reached JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 29 output of O Not used indicates that no output 1s set A discrete output can be used to monitor one or more inputs If you are using discrete outputs to reflect the status of discrete inputs ensure that the output assignments set here coordinate with those set in the Discrete Alarms dialog see Section 5 7 To set discrete outputs see Section 5 12 5 To change the alarm type click the appropriate cell and use the provided pull down menu Type Purpose All use all 4 limits both Low and both High High use only High and High High limits Low use only Low and Low Low limits 6 Input the desi
158. Directory eeseeeseeeeeees 2 27 2 11 3 Dial Up Connection cesses 2 30 2 11 4 Modem Initialization Strings Setup 2 36 Black Box Modem 325 eee 2 37 U S Robotics Sportster ssec caeno ite 2 38 GVC MaxTech 28 8 Kbps Modem 2 40 2 12 2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions 2 41 2 13 Conversion Process eee nee 2 43 2 14 BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION 2 49 2 15 2350A Options eere 2 52 2 15 1 The COMAA Board seen 2 52 2 15 2 2350A Modem Installation ssss 2 55 2 15 3 2350A Ethernet Installation 2 58 2 15 4 Ethernet TCP IP Settings sessssse 2 62 2 15 5 MON20OOO TCP IP Settings sees 2 64 2 16 CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM 2 66 2 16 1 Hardware Setup cccceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeaes 2 66 2 16 2 Select Program Settings sussssse 2 68 2 16 3 Generate PC Config Report 2 70 Installation and Setup JULY 2010 MON2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS iii GETTING STARTED CONTROL FUNCTIONS 2 19 2 19 1 2 19 2 2 19 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 1 4 2 4 3 Downloading an Application 2 72 Upgrading Flash
159. EPORTS MON2000 3 Select the report type stream and update setting from the lists provided N OTI C Table 7 1 Description of Report Display Settings Setting Description The contents of the GC analysis reports are defined by Reports list of pre defined reports Shows report type Analysis Raw Data Calibration v the GC application etc e functions such as l i Calculations User Defined Select Stream list of available streams Limit Alarms and Streams For a single detector GC O Current last stream analyzed For a dual detector GC O Current Det1 last stream analyzed Detector 1 O Current Det2 last stream analyzed Detector 2 Update Method list of update options that determine when the report display is refreshed Anly after each analysis Cal after each calibration Fcal after each final calibration None not updated 4 Click the button or press the F2 key to generate and display the selected report To close this dialog without generating a report click the Cancel button to return to the main window View Report from Live Data JULY 2010 MON2000 REPORTS 7 3 5 MON2000 generates the report per your specifications and displays the results in the File Viewer dialog CalRep2 txt Microsoft HTML Document 4 0 x Date Time Stream 1 04 03 00 11 05 Stream 1 Analyzer 2350 001 Company Daniel Industries COMPONENT NAME C6 47 35 17 PROPANE i BUTANE
160. F 2350 TO 2350A RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS The 2350A GC Controller CPU assembly has been designed to include all digital I O and COM3 and COMA serial ports This eliminates the requirement and additional cost for an I O assembly or DSPI O assembly In addition BOS is now resident in the DiskOnChip instead of an EPROM set The DiskOnChip provides additional expanded memory for archiving data instead of having to purchase a memory expansion board assembly The BOS file in the DiskOnChip may be upgraded in the field through MON2000 Optional boards may be plugged directly into the PC 104 Bus connectors J19 and J20 on the CPU board assembly The COMAA board provides four additional serial ports COM5 through COMS A modem board and or Ethernet board may be also be plugged directly into the PC 104 Bus for additional communications requirements 2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions 2 42 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 The PC 104 Bus is designed to allow any combination of option boards to be installed in any order with the exception of the CSA approved Radicom modem board which must be the top board in the assembly see Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 2850A Controller Card Cage Assembly If you are using the CSA approved Radicom modem ensure that it is the top card in the card cage assembly The connection configuration of the Radicom modem requires installation at the top of the assembly 2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instruction
161. FFLINE EDIT TO UPLOAD APP amp RENAME 1 Use MON2000 to upload from the GC unit to the PC the most current parameters that are in use at the GC Use the File gt Offline Edit gt Upload Application menu to access this function 2 A menu of stored application files appears Double click the desired file Connect to GC and Halt Analysis E 2 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 3 The Save Uploaded GC Application File dialog appears Save Uploaded GC Application File x Save in App al e zr EE laa 2350 001 bin aa 2350iso2 bin laa 2350 002 bin la 2350iso3 bin aa 2350 003 bin ja 2350nw01 bin an 2350 006 bin la 2360 001 bin lan 2350 007 bin fa 2361 001 bin lan 2350iso1 bin File name Save as type BiN Files BIN Yi Cancel Use this dialog to assign a new file name to N OTI C E the GC Application file that is the target for uploading The existing file For clarity you could name this file tha Blende OLD bin to distinguish it from the fie connected GC upgraded application file displays in the File name field Press the ENTER key or click the Save button to continue 4 The Upload Application process begins This process usually takes about 15 minutes to complete MON2000 automatically disconnects from the GC after the Upload Application process has finished 5 Use the File gt Exit menu to close MON2000 Or you can exit MON2000 by pr
162. ING 0 TIME VAR stream data cycl strt tm STREAM NO 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE seqtxt DET NO 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_headerl 1 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0 TABLE 50 TVAR raw_data peak_num STREAM NO 21 TVAR raw_data rt STREAM_NO cs 21 TVAR raw_data area STREAM NO cd DF TVAR raw_data height STREAM_NO K 21 TVAR raw_data detector STREAM NO X 2 TVAR raw_data2 method STREAM NO 21 TVAR raw data3 startint STREAM NO 21 TVAR raw data3 endint STREAM NO 21 TVAR raw data3 half height STREAM NO 21 indicates index is incremented Field List used in Calibration Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING STRING VARIABLE cal_run_num 1 1 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE strms nrun STREAM_NO 1 0 STRING DATE DATE STRING 9 VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM_NO 1 0 STRING VARIABLE stream_data cycl_time STREAM NO 1 0 STRING VARIABL VARIABL STRING VARIABL A STRING TIME STRING VARIABL VAR kri stream data strms stream data stream data anlyzr name STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABLI TABLI Fl TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR TVAR ALARMS seqtxt rpt_headerl rpt header2 cdt cdt cal avgs cal avgs cal avgs cal avgs cal avgs Stream num name run
163. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Data Files Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No File Name No of Records 1 Event Log 240 File Name Event Log No Field Name Type No of Chars 1 date Float 2 time Float 3 operator id Char 4 4 event id Float 5 ASCII text Char 60 6 prev value Float 7 curr value Float KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Name Page Page Left Right Top Bottom Width Length Margin Margin Margin Margin 1 Analysis 150 55 0 0 0 0 2 Raw Data 80 55 1 0 0 0 3 Calibration 80 55 1 0 0 0 4 Final Calib 80 55 1 0 0 0 5 Hourly Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0 6 24 Hour Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0 7 Weekly Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0 8 Monthly Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0 9 Variable Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0 Field List used in Analysis Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 DATE DATE STRING 0 VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM NO 1 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE stream_data cycl_time STREAM NO 1 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE stream_data stream_num STREAM NO T 0 VARIABLE strms name STREAM NO 1 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE stream_data run_mode STREAM NO 1 0 STRING TIME VAR STRING VARIABL A stream_data anlyzr_name STRING VARIABL A VARIABL VARIABL T
164. MON2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs User Manual Applies to Both Daniel Danalyzer On Line Gas Chromatographs Rosemount Analytical Process Gas Chromatographs Part Number 3 9000 522 Revision R JULY 2010 EMERSON Process Ma MON2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs Manual NOTICE DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INC AND ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL COLLECTIVELY SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS IN THIS MANUAL OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL AND IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PRODUCTION LOSS OF PROFITS ETC PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION ONLY AND MAY BE TRADEMARKS REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF THESE COMPANIES THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION ARE PRESENTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY AND WHILE EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THEIR ACCURACY THEY ARE NOT TO BE CONSTRUED AS WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES DESCRIBED HEREIN OR THEIR USE OR APPLICABILITY WE RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR IMPROVE THE DESIGNS OR SPECIFICATIONS OF SUCH PRODUCTS AT ANY TIME SELLER DOES NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION USE OR MAINTENANCE OF ANY PRODUCT RESPON
165. Methyl Alcohol 32 042 0 4764 0 3578 0 3286 766 59 765 09 764 59 764 09 676 44 676 22 676 14 676 06 Methylcyclo C5 84 161 0 313 0 2811 0 2702 3977 04 3972 46 3970 93 3969 44 3705 34 3705 59 3705 86 3706 6 Methylcyclo C6 98 188 0 3808 0 3376 0 3256 4600 64 4602 35 4604 09 4609 34 4292 53 4292 78 4293 06 4293 82 2 Methylhexane 100 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 Methylhexane 100 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m Xylene 106 167 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n Butane 58 1222 0 2069 0 1871 0 1783 2883 82 2879 76 2878 57 2877 4 2658 45 2657 6 2657 45 2657 32 syudesBo1ewosyy sed 104 BILMIJOS QOOZ NOW 6 4 jqe eleq jueuodwoj OLOc AINF Table B 2 ISO Component Data Table Component Molar Sum Sum Sum CVSup CVSup CVSup d CV Inf CVInf er L m Name Mass We duc QUON ou ae oy Cea kJ Mol WO as oe Mol Mol 25 C 20 C 25 C n Decane 142 2817 0 7523 0 645 0 614 6842 69 6834 9 6832 31 6829 77 6346 88 6346 14 6345 85 6345 59 n Heptane 100 2019 0 4123 0 3661 0 3521 4862 87 4857 18 4855 29 4853 43 4502 28 4501 72 4501 49 4501 3 n Hexane 86 1754 0 3286 0 295 0 2846 4203 23 4198 24 4196 58 4194 95 3887 71 3887 21 3887 01 3886 84 n Nonane 128 2551 0 6221 0 5385 0 5148 6182 91 6175 82 6173 46 6171 15 5732 17 5731 49 5731 22 5730 99 n Octane 114 2285 0 5079 0 445 0 4278 5522 4 5516 01 5513 88 5511 8 5116 73 5116 11 5115 87 5115 66 n Pentane 72 1488 0 2864 0 251 0 2345 3542 89 3538 6 3537 17 3535 77 3272 45 3272 3271 83
166. N For normal area or peak height concentration evaluation the determination of a peak s start peak point and end is automatic The manual determination of start and end points is used only for area calculations in the Forced Integration mode Automatic determination of peak onset or start is initiated whenever Integrate Inhibit is turned off Analysis is started in a region of signal quiescence and stability such that the signal level and activity can be considered as baseline values It is important that this be the case because the assumption is made by the 2350A software Peak Detection JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 3 Having initiated a peak search by turning Inhibit off the 2350A Controller performs a point by point examination of the signal slope This is achieved by using a digital slope detection filter which is a combination low pass filter and differentiator The output of this detector is constantly compared to a system constant entered by the operator called Slope Sensitivity A default value of eight is assumed if no entry is made Lower values make peak onset detection more sensitive and higher values make detection less sensitive Higher values 20 to 100 would be appropriate for noisy signals e g high amplifier gain Peak termination is determined by the same application of this detector to the signal but in the reverse sense Onset is defined where the detector output exceeds the ba
167. None None None None None None None None None None None None None 0 ORTU 0 ORTU 0 ORTU None Device ID 1 None Registers F3 Cancel Figure 2 6 Serial Port 4 with COM4A Board Serial Ports L E None None None None None None None None None None None None None None 1 Comm z ID i 19200 8 1 None None 0 ORTU D AW Registers F3 Cancel Figure 2 7 Serial Port 8 with COM4A Board The COM4A Board JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 55 2 15 2 2350A Modem Installation To install the Internal Modem for the 2350A GC Controller follow these steps Refer to P N 3 9000 537 2350A GC Hardware manual for COM settings and pinouts 1 To add a modem at the GC Controller site remove the Controller enclosure s front panel a For the explosion proof Controller the front panel is secured by 16 screws Remove those screws first b Then carefully lower the front panel on its bottom hinges The front panel is heavy so make sure it does not drop and cause damage c For the rack mount Controller the rear of the enclosure is open it allows access for most field wiring procedures without removing the enclosure 2 Locate the GC Controller s Terminal Board for Field Wiring TB The TB is attached to the GC Controller s Card Cage Assembly facing the enclosure s front panel In the rack mount Control
168. OQ TI C E press the F4 key Ensure that you halt any A GRI calculation confirms the GC ongoing analysis runs Controller preamp operation It can be see Section 4 3 before performed after a preamp calibration has Performing a GRI Iculation been completed or as a trouble shooting ixi procedure 8 Click the 1 lt button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 5 10 ANALOG OUTPUTS Application sa Data F6 This function allows you to nr E User Define 5 n alculations a assign variables to Analog Outputs SS Discrete Alarms assign scale ranges Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs calibrate analog outputs for zero and full VEL scale values Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Gontro Serial Ports 5 10 1 Analog Output Dialog Description S To use the Analog Outputs function 1 Usethe Application Analog Outputs menu to access this function Analog Outputs JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 49 MON2000 2 The Analog Outputs dialog appears Analog Outputs Lx Variable C6 47 35 17 OPANE P bz CB 47 25 17 X OPANE n BUTANE NEOPENTANE KPENTANE n PENTANE NITROGEN ETHANE CARBON DIOXIDE ETHANE Bargraph F5 Auto Cal F8 Cancel To edit the settings displayed double click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus
169. Output Analog Output HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH io 00 1 OY Ut PWN IO User Modbus Register List 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 F 4 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set sysalarm_set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set lmtalarm set f 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 Ul Wh pan EO pp B pp p p p p S PS B EG B B B B BD BS HB B B S S S RS S S S JO OS np pp EB E ja BB BB BB B p BS Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog
170. PORTS MON2000 7 1 5 Report Contents This section includes examples of the following reports Analysis Raw Data Calibration 24 Hour Average Weekly Average Hourly Average and Variable Average After each sample report a table describes the contents and identifies which functions affect the data Each report contains the header information including Table 7 2 Contents Guide for Report Headers Content Related Function s Menu Section Date Time standard GC application n a n a Analysis Time Timed Events Table TEV Application gt Timed Events 5 3 F5 Cycle Time TEV Application gt Timed Events 5 3 F5 Stream Report Display Select Stream Reports gt Report Display 7 1 Stream Name Application gt Streams 5 8 Mode standard GC application n a n a Cycle Start Time standard GC application n a n a Analyzer System Analyzer Name Application gt System 5 1 Strm Seq System Stream Sequence Application gt System 5 1 Report Header User Defined Text Strings Application gt User Defined 5 4 3 optional gt Text Strings Report Contents JULY 2010 MON2000 REPORTS 7 9 Analysis Report Date Time 03 24 95 12 24 Analysis Time 225 Cycle Time 240 Stream 3 Stream 3 Mode ANLY Cycle Start Time 12 20 Analyzer AT401STD Strm eq 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Company Daniel Industries Houston TX Component Mol
171. Panel are used so you must ensure that the modem connects at the GC Controller s configured baud rate It may be necessary to enter a modem initialization string The Direct Connect option allows you to connect from the PC to the GC Controller via a serial port per its default settings If you select a modem the modem property dialog appears allowing you to change its attributes To configure the modem and make a connection 1 Use the File gt GC Directory menu and the GC Directory appears Modem Properties F2 OK Cancel Edit the modem properties For the selected GC directory record For Help press F1 2 Click the Station Name data field and click the Modem Properties button or press the F2 button Dial up Connection JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 31 MON2000 3 The Modem Properties dialog appears and the General Data Connection Modem Preferences are activated Conexant D850 56K 9x DF c Modem Connection Pik Ed General Advanced Call preferences Operator assisted manual dial Disconnect a call if idle for more than mins Cancel the call if not connected within 60 secs Data Connection Preferences Port speed i20 Data Protocol Disabled gt Compression Disabled gt Flow control None The General Data default settings are Table 2 1 General Data Connection Preferences Port Speed 1920
172. Poll Command Details button and the Poll Command Registers dialog appears Registers Configuration M Dal tf ie Data Format SIM Register Starting Record n Output File Filename ile Format Model 700 test Comma Delimited csv List of Registers Coils The basic configuration includes the following Modbus Type SIM 2251 or USER MODBUS Data Type Register or Coil Starting Register Coil Number of Registers Coils JULY 2010 Poll Command Registers 9 30 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING a If SIM_2251 is selected and the Starting Register is in the range 701 999 then Record Selection includes the following Record Selection Starting Record n Additional Selections Starting Record number Number of Records n Total Number of Records Most Recent n Records Number of Records n Total Number of Records Location of Last Written Record Since Last Collection Total Number of Records Location of Last Written Record Date Time Format b If USER MODBUS is selected and Data Type is Register then the user must enter a Data Format string to define for each parameter being requested an integer 16 bit or floating point 32 bit value Floating point values use two consecutive registers for storage Poll Command Registers Registers Configuration Modbus Type User_Modbus Output File Regi
173. R AND OR ITS CUSTOMERS EXTEND TO INCLUDE INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES THE TERM CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SHALL INCLUDE BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS LOSS OF USE LOSS OF REVENUE AND COST OF CAPITAL IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Read all instructions prior to installing operating and servicing this product Follow all warnings cautions and instructions marked on and supplied with this product Inspect the equipment packing case and if damage exists notify your local carrier for liability Open the packing list and carefully remove equipment and spare or replacement parts from the case Inspect all equipment for damage and missing parts If items are damaged or missing contact the manufacturer at 1 713 827 6314 for instructions about receiving replacement parts Install equipment as specified per the installation instructions and per applicable local and national codes All connections shall be made to proper electrical and pressure sources Ensure that all equipment doors are closed and protective covers are in place except when maintenance is being performed by qualified persons to prevent personal injury Use of this product for any purpose other than its intended purpose may result in property damage and or serious injury or death Before opening the flameproof enclosure in a flammable atmosphere the electrical circuits must be interrupted Repairs must be performed using only authorized
174. REPORTS MON2000 Table 7 9 Description of Settings for MON2000 Printer Control Continued Setting Description Hours hour interval at report should print Use this setting for intervals less than 24 hours For example use this setting if you wish to print a report every 8 hours Ensure that the Time value is 00 00 to disable the 24 hour setting or 12 00 AM to disable the 12 hour setting Avg average type to be used in the report calculations calculations are dependent on settings in the Averages Calculations dialog see Section 5 5 2 No disabled Hr hourly avg 24 24 hour avg Wk weekly avg Mn monthly avg Var variable avg lt numbe streams to be used for data collection when the report is generated red columns gt Form enable disable manual paper feed feature of printer Feed 7 5 ARCHIVE DATA This function enables you to view print or save various reports and records stored in the GC memory for the Model 500 and Model 700 analyzers You can also reset i e delete the stored records from the GC memory Archive Data JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 21 MON2000 The standard GC application can store up to ninety nine days of analysis runs and calibration records Description 1 P2350_001 P2350 Standard B4avgs 12stim 7 5 1 View Data Model 500 Model 700 Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help Report Display az 123 Q GC Report Request GC Printer Control
175. RIABLE op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc op pres calc op pres calc stream data op pres calc btuact gross btu dry net btu sat net btu act net totl gpmc2 STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI STRI EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO 26 15 27 16 28 IN 29 18 30 44 40 40 52 30 30 45 41 41 46 42 42 53 47 VARIABL VARIABL STRING VARIABL A VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL kri STRING VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL kri VARIABL kri STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL kri STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL STRING STRING VARIABL kri VARIABL kri VARIABL VARIABLI op_pres_cal op_pres_cal stream_data op_pres_cal op_
176. RT RT Dev 7 2 GC REPORT REQUEST Reports Logs Chromatogram This function allows you to send a report to a Emann printer connected to the GC Controller GC Printer Control MORD P DL 1 Use the Reports gt GC Report Request menu ie to access this function 2 The GC Report Request dialog appears Report aee JULY 2010 GC Report Request 7 16 REPORTS 3 Select the report you wish to print The GC Config Report is a snapshot of the PC Config Report Contents include current alarms streams control calculations CDTs TEVs GC serial port settings analog outputs See Appendix A for a sample PC Config Report For reports other than the GC Config a Streams list displays Double click the appropriate stream and the controller sends the report to the printer Click the button Double click the appropriate stream and the print process begins Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 7 3 GC PRINTER CONTROL This function allows you to define schedules for automatic printing of standard GC reports to a printer connected to the GC Controller 1 Use the Reports gt GC Printer Control menu to access this function MON2000 2 Stream 2 3 Stream 3 x 8 Stream 8 Reports Logs Chromatogram Report Display GC Report Request GC Printer Control MONZ2000 Printer Control Archive Data Trend Data GC Printer Control JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 17 MON2000
177. Report Offline Edit GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit GC Directory co Station Name nts 1 2350 60 wITH DEFAULT COMMS PARAMETERS 1 23504 WITH DEFAULT COMMS PARAMETERS la INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 27 2 11 2 Set Up GC Directory This function allows you to set up a directory listing of all GC units MON2000 can control for this application From the GC Directory you can configure the PC serial port communication parameters for a specific GC unit Data entered in the GC Directory is stored in the Gedir dat file GC BIN The Station Name is the user assigned name to a GC location As GC applications are installed MON2000 adds the application name to the GC Directory The GC unit name shown in the GC Status Bar of the MON2000 main window is entered via the System dialog see Section 5 1 To edit the GC directory 1 Use the File gt GC Directory menu to access this function 2 The GC Directory dialog appears Comm ID Comment Alphanumeric field For Help press F1 JULY 2010 Set Up GC Directory 2 28 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 3 Press the F1 key to open the MON2000 Application help file for detailed information about these settings lt amp MON Application Help File Edit Bookmark Options Help Soret dex
178. S 7 1 MON2000 REPORTS NOTICE Veumiustbacurentiy onin The options listed in the Reports menu enable with the desired GC unit to you to display print or store various pre generate a report from the configured GC reports controller See the following sections for more information on specific reports and related functions 7 1 REPORT DISPLAY This function allows you to immediately display print or store preconfigured reports on GC analysis data Data 1s reported either real time from the GC unit or from previously stored files 7 1 1 View Report from Live Data Reports Logs Chromatogram To display a report with live data from the GC unit GC sti GC Printer Control MON2000 Printer Control Archive Data gt Trend Data 1 Use the Reports gt Report Display menu to access this function 2 The Report Display dialog appears per GC type Report Display x Report Display 1 x Report Stream Update Method Report Stream Update Method Detector 1 Stream 1 Cal 1 Stream 1 Cal Detector 2 2 Stream 2 Final Cal 2 Stream 2 Final Cal 3 Stream 3 None 3 Stream 3 None 4 Stream 4 4 Stream 4 5 Stream 5 6 Stream 6 7 Stream 7 Variable Avg Variable Avg 8 Stream 8 File Viewer F3 Start F2 Cancel File Viewer F3 Start F2 Cancel Report Display dialog for Report Display dialog for Model 700 GC 2350A GC Controllers JULY 2010 Report Display 7 2 R
179. SERVICE CONTACT DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES VIA OUR WEBSITE www emersonprocess com daniel This page is intentionally left blank Daniel Measurement and Control Inc Daniel Measurement Services Inc and Rosemount Analytical Inc Divisions of Emerson Process Management reserves the right to make changes to any of its products or services at any time without prior notification in order to improve that product or service and to supply the best product or service possible www emersonprocess com EMERSON Process Management
180. SIBILITY FOR PROPER SELECTION USE AND MAINTENANCE OF ANY SELLER PRODUCT REMAINS SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND END USER DANIEL AND THE DANIEL LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INC ROSEMOUNT AND THE ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL THE EMERSON LOGO IS A TRADEMARK AND SERVICE MARK OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO COPYRIGHT 2010 BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INC HOUSTON TEXAS U S A All rights reserved No part of this work may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical without first receiving the written permission of Daniel Measurement and Control Inc Houston Texas U S A WARRANTY 1 LIMITED WARRANTY Subject to the limitations contained in Section 2 herein and except as otherwise expressly provided herein Daniel Measurement and Control Inc and Rosemount Analytical collectively Seller warrants that the firmware will execute the programming instructions provided by Seller and that the Goods manufactured or Services provided by Seller will be free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and care until the expiration of the applicable warranty period Goods are warranted for twelve 12 months from the date of initial installation or eighteen 18 months from the date of shipment by Seller whichever period expires first Consumables and Services are warranted for a period of 90 days from
181. Switch 1 DI 1 AUTO 2 DI 2 AUTO 3 DT 43 AUTO 4 DI 4 AUTO 5 AUX STRM SEQ AUTO kok kok kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk ck kk Xk ck ckck kCckck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck KkCk ck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck kk k kk ck k ck ck k ck ck k ck k k ck k k kk KK KK Discrete Output Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Label Switch On Time Off Time iL DO 1 AUTO 00 00 00 00 2 DO 2 AUTO 00 00 00 00 3 DO 3 AUTO 00 00 00 00 4 Common_Alarm AUTO 00 00 00 00 5 Calib Maint AUTO 00 00 00 00 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Valve Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Label Switch 1 Valve 1 AUTO 2 Valve 2 AUTO 3 Valve 3 AUTO 4 Valve 4 AUTO 5 Valve 5 AUTO KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Serial Port Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Baud Data Stop Hand RTS RTS Comm Read Port Usage Rate Bits Bits Parity shaking ON OFF Protocol ID Write 1 USER MODBUS 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 0 RW 2 SIM 2251 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 3 RW 3 PC 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 0 RW 4 PC 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 0 RW kok kok kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk ck kk ck k ck ck kk ck kk ck kk ck kk ck kk ck kk ck kk ck kk k ck ck k kk ck kk ck k ck ck k ck k k ck k k kk kk k Global Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Variable name Indices Type of
182. THANE 66 065 60 43 51 95 47 52 0 3581 kok kok kk kk kk kk kk kk kckck kck ck kk ck kk ck k ck ck kk ck kk ck ck ck ck kCk ck kk ck kCck ck kk ck kCk ck kk ck kk k kk ck k ck ck k ck k k ck k k kk kk k Timed Event Table Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Timed Event Tabl fli Analysis Time 225 Cycle Time 240 Sample Valve Y N N NN Valve 2 ON 0 0 Inhibit ON 1 0 0 Valv 3 ON 2 0 Slope Sens 81 3 0 Detector 1 6 Q 4 0 Valv 1 ON 50 Strm Switch 7 0 Peak Width 41 8 0 Valv I OFF 10 0 Valv 2 OFF 23 0 Inhibit OFF 26 0 Inhibit ON 36 0 Valv 3 OFF 42 0 Inhibit OFF 46 0 Inhibit ON 97 0 Peak Width 8 100 0 Inhibit OFF 101 0 Inhibit ON 139 0 Detector 1 140 0 Valv 3 ON 142 0 Peak Width 3 143 0 Inhibit OFF 146 0 Detector 1 5 169 0 Inhibit ON 170 0 Peak Width 8 173 0 Inhibit OFF 174 0 Inhibit ON 223 0 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK User Defined Numeric Report from 2350 001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Name Type Value No entries found kok kok kk kk kk ck ck ck ck kk kk ck kckck kk ck kk ck ck ckck kCckck kk ck ck ck ck kk ck kk ck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck kk k kk ck kk ck k ck ck k ck k k ck k k kk kk k User Defined Selection Report from 2350 001 2350 001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49
183. When assigning analog outputs first check the CGM Analog Output Config field in the System dialog see Section 5 1 An analog output assignment that uses the same analog output number as the CGM setting will produce erratic CGM trace output possibly with incorrect scaling JULY 2010 Analog Output Dialog Description 5 50 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 See the following table for details Table 5 9 Description of Analog Output Settings Setting Description lt Number gt number assigned to Analog Output Number of available analog outputs is dependent upon the GC Controller model If the GC unit includes a Daniel Analog Expansion Module AEM P N 1 0500 001 reserve analog output number 1 first row for the variable Bargraph Variable type of GC analysis data on which to base signal level of analog output Stream stream number assigned to the variable or the channel number if referencing an analog output Component name of component monitored by this output Current Value current readout values of the analog output values reflect scale assignments Zero Scale value used to represent the minimum value 4mA when scaling the analog output value Full Scale value used to represent the maximum value 20mA when scaling the analog output value Fixed Var analog output operation mode Fixed fixed Var variable If the operation mode is fixed the analog ou
184. Windows 95 the version number should be 4 00 950A B or later For Windows 98 or Windowsg 2000 the version number should be 1 or later To use Windowsg XP you need Computer Processor PC with 300 MHz or higher processor clock speed recommended e 233 MHz minimum required single or dual processor system e Intel Pentiumg Celeron V family or AMD K65G AMD Athlon V AMD Duron family or compatible processor recommended Memory 128 MB of RAM or higher recommended 64 MB minimum supported may limit performance and some features Hard Disk Minimum 1 5 GB of available hard disk space For Windows NT4 the version number should be 4 00 1381 or later 16 megabytes MB of RAM 32 MB or higher recommended 5MB of free hard disk space Super VGA monitor with 800x600 resolution free serial port for remote local connection to gas chromatograph for online operations free parallel port for connection to printer Windowsg compatible modem for remote connection only Ethernet connection when using Ethernet networking System Requirements JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 3 MON2000 2 2 INSTALLING MON2000 To install MON2000 do the following If you are upgrading MON2000 you must install the new software with same directory as the current version 1 Either place the MON2000 CD in your CD ROM drive or insert Installation Disk 1 into your floppy drive b vote 2 Lau
185. a currently displayed chromatogram to This function will save a disk live chromatogram at the current point thus 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to Pt the last cgm mn lle select a specific chromatogram li Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Ca E CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm a CGM JE 23504 Stream 1 Det 1 OT a si PM 030301 com Lic 50A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 Cur All Save Crp X 2 Click the Save button Removing a Chromatogram from View JULY 2010 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 9 MON2000 MON2000 displays the Save Chromatogram File window Save Chromatogram File 21x Save in asse O f a cl 022701 cqm File name Po Save as type cam Files cgm Cancel Use the provided directory tree to select the desired file location and name then click the Save button 3 MON2000 saves the specified chromatogram along with its corresponding graph settings 6 5 GRAPH FUNCTIONS Graph Use the Graph buttons to access any of the a omm _en following graph related functions 6 5 1 Editing the Chromatogram Graph Use the Edit Graph function to change the span and interval for the x y axis as well as other display parameters 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Cal Ill CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8
186. able If the selected variable applies to a single component e g Gallons 1000 SCF Liquid Volume Percent or Mole Percent then the Standard Components menu appears JULY 2010 View Live Trend Online Model 700 2350A REPORTS MON2000 3 The Select menu for streams appears Double click the left mouse button on the desired stream to make your selection 2 Stream 2 3 Stream 3 MON2000 displays the Date Range an Selection pop up dialog 6 Stream 6 8 Steams C All Dates Selected Dates Start Date 3 21 2001 End Date 3 21 2001 owes Select All Dates radio button or choose Selected Dates From the pull down menu select the date range for the Trend report Click the selection Or to apply your Click the Cancel button to return to the trend window MON2000 reads data from the online GC unit and plots the current live trend for the selected component and stream Plotting a trend line interrupts the normal storage of ongoing Auto Sequence analysis results A trend line graph generated from the maximum 1200 archived analysis records can require up to 8 minutes to plot Any Auto Sequence analysis that occurs during the plotting will not be retained for future retrieval nor will be included in ongoing calculations View Live Trend Online Model 700 2350A JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 Trend Data REPORTS 7 31 The Trend Data window appears d TRDE Pt Valu
187. all changes Disconnect from the controller using the toolbar icon or by using the File gt Disconnect menu Ethernet TCP IP Settings 2 64 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 15 5 MON2000 TCP IP Settings Fe Connect To configure the Ethernet TCP IP settings for rt the MON2000 PC Confit port Offline Edit gt 1 From the File menu select GC Directory Change Administrator Password 2 Ensure that an Ethernet location has been mum created or an existing location modified and Program settings that an Ethernet card installed in the PC n OR ENT has been selected in the field labeled Update Daniel MON Connection Type Direct Remote likid Exit GC Directory EN x 5 ion te Telephone Direct connect MDP3880 W U PCI Modem 3Com EtherLink PCI 3Com EtherLink PCI Direct connect MDP3880 W U PCI Modem Penril Alliance Y 32bis FAX 14400 bps Daniel Mark Ill Direct Connection 3Com EtherLink PCI Modem Properties F2 Cancel MON2000 TCP IP Settings JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 65 MON2000 3 Enter the same IP Address into the Server Name IP Address field of the GC Directory that was previously entered in the GC Controller see Section 2 11 2 GC Directory t TZ x Station Name Connection Type Direct Remote Telephone Server Name IP Address Direct connect MDP3880 w L PCI Modem 3Com EtherLink PCI 172 16 23 105 3Com Ethe
188. alled on the source computer and an unlicensed version of MON2000 PLUS on the targeted computer 1 On the target computer if using a floppy disk insert it into the disk drive if using a flash drive insert it in to a USB slot Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 7 MON2000 2 Start MON2000 on the target computer The License Configuration screen displays l MON2000 PLUS License Configuration m Program License Help Nt Program not authorized Site Code 1148 7C45 1EAC 2646 50 e Site Key MON2000 PLUS Thank you for your interest in MON2000 PLLIS To obtain a license please click here GC CSCi emersonprocess com Please include the following with your authorization request 1 Your contact information 2 Your Company name 3 Your Site Code 4 Your purchase order no if available Once you receive your Site Key you can eanble MON2000 PLUS by 3 Select Transfer in from another computer from the License menu The JULY 2010 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License r 2 8 4j INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Transfer License In Step 1 of 3 screen displays Transfer License In Step 1 of 3 Transfer In enables you to transfer a license to this program from a licensed copy on another computer For this process you will need 1 floppy disk and access to a licensed copy of this program on another computer Insert a floppy disk into your computer s
189. ams Properties 3Com NIC Diagnostics Adobe Acrobat 3 01 Adobe Acrobat Reader 3 0 Adobe FrameMaker v5 5 Basta Computing Uni i Daniel Ultrasonic Interface Directx Drivers McAfee VirusScan v3 1 0 Retail DEM for Windows 95 Microsoft Chat 2 0 5 Select MON2000 and click the Add Bemove button Uninstalling MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 2 7 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 17 6 Windowsg displays the following confirmation dialog Confirm File Deletion Q Are you sure you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components 7 Click the Yes button to continue Windows deletes the program files only Any files shared by other programs or created by the user are not deleted Click the 1 button to abort and return to the Add Remove Program Properties dialog STARTING MON2000 To start MON2000 after a successful installation Use the Windowsg Start menu Start gt Programs gt MON2000 menu by clicking the iffistat button Double click the MON2000 icon automatically created on your desktop during installation You cannot access the MON2000 functions until you are successfully logged on To start MON2000 directly from the executable file use the directory you specified when installing MON2000 Note that c Program Starting MON2000 2 18 2 8 2 8 1 INSTALLATION AND SETUP Files MON2000 MON2000 is the default setting
190. an be user defined see Section 5 18 4 To view the contents of Numeric registers select the 3 Read Regs function code JULY 2010 MODBUS TEST 10 9 Note that the requested number of registers cannot exceed the amount contained by the selected message block but you can retrieve a partial block You cannot cross a message block boundary Also note that in Standard Modbus mode each register is 16 bits Therefore integers SHORT consist of 1 register while floats FLOAT and long integers LONG consist of 2 registers Type the desired repeat count how many times WinMB will read or set the specified registers before ceasing transmission in the Repeat data box You can repeat the poll from 1 to 9999 times A Repeat value of 1 produces an infinite polling loop that can be terminated by clicking the _ Step button 10 3 1 Use Single Data Type Use this function to assign a data type to a group of registers you will read or edit To poll a group of registers with the same user defined data type 1 2 Follow Steps 1 through 5 in Section 10 3 Click the Use Type to decode registers radio button to choose this option Data Type C Use template to decode registers C Use template to decode logs Use the Data Type pull down menu to assign a data type to the selected registers see Section 10 3 Steps 3 and 4 Use Single Data Type 10 10 MODBUS TEST MON2000 4
191. ance data in the zero and full adjustment columns is updated Otherwise MON2000 displays an error message JULY 2010 Performing an Automated Calibration 5 56 5 11 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS DISCRETE INPUTS Use this function to assign labels to the GC discrete inputs and control their operational modes The number of discrete inputs available depends on the GC application 1 Use the Application gt Discrete Inputs menu to access this function 2 The Discrete Inputs dialog appears Discrete Inputs x Channel Label 1 L Di 1 2 To edit the settings displayed double click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus See the following table for details Table 5 10 Description of Discrete Input Settings Setting Channel Label Description channel number assigned name used to identify the discrete input 12 characters maximum MON2000 Application System Component Data F6 Timed Events F5 User Defined gt Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Switch sets operational mode for this discrete input Auto value is determined by application Off value is set to OFF On value is set to ON Current Value current state of the discrete input Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature control Serial Ports TCP IP Discrete In
192. and displays the message Uploading Segment 1 through segment 15 in the status bar and a progress bar appears Uploading segment 6 monn Once all of the segments are uploaded and the application file app has been saved JULY 2010 Upload Application 2 80 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 prompts you to save the parameters file 5 The Save Parameter File dialog appears Save Parameter File Save in Sin e al e File name 23501501 Save as type Parameter par Yi Cancel Use this dialog to choose the directory location and file name or create your own parameter file name Click the Save button to continue 6 MON2000 saves the parameter data to the selected directory When the upload is complete your connection to the GC unit is automatically terminated 7 You are now viewing the uploaded application file off line You can edit this application by using the MON2000 Application functions see Section 5 for more information Note that the application file name is displayed in the GC status dialog and the File Edit mode is displayed in the main screen titlebar l MON2000 Online Edit GC Device ID 1 Modbus RTU Modem 19200 8 1 N File Application Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help 27 4 st BB tev hl When you have finished editing this file you can download it to the GC Controller see Section 2 17 or save for fut
193. anges Select Program Settings 2 70 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 16 3 Generate PC Config Report NOTICE This function allows you to generate or print out a report of the currently active GC Output data for the PC Config application control settings See Appendix A for Report depends on the GC a sample print out of a PC Config Report Controler and 1ta application To view a PC Config Report already saved to disk see Section 7 1 2 1 Use the File gt PC Config Report menu to Fle Application Reports Logs Chron Connect access this function The PC Config Report eka dialog open pen 2 Click the check boxes see Select column to eaten choose the data you want included in the GC Directory configu ration report pe Administrator Password g etan Program Settings ption m kn sj Print Setup system a ji File Register MON2000 Printer with formfeeds Update MON2000 Printer without formfeeds Recent File Screen Exit IV Use default printer Select AN F2 Clear AN F3 Start Fay Close Check to include in report For Help press F1 Click the Select All F2 button or press the F2 key to select all options Click the Clear All F3 button or press F3 to deselect i e clear all checked options Generate PC Config Report JULY 2010 MON2000 If you want to use the standard Windowse Print dialog to select a printer des
194. ansaction Logging functions select the check box on the Start Auto Sequencing dialog If this option is chosen one or more entries are made to the AutoPollCommsLog txt file each time a command is executed Transaction Log entries include a time stamp and a description of the command being executed If the command results in Modbus messages being exchanged between the PC and the controller the poll message from the PC and the response from the controller are recorded 9 3 3 Auto Sequencing Status During Auto Sequencing a status display is maintained on the screen Auto Sequencing Status E x Polling Control File CAGCABIN AutoPolT est new 5 apc Start Time 2 7 2006 10 05 09 AM r Current Command Eonnect Logon Description Ethemet Check idle polling Next Command Pat Alarms Status Log Ne error s logged Transaction Log JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 39 9 3 4 As each command is processed the following general information is displayed depending on the command being processed the details of the exact data included will vary Polling Control file in use Start time of operation Command being processed Description of command being processed Status of completion of the command level detail appropriate to the individual command Next Command to be processed Status Log Auto Sequencing must b
195. at should be performed from the GC analysis data Calculations are enabled or disabled for each sample stream 1 Use the Application gt Calculations gt Control menu to access this function Calculations 5 22 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 2 The Control Calculations dialog appears Click the check boxes to toggle a calculation NOTICE ON or OFF for a given stream N OTI CE Scroll towards the end of the list to set You can use the arrow metric calculations keys to move from one Stream cell to another and Description 1 _2 3 la jis 6 zis is lult 12 press the space bar to toggle the calculation WE ET a E A a Ea ANN DO DC a WW aa E c n n E ntc tc a WEE NEUE UELLE UL UE UL UL UL UL UL EE ME UE UL UL E UL WW WW WW Ww VW Ww Ww V NE E NE WW WEE MEE EE E E UE UE E E A WWW Ww www uuuwuuuu WW WEE EE EE UE UE EU E EA a ma a D r J Si a a mH uH B a a E ES Before enabling a metric calculation ensure that you also enable the Metric Base Conditions setting in the Systems dialog see Section 5 1 3 Click the button to accept your vonnnnesone H selections and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Control JULY 2010 MON2000 Application System Component Data Timed Events User Defined gt Calculations Control Limit Alarms Averages Discrete Alarms User Defined
196. ata Parameters Logging Mode EEM Time Interval between consecutive logs B a minutes zl Type of logging C Reset Append User Specified Filename ENGEISAVE VuneLog tt cancel Continuous mode records the polled data continuously until the connection is terminated or the Log Data function is disabled see Step 2 Sampling mode records the polled data per the user defined Time Interval e g every 2 minutes Select the desired logging type Append adds this log to the file specified preserving previously logged data Reset deletes the previously logged data and saves only this new log Click the 1 button to apply your selections and return to the main window Go to Step 6 Click the Cancel button to return to the main window without applying your selections Set Log Parameters 10 16 MODBUS TEST 6 The Save As dialog appears Save As BEI Save in amp Daniel Modbus Test Program fa ei j 2 ReadMe t t Save as type Tab Delimited tat Cancel Use the directory tree to specify the desired location and choose a format type Either select an existing file or type the new file name in the File name data field 7 Click the Save button to create this log file apply your selections and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 10 4 2 Save Modbus Data To save the data table in a separate f
197. been determined by the controller or entered by the operator component concentrations are determined for each analysis using the following equations Equation C 4 Response Factor Calculation CONC E CONC Hm ARF HRF where CONC concentration of component n in mole percent AREA area of component n in unknown sample ARF response factor of component n calculated from area of calibration sample Units are area per mole percent Ht peak height of component n in unknown sample HRF response factor of component n calculated from peak height of calibration sample Units are height per mole percent Note that the average concentration of each component will also be calculated when data averaging 1s requested JULY 2010 Conc Analysis with Response Factor C 8 DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 Component concentrations may be input through analog inputs 1 to 4 or may be fixed If a fixed value is used the calibration for that component is the mole percent that will be used for all analyses Equation C 5 Concentration Calculations with Normalization ONC C n x 100 Y CONC i l CONCN where CONCN normalized concentration of component n in percent of total gas concentration CONC non normalized concentration of component n in mole percent CONC non normalized concentration in mole percent from each of the k components to be grou
198. blish communications with the indicated GC controller using the communication method and parameters as indicated in the GC directory entry and logon to the GC Controller After selection of the Connect command the user selects the desired GC controller from a list of the GC directory entries Another Poll Command is Connect No Logon which allows the Auto Sequencing module to execute without logging on to a GC Controller Delay Seconds The Delay Seconds command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to Delay for a specified interval of time prior to proceeding The user enters the time in seconds Delay Hours The Delay Hours command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to Delay for a specified interval of time prior to proceeding The user enters the time in hours Disconnect This command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to terminate communications with the con troller to which it is currently connected No additional user provided information is necessary for this command If this command is executed and no GC Controller is connected then the command 1s ignored End This command marks the end of the polling control file and signals the Auto Sequencing module to stop processing Poll The poll command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to acquire a set of data of a single type from the GC Controller to which it is currently connected The user first selects the data type to be acquired Poll Data Typ
199. cations with the GC unit ectory File Selection Version 11 Press the ESC key or use the Communication gt Exit menu to close the Update BIN program Ensure that you inspect the upgraded application file for any errors E 4 2 Configure GC Connection To configure the GC communications parameters for the Update BIN software Communication Up 1 Use the Communication gt Directory menu Connect to access a list of communication settings for Disconnect election each GC unit F Version Exit 2 The Directory screen displays 3 Use the ARROW keys to select the desired GC unit and then press the F2 key to edit its communications parameters You can also press F3 to edit the modem initialization string JULY 2010 Configure GC Connection E 10 gt UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 4 The Parameters screen displays Director Station Conn Name ID Comments Parameters For DEFAULT PC Communications Port Baudrate Number Data Bits 7 85 Number Stop Bits 1 2 Parit 5 Use the ARROW keys and space bar to select the desired parameter and toggle between its options 6 Press the ENTER key to accept your changes or press the ESC key to cancel E 5 DISCONNECT POWER AND DISASSEMBLE PERSONELL AND EQUIPMENT Failure to follow the instructions below may cause injury to personnel or damage equipment Before you remove the cover from the GC Controller or access its internal electronics
200. change into pull down move the cursor to the last menus when selected Choose your data table cell last row last column and press ENTER from the pull down menu provided Note that a red component name indicates a standard component A black component name indicates that this component has been edited or defined by the user Calibration Analysis Concentration Method 0 03 Area 0 998 Area For more information on the editing functions available see Section 5 2 1 030 Arsa through Section 5 2 4 0 099 Area mm For descriptions of the standard data 3 fo aea 2 481 Area presented in a CDT see Table 5 2 4 x Height 35 Fixed 5 Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window JULY 2010 Component Data 5 8 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Item MON2000 Table 5 2 Description of Standard Parameters in a CDT Function Edit Number component number An index number that acts as an identification label when used in other menus dialogs e g Limit Alarms Analog Outputs Up to 20 components can be defined per data table Component names assigned to the various components V displayed Components can be selected from the standard list by pressing the F2 key see Section 5 2 1 or entered by the user Up to 15 characters can be used for the component name USR STD
201. d Options functions to manipulate the display To zoom in on a particular point click and drag your mouse over that area repeat as necessary Use the Restore State or Zoom Out options from the right click menu see Section 7 6 10 to return to the original display JULY 2010 View Trend from File on Disk 7 34 REPORTS MON2000 7 6 4 Edit Graph Display 1 Click the Edit button The Edit Graph dialog appears X Min m m Display Option Y Min poo Y Max fi 00 0 IV Show labels Print Speed 2 IM Scroll newest X X Intervals o Y Intervals n taa 2 Use the provided attributes and options to change the trend display as desired 3 Click the button to accept your changes and return to the Trend Data dialog Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the Trend Data dialog 4 The trend display changes as specified Additional display options are available by right clicking the display area See Section 7 6 10 for more information 7 6 5 Changing Cursor Size To toggle the cursor size from course movement less accurate to fine movement more accurate click the Gusor button Edit Graph Display JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 35 MON2000 7 6 6 Describe Trend 1 Click the Dese button The Edit Description dialog appears Edit Description EI This is the last CGM saved from 1st shift prior to performing routine maintenance 2 Type the desired statement s 3
202. del 2350A 4 28 2005 2 00 52 PM Loop 1 2 3 4 Mode Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Prop Gain 60 60 60 60 Reset 600 600 600 600 Rate 1 1 i 1 D Filter 5 5 5 5 Setpoint 82 84 40 350 kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxk xkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkxkkkkxkkkkkkxk KKKKK End of Report JULY 2010 Example Report A 62 PC CONFIG REPORT MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank Example Report JULY 2010 APPENDIX B COMPONENT DATA TABLE This appendix provides a sample standard component data table as well as a table of the ISO related components Table B 1 Example Standard Component Data Table Table B 2 ISO Component Data Table All values depend on a base pressure of 14 73 PSIA and a base temperature of 60 F 15 56 C BTU components that are listed in Table B 1 reference GPA Standard 2145 09 The ISO component data table references SO Standard 6976 1995 E NOTE An asterisk denotes components that are assigned temporary I D codes starting with 150 as they are used JULY 2010 B 1 e qe eleq 1ueuoduioj5 OLOc AINF Component Name Acetylene Air Argon Ammonia Benzene Butanes Butene 1 Butenes 1 2 Butadiene 1 3 Butadiene C3 C4 C4 1 C5 C6 47 35 17 C6 50 50 00 C6 Gpa 2261 99 Mol Wt 26 04 28 9625 39 95 17 03 78 11 58 1222 56 11 56 11 54 09 54 09 44 0956 58 1222 56 11 72 1488 95 9558 93 1887 93
203. different string However for some modems you may want to consult the following pages which document initialization strings and modem setups that have been field tested The default initialization string that MON2000 provides is sent to the PC modem first Then the custom initialization string you provide is sent In this manner MON2000 sets the modem parameters that it requires while you can customize the modem s operation to respond to special conditions Once the optimum modem initialization string has been determined it should need no further revision unless a different brand or model of modem is installed Black Box Modem 325 During development of the GC Controller a Black Box Modem 325 was used to test modem communications with the GC unit For that test and that modem the modem initialization was set as follows NNONCONQO where 0 zero JULY 2010 Modem Initialization Strings Setup 2 38 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Interpretation of the AT commands for that particular modem was as follows NO normal mode no error control data is buffered versus direct mode reliable mode or auto reliable mode NCO disable auto reliable buffer versus buffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters NQO disable flow control versus enable XON XOFF flow control enable unilateral CTS flow control or enable bilateral CTS RTS flow control U S Robotics Sportster
204. direct Calibration C 20 DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank Indirect Calibration JULY 2010 MON2000 The 4 20 mA outputs are calibrated similarly except the current is measured instead of the voltage JULY 2010 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A D 1 APPENDIX D ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A D 1 The initial analog output adjustment will be set at the factory before shipment at standard values 4 20 mA or 1 5 V It may be necessary to check and or adjust these values depending on output cabling or impedance The adjustment may require two persons if the units are some distance apart It will require a good digital meter to check the zero and full scale values at the receiving end The scale or span value can be adjusted by a PC with MON2000 software when the values are known at the receiving end It is possible to calibrate the analog outputs using different engineering units Two examples are described below using both volts and percentages CALIBRATING BY VOLTS This example assumes that an analog output channel needs to calibrated to a span of 1 5 V To calibrate an analog output by adjusting the voltage 1 Use the Application gt Analog Outputs menu to access this function 2 The Analog Outputs dialog appears Calibrating by Volts D 2 4 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A MON2000 Analog Outputs x Variable PROPANE hy C 47 35 17 X PROPANE ETHANE Bargra
205. displayed there is no connection GC Status Bar JULY 2010 GETTING STARTED 3 7 MON2000 The GC Status bar consists of Item Description GC GC unit to which MON2000 is currently connected A status flag indicates an active alarm an unacknowledged alarm or the File Edit mode offline editing Det detector monitoring the alarm status of the currently connected GC A GC unit can have up to 2 detectors Mode mode of the Detector Typical modes are Idle Auto Cal Auto Base Auto Anly FCal Stream current stream being analyzed Next next sample stream to be analyzed Anly analysis time Cycle total cycle time seconds selected before starting another analysis Run time seconds elapsed since current cycle began Date Time date and time per PC clock JULY 2010 GC Status Bar 3 8 GETTING STARTED MON2000 3 3 3 View Menu Use the View menu to toggle i e switch ON or mea OFF which main window component you wish EXCIENS to view See Section 3 3 1 for an identification v aesteus and definition of each component 3 3 4 ToolTips To view a ToolTip move the mouse cursor to the Toolbar icon you want identified MON2000 displays the ToolTip for five seconds 3 3 5 Data Entry and Function Features Use the data boxes buttons check boxes and toggles to input data or to choose options and activate features click check box to turn setting ON or OFF use dyna
206. e Date TM 1011 34 12 21 00 03 30 59 View Live Trend Online Model 700 2350A 7 32 REPORTS The corresponding data is dynamically displayed in the provided legend Use the Graph and Trend Options functions to manipulate the display To zoom in on a particular point click and drag your mouse over that area repeat as necessary Use the Restore State or Zoom Out options from the right click menu see Section 7 6 10 to return to the original display 7 6 3 View Trend from File on Disk To view a trend from a file previously saved to disk use the Reports Trend Data menu then click the PC File button to access this function 1 Click the Open button 2 Use the provided directory tree to locate the p desired TRD file and click the button to open Open L2 x Look in CX Save e f A avg molecular weight stream 1 trd a compressibility factor stream 1 trd a mole percent stream 1 air trd File name ava molecular weight stream 1 trd Files of type Trend Files TRD yi Cancel MON2000 Reports Logs Chromatogram Report Display GC Report Request GC Printer Control MON2000 Printer Control Archive Data gt Trend Data View Trend from File on Disk JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 33 MON2000 3 MON2000 displays the trend file 0 0 0 1 The corresponding data is dynamically displayed in the provided legend Use the Graph and Tren
207. e Ethernet card installation TCP IP Subnet and Gateway settings Device ID 1 Application System Component Data Timed Events User Defined F6 FS b Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature control Serial Ports TCPJIP Cancel Selection field For Help press F1 TCP IP Subnet and Gateway Menu JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 95 MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank JULY 2010 TCP IP Subnet and Gateway Menu 5 96 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 TCP IP Subnet and Gateway Menu JULY 2010 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 1 MON2000 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER Use the Chromatogram Viewer to display and print live archived or saved chromatograms from a cgm file on disk The 2350A GC Controller saves the most recent chromatograms for each stream running in the Stream Sequence as well as the chromatogram from the most recent calibration run for each CDT See the following sections for further instructions 6 1 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER FUNCTION To access the Chromatogram Viewer 1 Connect to the GC EEN Control View 2 Use the Chromatogram gt Chromatogram NEED Viewer menu to access this function 3 The Chromatogram Viewer dialog appears Chromatogram Viewer 1 a xj 0 00 0 00 Value Time 100 0
208. e Name cell and type the desired user name Note that the user name is not case sensitive but punctuation e g commas or spaces 1s preserved b Click the appropriate Type cell and use the provided combo box to select the desired security level Note that there should be at least one Super user c Click the appropriate PIN cell and type the desired PIN for this user Note that the PIN 1s limited to 12 numeric characters If no PIN is entered the user can log on to the MON2000 software program or the GC unit via the front panel with the assigned user name that is no password will be required 5 To write user data to the online GC unit a Click the Download Users to GC F2 or press the F2 key b MON2000 writes the data to the GC Controller 6 Click the button to apply your changes and return to the main screen Click the Cancel button to exit and return to the main screen without applying your changes MON2000 Super users can write changes to the GC unit configure MON2000 and access the Users function Regular and Read only users can only view data Configure Users JULY 2010 MON2000 Do not delete any currently used applications from the GC Directory If an entry is inadvertently deleted you may need to reinstall the application software for that GC File Application Reports Logs Chron Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PC Config
209. e Weight LiqVol Gallons BTU BTU Relative Name Percent Percent Percent 1000 SCF Gross Net Density C6 47 35 17 0 0187 0 1076 0 0488 0 0083 0 99 0 92 0 0006 PROPANE 0 4922 1 3011 0 7918 0 1364 12 41 11 42 0 0075 i BUTANE 0 0998 0 3477 0 1906 0 0326 3 25 3 00 0 0020 n BUTANE 0 1017 0 3543 0 1872 0 0321 3 33 3 07 0 0020 NEOPENTANE 0 0493 0 2132 0 1102 0 0189 1 97 1 82 0 0012 i PENTANE 0 0500 0 2162 0 1068 0 0183 2 01 1 85 0 0012 n PENTANE 0 0502 0 2171 0 1062 0 0182 2 02 1 87 0 0013 NITROGEN 0 5624 0 9443 0 3599 0 0616 0 00 0 00 0 0054 ETHANE 97 1656 93 4236 96 1229 16 4696 983 61 885 66 0 5382 CARBON DIOXIDE 0 3987 1 0518 0 3967 0 0679 0 00 0 00 0 0061 ETHANE 1 0114 1 8230 1 5789 0 2706 17 94 16 41 0 0105 TOTALS 100 0000 100 0000 100 0000 0 6649 1027 52 926 02 0 5761 indicates user defined components Compressibility Factor 1 2 14 730 PSIA amp 60 0 DEG F 1 0021 Base Pressures 14 730 15 550 Gross Dry BTU 1029 67 1086 99 Corrected Z Gross SAT BTU LOLL 75 1068 08 Corrected Z Actual Gross BTU 1029 67 1086 99 Corrected Z Net Dry BTU a 927 96 979 62 Corrected Z Net SAT BTU 911 81 962 57 Corrected Z Actual Net BTU 927 96 979 62 Corrected Z Total GPM C2 0 6649 0 7020 Total GPM C3 0 3328 0 3513 Total GPM C4 0 1284 0 1356 Real Relative Density Gas 0 5771 Real Relative Density Lqd 0 3087 WOBBE 1331 89 Gas Density 44 143 1b 1000 cu ft at 14 73 PSIA and 60 Deg F 2 572 4867 46 Liquid Density Reid Vapor Pressure
210. e controller memory for processing Non overlapping groups of N samples are averaged and stored and thus reduce the effective incoming data rate to 40 N samples second For example if N 5 then a total of 40 5 or 6 averaged data samples are stored every second The value for the variable N is determined by the selection of a Peak Width parameter PW The relationship 1s N PW Data Acquisition C 2 DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 where PW is given in seconds All the various details in the analysis process are independent of the value of N Allowable values of N are one to 63 which corresponds to values of PW from 2 to 63 seconds The variable N is known as the integration factor This term is used because N determines how many points are averaged or integrated to form a single value The integration of data upon input before storing serves two purposes First the statistical noise on the input signal is reduced by the square root of N In the case of N 4 a noise reduction of two would be realized Secondly the integration factor controls the bandwidth of the chromatograph signal It is necessary to match the bandwidth of the input signal to that of the analysis algorithms in the 2350A This prevents small short duration perturbations from being recognized as true peaks by the program It is therefore important to choose a Peak Width corresponding to the narrowest peak in a group under consideration C 2 PEAK DETECTIO
211. e software package for operating and monitoring one or more GC systems from a single PC MON2000 includes security features to help prevent unauthorized access to GC data or control MON2000 also includes for trouble shooting purposes an auxiliary program WinMB to selectively poll the GC Modbus registers see Section 10 for more information GC functions that can be initiated or controlled by MON2000 include alarm parameters alarm and event processing analog scale adjustments analyses baseline runs calculation assignments and configurations calibrations component assignments and configurations MON2000 When configured for RS 485 multi drop networking MON2000 can interface with up to 32 GC units either in a stand alone configuration or via a network When configured for Ethernet networking MON2000 can interface with a number of GC Units limited only by the number of available TCP IP addresses Description of Online Help JULY 2010 INTRODUCTION 1 7 MON2000 diagnostics event sequences halt operations Stream assignments and sequences valve activations timing adjustments Reports that can be generated by MON2000 per the GC application 24 Hour Averages Analysis Calibration Final Calibration Hourly Averages Monthly Averages PC Configuration Raw Data Variable Averages Weekly Averages Logs that are maintained by MON2000 Alarm Log Event Log
212. e stopped before other MONZ2000 PLUS menu selections can be chosen Terminate Auto Sequencing at any time by clicking the Abort button on the Auto Sequencing status display screen If this occurs the Auto Sequencing module will close all open output files and return to normal operation of the MON2000 PLUS program Status Log When MON2000 PLUS detects connection or polling errors the error condition 1s logged and a Status Log file is saved as AutoPollStatusLog txt The Status Log field on the Auto Sequencing Status dialog indicates the error condition Status Log 9 40 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank Status Log JULY 2010 MON2000 File Application Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help Offline Edit gt GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 12350A Cove Point 175 APP 22350A socalemb 175 app 3 Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A ModeD v175 APP 4150 Energy Measurement C9 5 min 700 23601501 v184 APP Exit JULY 2010 MODBUS TEST 10 1 MODBUS TEST The Modbus Test Program WinMB enables you to test the operation of the serial port com munications and determine Modbus register and log contents Use this program as an aid to software debugging or for special installations Via WinMB you can troubleshoot
213. eam number 5 15 14 13 12 11 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 O D A high high high high high high high high high high high high 1 high 3058 New data flag Set upon completion of calculations User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 9 MON2000 No 3059 Cal Analysis flag Set 1 if analysis data Set 0 if calculation data 5001 5002 Calibration Cycle time in 1 30ths of 1 second ae kai ga z e FLOATING POINT proposed IEEE KCS Standard Format NOTE The following registers will contain 0 zero values until at least one analysis run has occurred 7001 Mole Yo Component 1 7002 Mole Component 2 7005 7004 Mole Component 4 7005 Mole Component 5 7006 Mole 96 Component H6 7007 Mole Yo Component 7 7008 Mole Component 8 7009 Mole Component 9 7011 Mole 96 Component 11 7012 Mole Yo Component 12 7013 Mole Yo Component 13 7015 Mole Yo Component 15 7016 Mole Yo Component 16 7017 GPM or Weight Yo Component 1 7018 GPM or Weight Component 2 7019 GPM or Weight Component 3 7020 GPM or Weight Yo Component 4 7021 GPM or Weight Component 5 JULY 2010 User Modbus Register List F 10 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 G 3 continued SIM 2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST GPM or Weight
214. ed printer see Section 3 7 JULY 2010 Assign Scale Ranges for User Modbus 10 18 MODBUS TEST MON2000 10 5 TROUBLESHOOTING COMMUNICATION ERRORS The WinMB Communication Error Log is maintained in a circular buffer that holds up to 512 entries WinMB tracks the errors for a given session but does not store them When you exit WinMB all errors are cleared To view any communication errors that occurred during the data transfer from the File gt Modbus Test menu 1 Click the Error button to access the Communication Error Log function The Error dialog appears Description Double click a Description cell to scroll through the displayed text Cancel 2 To view all errors that have occurred in this session click the Update button To delete all entries to date click the Clear button 3 Click the Cancel button to return to the main window Troubleshooting Communication Errors JULY 2010 MODBUS TEST 10 19 MON2000 10 6 USING MODBUS TEST ONLINE HELP Use the WinMB online help file to quickly access reference terminology function descriptions and other related information See the following sections for more information 10 6 1 How to Access To access online help use the File gt Modbus Test menu to display the Modbus Help test dialog then Press F1 on your PC keyboard Or e Click the Help button located on the toolbar The Modbus Test Program Help Index
215. el hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim maxim 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 32 33 34 35 36 10 TE l2 13 14 Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Used 7393 7394 7395 7396 7397 7398 4399 7400 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 7407 7408 7409 7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 7415 7416 7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 7425 avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hi
216. eld Poll Command Alarms JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 15 Alarms Configuration Dutput File Filename File Format Alarms 6 Use the Time Selection pull down list and choose one of the following Start End Time Most Recent Since Last Collected Use the Up and Down arrows and enter the starting date starting time ending date and ending time in the appropriate data fields 7 If Active Alarms or Unacknowledged Alarms 1s selected no additional information is necessary and all of the entries of the selected type are returned From the Output File table enter edit a filename and file format for the Alarms Output file Text tat 9 Click the OK button to apply the selections MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes dialog MON2000 Q Save changes ey Poll Command Alarms 9 16 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 10 Click the Yes button to save the changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window Or Click the changes button to discard your 9 2 11 Poll Command Averages To configure the Averages Command to acquire sets of one or more averages for the most recent averaging period and or the previous averaging period any available in the GC Controller MON2000 PLUS reads all the Averages configuration set up from the Applications gt Calculatioins g
217. elect the Use default printer option JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 71 Use the Output radio buttons to either save the report to disk print the report with or without form feeds or display the report via the report viewer see Section 7 1 The File option will open the Save As dialog with CONFIG TXT as the default file name The Printer with form feeds option will print the report with form feeds to your configured printer see Section 3 7 The Printer without form feeds option will print the report without form feeds to your configured printer see Section 3 7 The Screen option will launch the report viewer see Section 7 1 ME the button or press the F4 key to generate your customized PC Config Report If you are online with the GC Controller a PC Config Report that includes all options can require up to 20 minutes to generate and save Printing a full report can take longer If you press the ESC key MON2000 will stop after the current option is completed A progress bar appears indicating the completion status Generate PC Config Report 2 72 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 17 DOWNLOADING AN APPLICATION This function allows the MON2000 operator to download applications to GC Controllers GC applications with the APP extension can only be down loaded to 2350A GC Controllers and Model 700 units The Download feature is NOT available if the keylock switch is closed At the
218. elect transmission protocol RTU or ASCID Auto Dial set automatic dialing of modems toggle on or off See dial up connection Telephone Number enter complete dialing code up to 35 characters Retries the number of times a failed communication attempt will be retried before it is aborted as a failure 0 to 99 IC multiplier A multiplier applied to the inter character timeout 3 5 character times for RTU protocol 1 to Jon In theory this number could always be set to 1 However when using a modem experience has proven that the character timing can be thrown off significantly resulting in premature termination of the GC controller s responses A value of 5 the default appears to handle areasonable percent of cases but a higher number may be required depending on your operation system modem and or modem drivers The same value should be considered a minimum when running on Windows 95 regardless of the Auto Dial setting It may be necessary to enter a modem initialization string 4 MON2000 is configured with two default directories Default 1 parameters are set for 9600 baud rate 5 Default 2 parameters are set for 19200 baud rate 6 Click the appropriate Com ID cell and type the Modbus communication identification number set by DIP switch positions on the MON2000 Set Up GC Directory JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 29 GC Controller system interface board for
219. embly c cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees E 17 Appendix D Analog Output Cal For 2350A JULY 2010 MON2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS xi APPENDIX F MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC E 9 E 10 E 10 1 E 10 2 E 10 3 F 1 F 1 1 F 1 2 F 2 F 2 1 Connect to GC for Upgraded App E 18 Guide to Standard Application Files E 19 Importance of Standard Application Files E 19 Standard Applications v1 50 and Later E 20 Standard Applications Prior to v1 50 E 22 Introduction SIM 2251 amp User Modbus F 1 Notes on User Modbus eseeeese F 1 Notes on SIM 2251 Modbus sese F 2 User Modbus Register List F 3 SIM 2251 Modbus Register List F 6 JULY 2010 Appendix F Modbus Reg List for 2350A GC xii TABLE OF CONTENTS MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank Appendix F Modbus Reg List for 2350A GC JULY 2010 INTRODUCTION 1 1 MON2000 INTRODUCTION Welcome to the MON2000 User Manual P N 3 9000 522 a user guide that accompanies the MON2000 software produced by Daniel Measurement and Control Inc a Division of Emerson Process Management Use this manual for installing the MON2000 and Modbus Test WinMB software programs getting started checking various gas chromatograph GC application settings and configuring and monitoring your GC syste
220. ement C6 4 min 2350_001 BIN le Energy a Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350 001 v166 BIM la Energy lan Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A 001 APP a Energy lan Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A Mode0 APP a Energy I File name 23508 Cove Point 1 75 APP Files of type BIN Files BIN APP Files APP Cancel Li Using the directory tree select the desired application file Click the button Edit this file by using the MON2000 Application functions see Section 5 for more information File Selection 2 78 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Note that the application file name is cc ml displayed in the GC status dialog and the joues File Edit mode i e Offline Edit is displayed in main screen titlebar li MON2000 Online Edit GC Device ID 1 lt Modbus RTU Mod File Application Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help T ZSG l BBel tev dl kl When you have finished editing this file you can download it to the GC Controller see Section 2 17 or save for future use 2 19 2 Upload Application This function allows you to upload the application from an online GC Controller to a disk file and edit that file When connected to the GC this function allows you to upload the current GC application data from the GC Controller and save to file for future editing When the application upload is complete the connection will be terminated 1 e disconnected Establis
221. end of the download process MON2000 displays the Set GC Time dialog which allows you to accept or change the GC Controller s date and time Only download an application when performing an initial startup downloading a new GC application or after the GC unit has been out of service You must first connect to the GC to use the Download function 1 Use the File gt Download menu to access the Select GC Application File To Download dialog Select GC Application File To Download 2 xl Look in C APP vle img EJ 2350A Cove Point 175 APP A Energy ka 2350A socalemb 175 app ka Energy s Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A 001 APP le Energy a Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A ModeD APP a Energy a Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A ModeO v175 APP ja Energy ka Energy n File name Files of type are Files APP Y Cancel di MON2000 File Application Reports Logs Chron Connect Disconnect Upgrade Flash PC Config Report Offline Edit GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit Downloading an Application JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 73 MON2000 2 Click the desired app file The file name appears in the File name data field GC application files contain all control settings and application program functions
222. er the appropriate alarm text in the Alarm Text column if desired This text will be copied to the appropriate alarm screens if the discrete alarm is triggered 6 Click OK to accept your changes Delayed Discrete Alarms JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 37 7 Select Applications gt User Defined gt Numeric The User Defined Numerics window displays User Defined Numerics Integer field 32768 32767 For Help press F1 8 The following variables apply to the delayed discrete alarm delay alm da Defines which discrete alarm will be activated delay alm di Defines which discrete input will be used to initiate the delayed discrete alarm Although there are five discrete inputs available closing Discrete Input 4 will result in an active Analyzer Failure alarm that will cause the GC to go to idle if Discrete Input 4 remains closed up to the end of the current analysis Discrete Input 5 can be used if the run Aux Seq option in the User Defined Selections window is set to OFF delay time Defines the time in seconds between the moment the discrete input 1s closed and the delayed discrete alarm is activated Range is 0 to 500 seconds Default value is 60 seconds Delayed Discrete Alarms 5 38 5 8 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS STREAMS This function allows you to assign CDTs and TEVs to a particular stream designate a stream for analysis or cal
223. erator may drag the slide bar down to the end of the list then while holding down the Shift key click the last report and MON2000 will automatically select all records in between This also works for any number of records within the list MON2000 Date Range Selection l C Selected Dates Start Date En 03 Y End Date fanaa 7 CE e Default Settings Date Range Selection El C AlDates Selected Dates StatDate snz03 z SS a EndDete 35718703 z Date Range Selection Archive Export Data JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 27 MON2000 The operator may select several records individually by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking the mouse pointer on random selected reports Reports that are several hours apart may be viewed in this manner Or as the example BMP above shows the operator may click a report and drag the mouse pointer down highlighting several reports in sequential order 7 5 3 Reset Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help To delete archived data and reset the GC Report Display YS Q C ll GC Report Request ontroller memory GC Printer Control MON2000 Printer Control Artie Data jew Data 1 Use the Reports gt Archive Data gt Reset rend Data B3 2 W ese menu to access this function 2 MON2000 displays a confirmation dialog MON2000 E xi 1 WARNING Reset will destroy all archive data Continue Click the 3 MON2000 clears the GC
224. ero Scale to 4 and Full Scale to 20 6 Set the Fixed Var parameter to Fixed Set the Fixed Value to 0 0 8 Set Zero Scale Adjustment and the Full Scale Adjustment to 0 0 9 Click the j button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 10 Connect a 250 ohm resistor across the signal at the input of the device where this analog output 1s used Connect a Voltmeter across the resistor and measure the result 11 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and reselect the channel being calibrated 12 Set the Fixed Value to the Full Scale value entered in Step 5 Calibrating by Volts D 4 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A MON2000 13 Click the 1 OK button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 14 Look at the voltmeter again and record the full scale reading NOTICE 15 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and Your voltmeter reading reselect the channel being calibrated should be very close to 16 Change the Zero Scale Adjustment to the in bie jid Zero Scale voltage reading and the Full Son Eheu Va ki i Scale Adjustment to the Full Scale voltage scale accordingly reading 17 Click the button to accept your changes and exit from the Analog Outputs dialog 18 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and reselect the channel being calibrated 19 To quickly verify your changes enter the midpoint of your range e g 3 for the Fixed
225. es Alarms Averages CGM Archive CGM on Alarm Event Log Maintenance Log Registers Reports Condition Start Condition End Repeat The repeat command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to restart processing of the commands in the polling control file at the beginning of the file The repeat command can be specified with a count that specifies the number of times to execute the sequence of commands in the file Without the count or with a count of zero the sequence of commands will be re executed indefinitely until terminated manually by the user Run JULY 2010 The run command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to start execution of a user program The user specifies whether the Auto Sequencing module waits for completion of the user program before processing the poll control file commands or continues immediately thus executing in parallel with the user program This feature allows you to further process the collected data As an example the user program might perform some validity checking on the data reformat it and then and store it in an Access database on the MON2000 PLUS PC Data Collection Configuration 9 6 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 2 1 Create a New Polling Control File To create and configure a new polling control file 1 Use the Data Collection Configura tion New File menu to access this function 2 MON2000 PLUS displays the Configuration ees
226. escription Hours hour interval at report should print Use this setting for intervals less than 24 hours For example use this setting if you wish to print a report every 8 hours Ensure that the Time value is 00 00 to disable the 24 hour setting or 12 00 AM to disable the 12 hour setting This setting only applies to streams enabled i e checked ON for report printing Avg average type to be used in the report calculations calculations are dependent on settings in the Averages Calculations dialog see Section 5 5 2 No disabled Hr hourly avg 24 24 hour avg Wk weekly avg Mn monthly avg Var variable avg lt numbe streams to be used for data collection when the report is generated red column s gt Form enable disable manual paper feed feature of printer Feed Alarm enable disable real time printing of alarms as they occur Logging Event enable disable real time printing of events as they occur Logging 7 4 MON2000 PRINTER CONTROL This function allows you to define schedules for automatic printing of standard GC reports to a printer connected to your PC See Section 3 7 to configure the printer settings The user must be on line connected to the controller using either a serial port direct connection modem or Ethernet card in order to print from the MON2000 printer MON2000 Printer Control JULY 2010 MON2000 Reports Logs Chromatogram lt Report Display GC Report Request GC Printer Control
227. essing the ALT F X keys or click the button on the main window Offline Edit to Upload App amp Rename JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 E 3 E 4 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 3 UPGRADE USER DEFINED APPLICATIONS Follow the installation instructions provided in Section 2 2 to upgrade the MON2000 software and or a standard application file Do not delete any existing MON2000 program or GC application files from the PC hard drive The upgrade process uses information from these files and automatically overwrites any outdated program file Use the Update BIN utility that is installed with the MON2000 software to upgrade a GC application that contains user defined data such as components The Update BIN program allows you to upgrade an application that is either on disk or live at the GC Controller See the following sections for details UPGRADE FROM DISK To upgrade a user defined application file BIN located on your PC hard drive or on a floppy disk It is recommended that you save a copy of your application file before performing the upgrade Upgrade User Defined Applications 7 E 4 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 1 Launch the Update BIN software by either clicking the Astar button and using the Programs gt MON2000 gt Update BIN menu Me double clicking the Update BIN icon on Update BIN your PC desktop upd bin exe 2 The Update BIN software pr
228. eturns you to the Configuration for Data Collection window Or 9 Click the changes button to discard your Poll Command CGM Archive JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 General Configuration List of Commands CGM on Alarm MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 21 9 2 13 Poll Command CGM on Alarm Use the CGM on Alarm command to poll the CGM when an alarm condition is set or cleared Setup continuous polls so that MON2000 PLUS can determine and retrieve the CGM with the alarm condition The data is saved to an output file in CGM format and is stored in the GC SAVE ERRORS folder The file name is based on the Date Time and ends with an a To configure the CGM on Alarm Command 1 From the Configuration for Data Collection window click the 44 button to select another command Time GC Entry CGM on Alarm 2 Next select the Poll command 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Type field then select CGM on Alarm 4 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the CGM on Alarm command No further details are needed 9 2 14 Poll Command Condition Start Use the Condition Start command to start conditional polling To configure the Condition Start command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands table select Poll from the Command column
229. fully logged on the MON2000 main window appears la xl 1 iMON2000 File Applic 4 eports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help b Blt v ibl l pow 7 For Help press F1 Logging On JULY 2010 GETTING STARTED 3 3 MON2000 3 2 LOGGING OFF NOTICE To log off Ensure that you exit the MON2000 program and 1 Disconnect from the GC unit see shut down Windows before Section 2 10 2 didi aki 2 Exit the MON2000 program by using the File gt Exit menu pressing the ESC key clicking the X button 3 3 MON2000 USER INTERFACE Use the following sections to familiarize yourself with the MON2000 user interface JULY 2010 Logging Off 3 4 GETTING STARTED MON2000 3 3 1 Main Window The MON2000 main window typically looks like this menu bar titlebar with connection data aUTESN taxi File Application Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help xaX toolbar view area For Help press F1 GC Status bar MONZ2000 Status bar Use the available menus icons see toolbar area and Section 3 3 4 and function keys see Section 3 4 to access the desired functions FREI Main Window JULY 2010 GETTING STARTED 3 5 MON2000 3 3 2 GC Status Bar The status bar appears across the bottom of the application window To display or hide the status bar click the Status Bar command using the View menu ALT V G Access this menu command from the View menu
230. g requirements for the CPU assembly and DiskOnChip E 8 1 Procedure 1 Install the blank DiskOnChip into socket U1 on the CPU assembly noting the orientation of pin 1 2 Plug the floppy drive cable into J10 on the CPU assembly and plug the board into the card cage 3 Plug the keyboard cable into J1 on the CPU assembly 4 Turn on the power When the video displays on the monitor press the DELETE button to access the CMOS setup window a The Standard CMOS Setup window displays Press the ENTER button b Set time and date by either PAGE UP PAGE DOWN or by entering the appropriate number value After making the desired change press ENTER Set Up and Programming JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 15 c Change Drive C to NONE by pressing PAGE DOWN Verify that Drive A is the only selected drive Press ESCAPE F10 to save changes Y to verify that you want the changes to be made then ENTER The CPU assembly will reboot and displays the Systems Configuration window The speaker on the CPU will chirp and the monitor will prompt ENTER NEW DATE mm dd yy Press ENTER ENTER NEW TIME Press ENTER The A gt prompt is displayed Verify that the programming disk is the current revision specified on the work order package and it insert into the floppy drive Type INSTALL As the DiskOnChip is being programmed the following information is
231. g the system Equation C 1 Response Factor Calculation Area Su Ht Cal no ARF p Cal where 6 area response factor for component n in area per mole percent height response factor for component n area associated with component n in cal ibration gas height associated with component n in mole percent in calibration gas amount of component n in mole percent of calibration gas Analysis Computations C 6 DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 Calculated response factors are stored by the controller for use in the concentration calculations and are printed out in the configuration and calibration reports Equation C 2 Average Response Factor k Y RF RFAVG p where RFAVG area or height average response factor for RF component n area or height response factor for 6 component n from the calibration run number of calibration runs actually used to calculate the response factors The percent deviation of new RF average from old RF average is calculated in the following manner Equation C 3 Percent Deviation ae RFnew RFold deviation ae Rfold 100 where the absolute value of percent deviation for alarm has been previously entered by the operator Conc Analysis with Response Factor JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 7 MON2000 Calc in Mole Percent w o Normalization Once response factors have
232. ges and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window User Defined 5 20 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 4 2 Selection Use this function to edit values for defined selection variables The User Defined Selections dialog defines the names and values for all application specific selection variables 1 Use the Application gt User Defined gt Selection menu to access this function 2 The User Defined Selections dialog appears Application System Component Data Timed Events User Defined MON2000 Numeric Calculations Text Stri Limit Alarms kk A Discrete Alarms Name Option Streams e 2 Enable Analog Inputs 2 coo Er Analog Outputs 37 2 Enable Discrete Inputs L4 Fun Aux Seq TON O Discrete Outputs Valves d Control Serial Ports TCPJTP teen Double click the desired Option cell and use the provided pull down menu to select the new setting 3 Click the J button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 5 4 3 Text Strings Use this function to edit text strings for defined En string variables that may be used in reports Ek ka A P Timed Events The User Defined Text Strings dialog defines User Defined Numeric the symbol name size and assigned text string cus ER e pe
233. h a connection to the GC 2 Use the File gt Offline Edit gt Upload Application menu to access this function File Application Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PC Config Report Offline Edit File Selection Upload Application Upload BOS GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON200D0 Recent File Exit Upload Application JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 79 MON2000 3 The Save Uploaded GC Application File menu appears Save Uploaded GC Application File E 2 x Save in ape gt e ef ea a 23504_Cove_Point_175 APP a Energy laa 2350A socalemb 175 app la Energy ia Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A 001 APP laa Energy at Energy Measurement C6 4 min 23504_ModeO APP le Energy s Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A ModeO v175 APP le iso En a 150 En Hi File name ab 23504 Save as type are Files app M Cancel di Use this dialog to choose the directory and file name or create a special file name for this particular application upload Click the Save button 4 MON2000 displays the message Uploading C GC APP 2350A app in the progress status bar Uploading C GC APP 23504 app HEBER Cancel MON2000 continues with the upload process
234. he number of available ports is hardware specific Serial Ports Configuration JULY 2010 5 72 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 These ports can be configured with the Usage settings to accommodate any one of the following end connection devices The optional internal modem installed on a Model 700 or Model 500 uses COMO only except when a keyboard and display are installed The optional internal modem would then use COMS only For proper communications these parameters which are continuously downloaded to the GC must be identical to the parameters set in the MON2000 GC Directory e PC direct serial line connection to the PC a serial line connection to an external or internal modem or an ethernet connection Report direct serial line connection to a printer User Modbus or SIM 2251 connection to a Data Collection System DCS or a multi drop serial data highway network Specific configurations of these ports may also include settings for serial interface protocols 1 e RS 232 RS 485 or RS 422 These protocols can either be set from the Serial Ports window or they can be configured through jumper settings that are located on the Serial Ports Configuration JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 73 MON2000 CPU board See the appropriate GC hardware manual for instructions and drawings Communications between the GC and a DCS or multi drop serial data highway can be established with Modbus prot
235. he 2 5 amp Slo Blo fuse provided The fuse 1s located in the cable P N 2 3 2350 069 between the power supply and the System Interface Board 14 Ensure that DIP Switches 6 7 and 8 of S1 are all in the OFF position If the 2350A is powered up with S8 in the OFF position 1t will delete the current application commonly called a Cold Start 15 To inspect or change the GC Controller s COM ID setup at the GC Controller site locate the DIP switch as described in the following steps SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller make certain the power supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected Observe all safety precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death JULY 2010 16 For the explosion proof Controller the front panel is secured by 16 screws Remove those screws first Conversion Process T 2 46 yj INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 a Then carefully lower the front panel on its bottom hinges The front panel is heavy so make sure it does not drop and cause damage The DIP switch is located on the lower left side of the front panel see Figure G 2 Figure 2 2 Explosion Proof Controller Dip Switch Conversion Process JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 47 MON2000 17 For rack mount and panel mount Controllers use a flat head screw dri
236. hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim minim avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg 12 13 14 15 16 T3 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 U U U U U U U U sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed No No No No 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 T5 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc
237. hromatogram for the sample stream being analyzed see Section 6 1 F8 View Last GC CGM Displays any chromatogram stored in the GC Controller see Section 6 1 Keyboard Shortcuts JULY 2010 MON2000 3 5 GETTING STARTED 3 11 PROCEDURES GUIDE Use the following table to look up the related manual section and menu and keystroke for a given procedure Table 8 3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure Task or Data Item 24 Hour Average component s measured Section s 5 5 2 Menu Keystroke Application gt Calculations gt Averages alarms related components 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 5 6 Application gt Limit Alarms 5 7 Application gt Discrete Alarms 5 12 Application gt Discrete Outputs alarms stream number s programmed 5 6 Application gt Limit Alarms Analysis Report on off 7 9 Reports gt GC Printer Control 7 4 Reports gt MON2000 Printer Control analysis time 5 3 Application gt Timed Events F5 auto calibration on off 5 8 Application gt Streams Auto Calibration Interval 5 8 Application gt Streams Auto Calibration Start Time 5 8 Application gt Streams autocal time 5 8 Application gt Streams Baseline 5 8 Application gt Streams Baseline Values F2 base pressure used for calculations 5 8 Application gt Streams BTU dry on off 5 5 4 Application gt Calculations gt Control calibration concentration 5 2 Application gt
238. iagrams for designing RS 232 serial cables necessary for your application GC serial ports are found on the GC Controller Terminal Board for field wiring and the connection points for external devices are as follows Table 5 14 Serial Ports on GC Terminal Board Port DB 9 Plug Phoenix Plug 1 COM1 P2 J5 2 COM2 P3 J6 3 COM3 n a J10 4 COM4 n a J11 External modem connections can be made to any of the four serial ports However a possible exception exists for Serial Port 4 the internal modem for the Model 500 with the 2350A Controller if installed uses Serial Port 4 GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 75 MON2000 Phoenix plug bare wire connections are available to all four serial ports Pin outs are identical for all four serial port Phoenix plugs and jacks Each Phoenix plug jack male combination allows bare wire connection and uses 9 pins as illustrated 9 RI 8 CTS 7 RTS 6 DSR 5 GROUND 4 DTR 3 RxD 2 TxD 1 RLSD Figure 5 1 Phoenix Connector Pinout for J5 J6 J10 J11 DB 9 plug connections available for serial ports 1 and 2 only Two of the serial ports as noted in Table 5 14 permit connection to an external modem via a DB 9 plug JULY 2010 GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations 5 76 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Both of the GC Controller DB 9 jacks are female and have identical pin assignments N OTIC E A D
239. ial Approved by Date Customer Approved by Date Drawings Analyzer Flow Sample Conditioning System Interconnect Wiring Outline and Dimensional System Wiring Other Parameter List JULY 2010 LOGS 8 5 MON2000 Table 8 1 Items in Parameter List Continued Type Parameter Analysis Settings Flows in cc min Sample Loop 1 Sample Loop 2 Detector Valve Part Numbers Sample System Sample Valve 1 Flow Rate cc min Sample 1 Pressure PSIG Sample Valve 2 Flow Rate cc min Sample 2 Pressure PSIG SCS Oven Temperature C Solenoid Purge Flow cc min stream Column OD in ID in Length Support Mesh Phase Connected Function 3 To save this data to disk click the Save As PAR F3 button or press the F3 key The Save Parameter File dialog appears Save Parameter File L2 x Save in File name 2350150 Save as type Parameter par Cancel JULY 2010 Parameter List 8 6 8 3 LOGS MON2000 This feature only saves the files in par format Use the Save Parameter File dialog to choose the directory location and file name 4 To open an existing parameter file from disk click the OpenPAR F4 button or press the F4 key Open Parameter File HE Look in a Save yi El c i EE Filename 23501501 par Files of type Psomeetor W Cancel Use the Open Parameter File dialog to choose the desired file 5 Click the button to write your cha
240. ibration or none control automatic calibration parameters such as the total number of runs runs to be averaged starting times and time between automatic calibrations and baseline runs define baseline pressure and temperature conditions that are applicable to calculated GC analysis data such as compressibility MON2000 Application System Component Data Timed Events User Defined F6 FS Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Gontral Serial Ports TCP IP Streams JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 39 MON2000 To use the Streams function 1 Use the Application gt Streams menu to access this function 2 The Streams dialog appears Streams 2 07 00 AM 2 07 00 AM Baseline valles 3 3 To edit the settings displayed click the appropriate cell use the provided pull down menus or to choose the check boxes to enable or disable the automatic calibration and baseline calibration See the following tables for details JULY 2010 Streams 5 40 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 The standard settings include Table 5 4 Description of Standard Stream Settings Std Setting lt Number gt Description number label assigned by MON2000 This number correlates with the stream switch A maximum of 12 streams can be c
241. icantly less bits than ASCII 5 Check the Com ID setting The Com ID is the slave address defined by MON2000 6 Verify that the RW setting is either R or RW 7 Click the 1 button to accept your input and return to the main screen 10 2 3 Set Up Port via WinMB To determine or reset the communications parameters used by WinMB Set Up Port via WinMB 10 6 MODBUS TEST 1 Click the Bort Setup button to access the Port Setup function The Port Setup dialog appears Local Connection Protocol Port ASCII Modbus Baud Rate 9600 C BTU Modbus usos P r Register Mode Parity EVEN C PLCHL Stop Bits fi C PLC LH DANIEL Flow Control r Control Options C RTS CTS Read TimeOut 500 ts None In 2 C RTS Toggle OK Cancel 2 Define the WinMB serial port setup options Table 10 3 Typical WinMB Port Parameters Parameter Typical Setting Port COMI or COM2 Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits Tor 8 Parity Even or None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Control Options Read Timeout 500 ms Try 2 Register Mode Daniel for SIM_2251 PLC LH for User_Modbus PLC LH ASCII Modbus RTU Modbus Protocol 3 Click the button to accept your input and return to the main screen MON2000 The serial port settings displayed are for the serial communication parameters at the PC These settings must match the GC Con
242. icense Help Ni Unlimited license Site Code 6839 8886 30D4 1890 49 Vaide e Validate Site Key MON2000 PLUS Thank you for your interest in MON2000 PLUS To obtain a license please click here GC CSC emersonprocess com Please include the following with your authorization request 1 Your contact information 4 Your purchase order no if available Once you receive your Site Kev you can eanble MON2000 PLUS by 8 Select Transfer out to another computer from the License menu of the Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 11 License Configuration screen The Transfer License Out Step 1 of 2 screen displays Transfer License Out Step 1 of 2 Transfer Out enables you to transfer a license from this program to an unlicensed copy on another computer To begin run the unlicensed copy on the remote computer select Transfer License In and follow the instructions on the screen When you are ready insert the transfer floppy disk into you computer s A drive and press Nest If you are using a drive other than drive A enter its path here fan Browse HN 9 Click Browse to select a disk path to the removeable storage medium that holds the license file Click OK to accept your selection Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License T 2 12 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 10 Click Next The Transfer License Out S
243. ield List used in Hourly Avg Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE anlyzr name 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_headerl 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 0 VARIABLE avg_data number qox 0 VARIABLE avg data label TE 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg data S qo 0 STRING 129 VARIABLE avg data G q 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg archivel avg 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum FE 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum T 0 VARIABLE avg_archive2 TA 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel avg 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum TE 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum TX 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 qe 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg archivel avg I 0 VARIABLE avg archivel minimum TA 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum q 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 1E 0 indicates index is incremented Field List used in 24 Hour Avg Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_headerl 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 0 VARIABLE avg_data number TA 0 VARIABLE avg data label I gt 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_data s T 0 STRING 129 VARIABLE avg data c di 0 STRING g STRING STRING STRING g STRING STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel avg 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum q 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximu
244. ieved and stored To configure the Reports Command 1 From the Configuration for Data Collection window click the ADD button to select another command General Configuration List of Commands GC Entry 1epeat ro PAPE DUE PUN an Command Descriptio o Reporta 2 Next select the Poll command 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Type field then select Reports from the pull down list 4 Press the right arrow on your keyboard or left click the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the Reports command Poll Command Reports JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 33 MON2000 5 Click the Poll Command Details button and the Poll Command Reports dialog box appears Poll Command Reports Bc x Reports Configuration Reports Selection Stream Dutput Type Runs Since Last Collection v 1 i Analysis Single Record Output File Filename File Format ReportLog Comma Delimited csv 6 Use the following selection criteria and then enter appropriate data Reports Selection Additional Selections Start End Time Stream Number 0 indicate all streams Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Most Recent n Days Stream Number 0 indicate all streams Enter number of n Days Runs Since Last Collection Stream Number 0 indicate all streams 7 Regard
245. ile 1 Click the Save button to access the Save Data function The Save Data Displayed dialog appears Save Data Displayed As HE Save in a Data e i HH File name loo tt Save as type rabo elimited txt x Cancel MON2000 You can save log data in any of these formats e txt ASCII tab deliminated e xls Excel e htm HTML Save Modbus Data JULY 2010 MODBUS TEST 10 17 MON2000 2 Use the directory tree to specify the desired N OTI G E location and either select an existing file or type the new file name in the File name You can save log data data field in any of these formats e txt ASCII tab 3 Click the Save button to save this data deliminated and return to the main window e xis Excel e htm HTML Click the Cancel button to return to the main window without saving this data 10 4 3 Assign Scale Ranges for User Modbus This is an optional task that applies to applications using the User Modbus protocol By assigning scale ranges floating point data can be converted to integer values Use the Serial Ports Edit Register List function to assign scale ranges See Section 5 18 4 for detailed instructions See Appendix F for more information regarding GC Modbus registers 10 4 4 Print Modbus Data To print the transmitted data click the Print Data button The standard Windowse print dialog appears MON2000 prints the report to your configur
246. in on X axis NUM Zoom X Out zoom out from X axis NUM f Zoom Y In zoom in on Y axis NUM 4 Zoom Y Out zoom out from Y axis Display Options JULY 2010 LOGS 8 1 MON2000 LOGS The options in the Logs pull down menu allows you to keep a maintenance record keep a parameter record and view the Alarm and Event Logs 8 1 MAINTENANCE LOG Chromatogram Control i Use this function to track maintenance Ja activities performed on a given GC unit Alarms Clear Ack All Active Alarms Event Log To read and edit the Maintenance Log 1 Use the Logs gt Maintenance Log menu to access this function MON2000 retrieves the data from the GC unit 2 The Maintenance Log dialog appears Maintenance Log X E Add Message F4 Edit Message F3 Print F5 Cancel JULY 2010 Maintenance Log 8 2 pi LOGS MON2000 3 To add the log entry text a Click the Add Message F4 button or click the last Log Message cell and press the RETURN key The Maintenance Log message dialog displays Maintenance Log xj Time Log Message This is a maintenance log test Add Message F4 Edit Message F 3 Print F5 DK Cancel b Add text in the appropriate Log Message cell then click the j button to apply the changes Click the Cancel NOTICE button to discard your changes and return to the Main window A Log Message can contain up to 1000 cha
247. including forced calibration using archived chromatograms Start Auto Sequencing Start single stream Halt analysis Start calibration View and set GC time GC applications version 1 7 and above 3 7 CONFIGURING YOUR PRINTER Use this function to configure the settings for the printer connected to your PC This Fann configuration will apply to any print job queued comes from MON2000 Beene Upg 5 PC Config Report The settings available depend on the printer Offine Edt type Refer to the manufacture s user manual SUM for more information Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings 1 Use the File gt Print Setup menu to access this fu nction Register MONZO00 Update MON2000 1 2350A_Cove_Point_175 APP Exit Configuring Your Printer JULY 2010 MON2000 Your configuration will be cleared i e the settings will return to the default values when you exit MON2000 JULY 2010 GETTING STARTED 3 17 2 The Printer Setup dialog appears Print Setup 21x r Printer Name Lexmark Optra 5 1650 Properties Status Default printer Ready Type Lexmark Optra 5 1650 Where LPT1 Comment m Paper Orientation Size Letter 8 x11in yi Portrait Source Tray 1 yi Landscape EN Use the provided data fields radio buttons check and combo boxes to select the desired settings Click the Properties button to configure
248. ing the available GC units Communication uU pdate Config ie ah eer UPDATE BIN USING NEW STANDARD APPLICATION rena Connect c sconnect J33 Ad 2356 66 WITH DEFAULT COMMS PARAMETERS Directory File Selec Version Exit Fi Help ESC Exit Use the ARROW keys to select the appropriate GC and then press ENTER 5 Update BIN attempts to connect to the GC Controller If the attempt fails see Section E 4 2 for information on configuring the communications parameters for Update BIN JULY 2010 Upgrade from GC Controller _E 8 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 6 The File Selection screen displays elect File to be copied for Data to be Merge into Fi Help ESC Exit Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the desired application file from disk This file is the new application file you wish to merge into the existing file see Step 5 7 The Merge screen displays 8 Use the ARROW ENTER keys to select the desired application settings to upgrade Press the SHIFT ENTER keys to select multiple settings Press the F2 key to select all the available settings Press the F3 key to clear your selected settings 9 Press the F4 key to begin the upgrade Upgrade from GC Controller JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 9 MON2000 10 When the upgrade is done use the Connect Communications Disconnect menu to cease communi
249. inutes To configure the Await Command 1 From the General Configuration Commands pull down list select the Await command General Configuration List of Commands Commands ype Time GC Entry 1 04 00 AM fel 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Time field and enter the time 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the Await command in the Command Description field JULY 2010 Await Command 9 10 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 2 4 Connect Logon Command NOTICE The Connect Logon command instructs the EN Auto Sequencing module to establish Hs the communication ee method and parameters as communications with the indicated GC configured in the File gt GC controller using the communication method Directory entry and parameters as indicated in the GC directory entry and logon to the GC Controller After selection of the Connect command the user selects the desired GC controller from a list of the GC directory entries To configure the Connect Logon Command 1 Select Connect Logon from the General Configuration Commands pull down list General Configuration List of Commands IB Connect Logon 2 From the GC Entry list that 1s configured in the File gt GC Directory menu select the desired GC Controller 3 Enter a description for the Connect Logon
250. ired to correctly calculate character timing When you start MON2000 after the parameters are established you can connect to the GC via the File gt Connect menu or by clicking the Connection icon on the MON2000 toolbar JULY 2010 Dial up Connection 2 36 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 11 4 Modem Initialization Strings Setup This section provides examples of modem initialization strings and setups that have been tested and proven operable This string of text characters known as AT commands has special meaning to the PC modem and is used by the modem for every telephone connection made to a selected GC unit To edit or enter a modem initialization string use the if Stat button and use the Control Panel gt Modems gt General gt Properties gt Connection gt Advanced to access the Advanced Modem Connection Settings dialog Enter the modem initialization string in the Extra Settings field Advanced Connection Settings 2 xi A Use error contra 1v Use flow control FE Beau C Hardware RTS CTS rn a FE Us C Software XON XOFF re Modulation type m Extra settings LI Record a log file ce Modem Initialization Strings Setup JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 37 MON2000 By default MON2000 provides a modem initialization string that serves the purpose for most Hayes compatible modems Therefore in most cases you need not enter a
251. is 3 analysis 4 analysis 5 analysis 6 analysis 8 analysis 10 analysis 12 analysis 14 analysis 16 analysis 18 analysis 20 analysis 22 analysis 24 analysis 26 analysis 28 analysis 30 analysis 32 analysis SIM_2251 Modbus Variable Reg Name avg_molwgt 1 1 molpct 1 1 molpct T 2 molpct 1 3 molpct T 4 molpct 1 5 molpct 1 6 molpct 1 7 molpct 1 8 molpct JE 9 molpct 2 9 molpct 3 9 molpct 4 9 molpct 5 9 molpct 5 10 molpct 5 11 molpct 6 11 molpct d ll molpct 8 11 Field Indices Name S C Char Char Integer Integer Integer loa Floa loat Floa Floa Floa Floa Floa Float loat loat loat loat 4 Stream 1 C6 47 35 17 PROPANE i BUTANE NITROGEN METHANE CARBON DIOXIDI KE THANE KE THANE KE THANE KE THANE No No No No No No Override Keylock Boolean Coils 16 Bit Integer 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 301 0 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno Sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim comp
252. is function and return to the Report Display dialog 7 1 2 View Report from File MicroSoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later is required to view a report file in HTML format To open a report file for viewing 1 Use the Reports gt Report Display menu to Reports Logs Chromatogram access this function Rep GC Report Request ki GC Printer Control 2 The Report Display dialog appears MON2000 Printer Control Archive Data If you are working in off line mode the Trend Data Report Display dialog will appear blank Report Display Lx Report Stream Update Method View Report from File JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 5 MON2000 3 Click the _ File Viewer F3 button or press the F3 key to access the File Viewer dialog File Viewer 4 Click the Oen button The Open dialog appears mem De twee N OTI C E 5 Use the provided directory tree to select the desired report file Click the Open By default the Open button dialog displays the 6 MON2000 opens the file and displays it in c GC Save directory the File Viewer dialog Use the scroll bars to see other areas of the report Use the Font button to increase or decrease the font size displayed JULY 2010 View Report from File 7 6 REPORTS MON2000 Use the Back and Forward buttons to browse through multiple report files 7 Click the Close button or press the ESC key to retur
253. iscrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Gontro Serial Ports TCP IP la APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 1 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 1 The options in the Application pull down menu allow you to manipulate or edit the control settings that exist for particular gas chromatograph GC application functions You can edit an application while online with the GC Controller or when using the Offline Edit function see Section 2 19 for information on Offline Edit see Section 2 17 to download an application first SYSTEM Use this function to define or edit the GC stream sequence unit name and system description You can also use this function to activate Metric Base Condition for calculations based on metric units The System dialog also includes a series of non editable fields for reference or trouble shooting See Table 5 1 for a summary of the items provided by the System dialog along with the related functions and editing status 1 Use the Application gt System menu to access this function System 5 2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 2 The System dialog appears x Description Unit In Cube P2350 Standard B4avgs 12strm Comma delimited stream sequence up to 40 entries For Help press F1 Click and edit any value presented in the white cells Note that the Daylight Savings Time option when se
254. it Use the File gt Connect menu to access this function See Section 2 10 1 for more information 2 Use MON2000 to download the newly upgraded GC application to the connected GC Controller a Use the File gt Download menu to access the Download CG Application File dialog Look in C3 App A e Ea EJ 2350A Mode0 174 APF Energy Measurement C6 4 min 2350A_001 APP Filename 23508 Mode0_174 APP Files of type APP Files APP ES b Click the desired bin file The file name appears in the File name data field c Click the button or press the ENTER key to download the selected application file to the connected GC unit A progress bar displays indicating the completion status Connect to GC for Upgraded App JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 19 MON2000 E 10 GUIDE TO STANDARD APPLICATION FILES This section of the appendix lists the various standard application or BIN files that have been released by for the GC Controller E 10 1 Importance of Standard Application Files After a new GC Controller has been loaded with a standard application the standard application is customized by the entry of timed events component table entries and other operator entered information consistent with the performance characteristics of the chromatograph hardware to which the Controller is connected and the needs of the user Thus the standard application becomes a user a
255. it and then click the button 6 To edit the displayed file Use the provided combo boxes to select a different data type The Offset and Size values change to accommodate the data type e Click the Autofeset button to change all template data types to the type last selected 7 To save the displayed file to disk click the Save As button The Select Template Configuration File dialog appears Save Template Configuration File 21 x Save in a Daniel Modbus Test Program fa ei Br Data Save as type Configuration File cfa x Cancel Use Template Mixed Data Types JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 10 4 MODBUS TEST 10 13 Use the directory tree to specify the desired location Either select an existing file or type the new file name e g temp2 cfg in the File name data field Then click the Save button 8 Click the 1 button to apply your selections and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to return to the main window without applying your selections USING MODBUS DATA Use WinMB to poll the GC Controller Modbus registers or registers from another device confirming that data 1s being accurately relayed from the GC Controller to the PC Then as necessary assign data types to the returned data see Section 10 4 3 You can save all settings to file for future reference To launch the WinMB program from MONZ2000 use the File gt Modbus
256. ivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim inim inim 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 T 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed No No No No 7525 7526 7527 7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 7533 7534 7535 7536 7537 7538 7539 7540 7541 7542 7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 7551 7552 1553 7554 7595 7556 7557 avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel inim hivel
257. ks to products and services are also available JULY 2010 Update MON2000 2 22 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 9 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP MON2000 To ensure optimum performance Configure your system security see Section 2 11 1 Verify that you have assigned a password to the super user and or created a secure system Admin account Configure how MON2000 will save your analytic and diagnostic information see Section 2 16 2 Establish communications between MON2000 and the GC unit see Section 2 10 and Section 5 17 2 10 COMMUNICATIONS MON2000 can communicate to the GC unit locally via a serial port cable Ethernet connection or remotely via a modem If performing a remote connection ensure that you have configured the PC modem first To configure the communication and serial port settings for the GC unit see Section 5 17 2 10 1 Connect to the GC Unit 1 Use the File gt Connect menu or click the toolbar icon to access the Select GC for Connect menu x DEFAULT1 2350 60 WITH DEFAULT COMMS PARAMETERS DEFAULT2 23504 WITH DEFAULT COMMS PARAMETERS 2251_Sim Modbus Jean s 235023504 2 Double click the desired GC unit MON2000 File Application Reports Logs Chron PG Gonfig Report Offline Edit GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Checklist f
258. l Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay 1 Pol Maintenance Log 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse Type field and select Maintenance Log from the pull down list 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the Maintenance Log command Poll Command Maintenance Log JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 27 MON2000 4 Click the Poll Command Details button and the Poll Command Maintenance Log dialog box displays Poll Command Maintenance Log 4 x Maintenance Log Configuration 5E og Start Date Start Time End Date End Time n Days Start End Time 12 23 2005 12 00AM 12 29 2005 11 58PM Output File Maintenance Log Comma Delimited csv Cancel 5 From the Maintenance Log Configuration Selection table choose one of the following Maintenance Log Selection Additional Selections Start End Time Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Most Recent n Days Enter number of n Days Since Last Collected No further information is needed No further information 1s needed Entire Log 6 From the Output File table enter edit the filename and file format txt or csv for the Maintenance Log Output file 7 Click the OK button to apply the configuration changes Or JULY
259. l Ports menu to Y access this function mk Alarms Discrete Alarms 2 The Serial Ports dialog displays Streams Analog Inputs beris Sur m Discrete Inputs Serial Ports Discrete Outputs arity m RTS RTS Parity Handshake On Of 19200 8 None None 0 ORTU 18200 8 None None 0 ORTU Even None 0 ASCH 1RW 19200 None None ORTU 19200 None None ORTU 19200 None None ORTU 19200 None None ORTU None None ORTU Device ID 1 Registers F3 Cancel Selection field For Help press F1 Registers JULY 2010 MON2000 LT1 2 EN Heating Value Inf MJ APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 81 3 From the Serial Ports dialog click the Registers F3 button or press the F3 key 4 The Registers dialog appears Registers x mmm Rea Variable BEE Avo Molecular Weight 1 2 12 Avg Molecular Weight 1 Stream 1 22 Avg Molecular Weight 1 Stream 1 33 Gas Density kg m3 3 Stream 3 3 3 Stream 1 36 Heating Value Gross BTU Dry Stream 3 344 Gallons 1000 SCF Stream 3 1 C6 47 3517 0 oooooodoon Edit Scales F2 Scale FS Check F6 Copy S F7 Copy C F8 Cancel Integer field 0 8990 5 View or edit data Double click a given table cell or use one of the edit function buttons described below to make your changes For each default O FloatPt scale assigned reserve 2 Modbus registers for a given variable Scale assignments other than O Fl
260. le percent on off 5 5 Application gt Calculations gt Control Normalization on off 5 5 1 Application gt Calculations gt Control outputs being used 5 6 Application gt Limit Alarms 5 7 Application gt Discrete Alarms 5 10 Application gt Analog Outputs 5 12 Application gt Discrete Outputs Peak Width on time 5 8 Application gt Timed Events F5 Ratio on off 5 5 3 Application gt Calculations gt User Defined Ratio Denominator 5 5 8 Application gt Calculations gt User Defined Ratio stream number s 5 5 3 Application gt Calculations gt User Defined Relative Density on off 5 5 1 Application gt Calculations gt Control Response Factor D a Application gt Component Data F6 Response Factor percent deviation 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 Retention Time percent deviation 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 Rolling Average on off 5 5 2 Application gt Calculations gt Averages JULY 2010 Procedures Guide 3 14 GETTING STARTED MON2000 Table 3 3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure Continued Task or Data Item Section s Menu Keystroke Rolling Average component for 5 5 2 Application gt Calculations gt Averages Rolling Average number of analyses 5 5 3 Application gt Calculations gt Averages Rolling Average stream number s 5 5 2 Application gt Calculations gt Averages Spectrum Gain 5 3 Application gt Timed Events F5 stream number
261. lect Average Min Max or Samples values Averages Configuration SE A Result Grouping By Average Output File Use the Result Grouping pull down list and select By Period or By Average If the number of averages is greater than one then select whether the results are to be grouped by average or grouped by period a When grouped by Average the data from all of the periods of a given average are stored in a single record in the output file with the appropriate time stamp included with the data for each period b When grouped by Period a record for each period contains the values from each of the averages for that period and a single time stamp value is included in the record MON2000 All averages referenced by a single Poll command must be for the same averaging interval e g hourly daily weekly monthly variable Poll Command Averages JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 19 MON2000 6 From the Output File table enter edit the filename and file format txt or csv for the Averages Output file 7 Click the OK button to apply the configuration changes 8 MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes dialog 2 Save changes 9 Click the Yes button to write the changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window Or Click the changes button to discard your 9 2 12 Poll Command CGM Archive Use the CGM
262. ler the TB faces outward toward the rear of the enclosure 3 Loosen the six screws that secure the TB Then unplug the TB from its connections at the back top of the board 4 Lower the TB down and out of the way held in place by its ground straps at the bottom of the board This exposes the Card Cage Assembly 2350A Modem Installation 2 56 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 5 Loosen the four screws that secure the Card Cage Assembly to the chassis Then remove the Card Cage Assembly away from its chassis mount so that it is easy to work on 6 Locate the System Interface and Driver board It is mounted to the top of the Card Cage Assembly a Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on the System Interface Board then disconnect all CPU cables from the System Interface Board b Remove the CPU assembly and install the COM4A Board with associated mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC 104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly If an option board is already plugged into the PC 104 bus on the CPU the modem and mounting hardware will be installed into the PC 104 connector on the option board Figure 2 8 Modem Piggy backed on CPU Board 2350A Modem Installation JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 57 MON2000 c Plug one end of the modem extension cable P N 3 2350 075 into J1 of the modem assembly The in line jack on the remaining end of the modem extension cable attaches to the lower left inside wall of the ca
263. less of the selection criteria method used above choose the order of returned reports in the Output Order with Most Recent First or with Oldest First 8 Next select the Output Type as a Complete Report or an Analysis Single Record JULY 2010 Poll Command Reports 9 34 9 2 20 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 From the Output File table enter edit the filename and file format txt or csv for the Reports Output file 10 Click the OK button to apply the configuration changes Or 11 Click the 1 button to discard your changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window Repeat Command Use the Repeat command to instruct the Auto Sequencing module to restart processing of the commands in the polling control file from the beginning of the file Specify a count for the number of times to execute the sequence of commands in the file Without a specified count or with a count of zero the sequence of commands will be re executed indefinitely until terminated manually by the user To configure the Repeat command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands pull down list select Repeat General Configuration List of Commands GC Entry 2 Enter the number of times to repeat the Auto Sequencing process in the Repeat Count field 3 Enter a description for the Repeat Command in the Command Description field MON2000 Repeat Command JULY 201
264. lication gt Limit Alarms 8 3 Log Alarm Log delete component from component list 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 DELETE delete inhibit integration peak width 5 3 Application gt Timed Events F5 delete output s 5 6 Application Limit Alarms 5 7 Application gt Discrete Alarms 5 10 Application gt Analog Outputs 512 Application gt Discrete Outputs edit numeric value 5 4 1 Application gt User Defined gt Numeric edit select values 5 4 2 Application gt User Defined gt Selection edit text strings 5 4 3 Application gt User Defined gt Text Strings Procedures Guide JULY 2010 MON2000 GETTING STARTED 3 13 Table 3 3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure Continued Task or Data Item Section s Menu Keystroke existing alarm s 8 3 Log gt Alarm Log full scale value for input 5 9 Application gt Analog Inputs GPM liquid equivalent on off 5 5 1 Application gt Calculations gt Control height or area measurement method 5 2 Application gt Component Data F6 High Alarm 5 6 Application gt Limit Alarms Analyzer I D X File GC Directory 5 1 Application gt System inhibit on off times aS Application gt Timed Events F5 input s being used 5 9 Application gt Analog Inputs 5 11 Application gt Discrete Inputs integration on off times 5 3 Application Timed Events F5 Low Alarm 5 6 Application Limit Alarms Mo
265. lick the button to return to the Trend Data dialog 7 6 10 Display Options Right click the graph area to access these options or use the corresponding keystroke s Options are listed in alphabetical order JULY 2010 Display Options 7 38 REPORTS MON2000 Table 7 10 Display Options for Trend Data Keystroke Right Click Option Description CTRL C Copy to clipboard allows you to copy this graph to another application such as MS Word or Excel F8 Cursor to nearest point snap cursor to nearest point in both the X and Y directions CTRL V Paste from clipboard allows you to plot a range of points from another application such as Meshwork or Excel CTRL P Print Plot Area print currently displayed chromatograph area CTRLS Print Series All print all displayed chromatograms HOME Restore State restore last saved display settings for the selected chromatogram CTRL HOME Save State save current display settings for the selected chromatogram F4 Toggle Coarse Fine toggle cursor from coarse less accurate to fine more accurate F9 Toggle Lines Dots toggle graph from line s to dots CTRL F4 Toggle Mouse Position Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse while tooltip displays exact coordinates of the current point CTRL F9 Toggle Nearest Point Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse cursor NUM Zoom In zoom in on entire graph NUM Zoom Out zoom out from entire graph NUM gt Zoom X In zoom
266. ller Can contain up to 12 characters Unit Type Identifies GC unit type i e model number System Description A field to record miscellaneous reference d information to further identify the system Can contain up to 28 characters Chromatogram Buffer Size Provides number of bytes used to store a chromatogram Max Peaks JULY 2010 Provides maximum number of peaks application spe cific System 5 4 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Table 5 1 Description of Items in System Dialog Continued Item Function Edit Number of Valves Identifies number of chromatographic valves application specific Daylight Savings Time Allows the GC Controller to adjust automatically for DST Normal enables automatic DST adjustment United States Override disables automatic DST adjustment CGM Analog Output CGM Baseline Offset Displays chromatogram trace signals for strip chart v generation from Detectors 1 and or 2 trace 1 only Identifies the analog output number If this field is set to 0 then no analog output will produce the CGM signal When assigning a CGM Analog Output also check the Analog Outputs dialog see Section 5 10 A CGM Analog Output setting that uses a previously assigned analog output number will produce erratic CGM trace output possibly with incorrect scaling Do not assign this item analog output number 1 if the connected GC unit supports ba
267. loaded and is currently on or being used by the GC unit When selecting Offline Edit you can choose either File Selection Allows you to edit a GC application file stored on disk Upload Application Allows you to upload the current GC application data from the GC Controller and save to file for future editing Upload BOS Allows you to upload the current BOS e firmware file from the GC Controller to save for future download See the following sections for detailed instructions Offline Edit of GC Application JULY 2010 MON2000 The GC application files APP are normally stored in the GC App directory JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 77 2 19 1 File Selection This function allows you to edit a GC application file stored on disk 1 Use the File gt Offline Edit gt File Selection menu to access this function File Application Reports Logs Chron Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PG Config Report Upload Aj g Upload BOS GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit The Open GC Application File dialog appears Open GC Application File i Ad xl Look in ape yi amp et E3 2350A Cove Point 175 APP a Eneray laa 23504_socalemb_175 app a Energy a Energy Measur
268. low and both high limits Type Purpose Low Low If the variable value falls below this limit the low low limit alarm 1s acti vated This alarm is for extreme situa tions Low If the variable value falls below this limit the low limit alarm is activated High If the variable value rises above this limit the high limit alarm is activated High High If the variable value rises above this limit the high high limit alarm is acti vated This alarm is for extreme situa tions 5 7 DISCRETE ALARMS Application System Use this function to assign discrete hardware Component Data F6 Timed Events F5 inputs used to set alarms to one of the User Defined gt d available discrete hardware outputs Calculations gt Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms 2 For more information on discrete outputs see Streams Analog Inputs Section 5 12 Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs aou 1 Use the Application gt Discrete Alarms menu enp to access this function Temperature Gontro Serial Ports TCP IP JULY 2010 Discrete Alarms 5 32 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 2 The Discrete Alarms dialog appears Discrete Input Discrete Output Alarm Text IIO Not used 0 Not used 2 O Not used 0 Not used EO Not used 0 Not used EM 0 Not used 0 Not used EE D Not used 0 Not used Cancel Selection field 3 Use the provided Discrete Input pull down
269. ls the Auto Sequencing module to stop processing 1 From the Configuration for Data Collection window click the Add button to select another command 2 Use the Command pull down list and select End General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay ai us men 3 Enter a description for the End Command in the Command Description field JULY 2010 Disconnect Command 9 14 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 2 10 Poll Command Alarms NOTICE To configure the Alarms Command from the Configuration for Data Collection window Pach Pol Command includes the criteria to define acquisition and storage of a 1 Select POLL from the General Configuration single type of data Commands pull down list General Configuration List of Commands GC Entry 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Type field and select Alarms from the pull down list 3 In the Command Description field enter a description for the Alarms command 4 Click the Pall Command Details button The Poll Command Alarms dialog box displays Poll Command Alarms E x Alarms Configuration Starting Ending Time Time Output File Filename e Format alarms Text txb 5 To select Alarm Log click the Alarm Log check box RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Time Selection fi
270. lue 3 Click the current state of the valve button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Valves JULY 2010 MON2000 Application Reports System Component Data Timed Events User Defined Logs Chr F6 FS b Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms JULY 2010 Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Control Serial Ports TCP IP APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 61 TEMPERATURE CONTROL Use the Temperature Control function for monitoring the Temperature of the Oven Detector s and Columns and the Stream Switching block to determine when the Model 700 is thermally stable The bottom row labeled Temperature C displays the current temperatures The settings and values are shown in the following figure and table The settings and values are preset at the factory and are based on the specific customer application These values should not be changed unless recommended by Daniel Customer Service Personnel or it is a factory application requirement 1 Use the Application gt Temperature Control menu to access this function 2 The Temperature Control dialog displays Selection field For Help press F1 Temperature Control 5 62 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 3 Use the pull d
271. ly memory ROM 8 UP off Disable AT command set recognition V DOWN on Enable AT command set recognition JULY 2010 Modem Initialization Strings Setup 2 40 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 GVC MaxTech 28 8 Kbps Modem The following setup for GVC 28 8 Kbps external Voice Data FAX modems was verified at Daniel Canada At the GC Controller To make these settings for the modem at the GC Controller you will need to use a terminal program such as ProComm o other commercial modem software to input the AT commands to the modem before connecting it to the GC Controller AT amp F5 Factory default with v 42bis flow control disabled must be first ATB8 9600 baud Or ATB11 19200 baud AT amp DO Modem ignores DTR not necessary if using a cable that incorporates the DTR signal from the Controller ATMO Turn OFF speaker ATSO n n is number of rings for auto answer e g ATS0 1 ATS02 2 etc AT amp CO Force carrier detect high AT CO Turn OFF compression If compression is turned ON with AT C1 or OFF with AT CO then the modem at other end should match AT amp WO Write to stored profile 0 zero AT amp YO Use stored profile 0 zero when turned on Modem Initialization Strings Setup JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 41 At the PC use amp F596C1MO which indicates a factory default with v 42bis flow control disabled compression ON speaker OF
272. m 1 1 DESCRIPTION OF MANUAL See the following section summaries or the Table of Contents for more information Section 1 Introduction This section includes summary listing of the manual sections description of the MON2000 User Guide online help file description of the MON2000 software program JULY 2010 Description of Manual 1 2 INTRODUCTION MON2000 Section 2 Installation and Startup This section includes short description of the MON2000 software minimum system requirements for installing MON2000 on a 32 bit Microsoft Windowse platform installation and Startup instructions establishing communications and Logon procedures instructions for customizing MON2000 and setting up security instructions for downloading an application and using the Offline Edit function to change an application s configuration Section 3 Getting Started This section includes instructions on how to log on and log off navigation instructions for MON2000 listing of available procedures and keyboard shortcuts access and navigation instructions for the MON2000 User Guide online help file Section 4 Control Functions This section includes description of available Control functions and detailed step procedures Description of Manual JULY 2010 INTRODUCTION 1 3 MON2000 Section 5 Application Functions This section includes description of available GC Application functi
273. m T 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 TA 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg archivel avg 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel maximum TX 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 TX 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg archivel avg Jezi 0 VARIABLE avg archivel minimum TA 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum TA 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 qo 0 indicates index is incremented Field List used in Weekly Avg Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE anlyzr name 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_headerl 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_header2 L 0 VARIABLE avg_data number TA 0 VARIABLE avg data label T 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg data S TX 0 STRING 129 VARIABLE avg_data G Tx 0 STRING Q STRING STRING STRING 9 STRING 0 STRING STRING 2 VARIABLE avg archivel avg It 0 VARIABLE avg archivel minimum qu 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum qu 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 JA 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel avg ex 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum PA 0 VARIABLE avg archivel maximum TA 0 VARIABLE avg archive2 A eas 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel avg 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel minimum 1 0 VARIABLE avg_archivel maximum T gt 0 VARIABLE avg_archive2 T 0 indicates index is incremented Field List used in Monthly Avg Type Variable SubField Name CP Flag STRING 0 STRING 0 VARIABLE anlyzr name 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_headerl 1 0 VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 0 VARIABL VARIABL STRING VARIABL kri
274. mic pull down type input menus to select option in data fields R Unacknowledged alarms only Display Option Alarm log Active alarms Name mm 2 1 24 3 A 24 24 24 click radio button to select option scroll to access additional settings click push buttons to activate features View Menu JULY 2010 MON2000 5 0 or later is required to n 3 3 6 NOTICE Microsoft Internet Explorer view a spreadsheet file saved in HTML format 3 4 GETTING STARTED 3 9 Shortcut to Save or Print Data From any active dialog right click the displayed data to access this menu Choose the Save Sheet option to save data to disk or the Print Sheet option to queue data to your PC printer MON2000 prints the report to your configured printer see Section 3 7 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS MON2000 supports keystrokes as well as a standard PC mouse interface Use a mouse to perform point and click operations Refer to the following table for common keyboard shortcuts See Table 3 2 for function keys that can be used after an application has been downloaded to the GC Controller Table 3 1 Frequently Used Keystrokes Keystroke Action ARROW Move cursor keys left or right in a data field up or down in a menu or combo box up or down column left or right row through displayed data entries DELETE Delete the character after cursor Delete selected rows from a table or return
275. more advanced settings Refer to the printer operator manual for more information Click the printer button to queue the Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Configuring Your Printer 3 18 3 8 GETTING STARTED MON2000 USING ONLINE HELP Currently the online help feature contains all user information and instructions for each MON2000 function as well as the MON2000 system To access the MON2000 Application Help file Press the F1 key at any time to view help topics that discuss the currently active dialog or function Use the Help gt Help Topics menu to view m the help contents dialog About MON2000 Use the scroll bars and arrows to display more of a topic You can also resize and or move the topic dialog for better viewing convenience When applicable a topic will contain links to other related topics notes and helpful popups Use these links as you need Using Online Help JULY 2010 GETTING STARTED 3 19 MON2000 3 9 OPERATING MODES FOR MODEL 700 The Model 700 GC supports four different operating modes Each mode allows the GC to analyze data from a given number of detectors streams and methods See Table 3 4 for more information Table 8 4 Operating Modes for Model 700 Mode ID Detectors Streams Methods Number Supported Supported Supported 0 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 10 ABOUT MON2000 BH To verify informa
276. n 0 and 6 5 17 SERIAL PORTS Use this function to configure and manipulate the serial port communication parameters the GC Controller uses to connect with MON2000 1 Use the Application gt Serial Ports menu to access this function 2 The Serial Ports dialog appears Serial Ports None None a None Noe Oo 0 None None None None None None None None None None Device ID 1 Registers F3 Cancel Selection field For Help press F1 The Mode column applies only to the following CPU boards e 2350A CPU board P N 2 3 2350 190 e Model 700 CPU board P N 2 3 0700 036 MON2000 Application System Component Data F6 Timed Events PS User Defined Calculations gt Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Tempera Serial Ports JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 69 MON2000 To edit the settings displayed double click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus For proper communications these parameters which are continuously downloaded to the GC must be identical to the parameters set in the MON2000 GC Directory See the following table and individual sections for details Table 5 13 Description of Serial Port Settings Setting Description Port Serial port number for GC Controller The Model 700 and Model 500 with 2350A Controller with the PC 10
277. n Stream Nee Type Name Description ne Sequence BIN file yP p Averages a 2350_001 2350 USASTD1 2350 Standard 1 64 8 64 avgs 2350_002 2350 USASTD2 2350 Standard 2 32 8 32 avgs 2350_003 2350 USASTD3 2350 Standard 3 128 5 128 avgs 2350_006 2350 USASTD6 2350 Std 6 32 32 10 avgs 10 strs 2350_007 2350 USASTD7 2350 7 12Str 128 128 12 Avg 260Mbus 2350ISO1 2350 ISOSTD1 2350 ISO Std 1 64 8 64 aves 23501SO2 2350 ISOSTD2 2350 ISO Std 2 32 8 32 avgs 2350ISO3 2350 ISOSTD3 2350 ISO Std 3 128 8 128 avgs 2350FI02 2350 USSTDFILEO2 12 stream with 204 12 files 2360 001 2360 USADUALI 2360 test applica 64 8 tion 2350EXMB 2350 USSTDFILEO1 Extended Modbus 150 5 4 strm plus cal 2360ISO1 2360 ISODUALSTD1 2360 ISO Std 1 64 8 64 avgs e Standard BTU applications use the BIN files 2350 001 2350 002 and 2350 003 for 64 32 and 128 averages respectively The Extended Modbus application uses BIN file 2350EXMB The standard dual application uses BIN file 2360 001 JULY 2010 Standard Applications v1 50 and Later E 22 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 E 10 3 Standard Applications Prior to v1 50 For versions of GC Applications prior to version 1 50 the CFG Base Name variable did not exist Therefore a combination of other variables must be inspected to determine the standard application that was used to formulate the current user application To determine the standard application used to create a user
278. n to the Report Display dialog 7 1 3 Print Report To print a report The refresh function displays a newly generated report and deletes the currently displayed report see Section 7 1 1 for details You should print or save the current report immediately after it is displayed 1 Display a live report or open a report file from disk See Section 7 1 1 or Section 7 1 2 for details 2 Click the Print button 3 MON2000 prints the report to your configured printer see Section 3 7 7 1 4 Save Report to Disk To save a report to disk 1 Display a live report or open a report file from disk See Section 7 1 1 or Section 7 1 2 for details Print Report JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 7 MON2000 2 Click the Save button The Save HTML Document dialog appears MicroSoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later is required to view a report file in HTML format Save HTML Document 27 x Save in Ed save J Aj e EJ Ed CalRepl tst Config t t File name can ep2 t d Save as type Text File txt Cancel Language westem Alphabet Yi 3 Select the directory in which you want to save this report and type the desired name You can save the report in any of these formats txt ASCII Tab delimited cvs Comma deliminted Xis Excel htm HTML xml EXtensible Markup Language Note that the default location is c NGCNSave 4 Click the Save button JULY 2010 Save Report to Disk 7 8 RE
279. nalysis b Ideal Relative Density Equation C 8 Ideal Relative Density of Total Gas Sample Y CONC RD TOTALRD 100 where RD relative Density of component n TOTAL RD relative Density of total gas sample CONCN P 100 are defined in 1 preceding c Real corrected Relative Density The ideal gas relative density DI is corrected to the real gas relative Density Dr by dividing by the com pressibility factor Z for gas mixture at 60 F and one atmosphere pressure and multiplying by the compressibility factor of air at the same conditions Equation C 9 Real Gas Relative Density E DijZ air Z gas Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 11 MON2000 where Di ideal gas relative density Z air compressibility factor of air or 0 99959 gas compressibility factor of gas mixture d Compressibility Factor Dry BTU Compressibility uses calculations from AGA Report No 8 1992 errata 1993 Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas and other related Hydro Carbon Gases Equation C 10 Corrected Dry BTU Value DRYBTU CORRDRYBTU Z where DRYBTU value from Equation C 7 Z compressibility factor see Equation C 9 BASE PRS _ base contract pressure specified defaults to 14 73 PSIA e Corrected Saturated BTU Equation C 11 Corrected Saturated BTU Value of Total Gas DRYBTU 0 9826 CORRSATBTU Z JULY 2010 Heating Value Calculations C 12 DAT
280. nch Windowsa Explorerg by either a Clicking the AA Star button see the a os taskbar to access the Programs menu C Documents option a ou Double clicking the Windowsg Explorerg Ale icon on your desktop Hel i 3 Access either your CD ROM drive or floppy mad drive amp ee 4 Double click the file setup exe hij Suspend di S 5 The Installation Wizard begins Follow the Dp Al instructions provided on each screen MON2000 Upon successful installation Windows automatically creates a MON2000 icon on your desktop JULY 2010 Installing MON2000 2 4 2 3 2 4 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 INSTALLING THE CRYPKEY LICENSE SERVICE FOR MON2000 PLUS The CrypKey License Service must be installed on all NT based systems If you try to run MON2000 PLUS before installing the CrypKey License Service an error will result Initialization Error There is a problem with the CrypKey License Service Please verify that it is installed and running To install the CrypKey License Service do the following 1 After installing MON2000 PLUS the program folder should display automatically if it doesn t open Windowsg Explorerg and access the MON2000 PLUS program folder 2 Double click the SETUPEX EXE file MON2000 PLUS can now be started You have 30 days to evaluate the application Once the trial period expires you must obtain a license to continue to use MON2000 PLUS for more inf
281. nd column General Configuration List of Commands E Commands Type Time GC Entry MM Pol Condition End 2 Select Condition End from the pull down list in the Type column 3 Enter a description in the Command Description column JULY 2010 Poll Command Condition End 9 24 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 2 16 Poll Command Event Log 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands use the Commands pull down list and select the POLL command General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay Pose Command Description I Poll Event Log 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse Type field and select Event LOG from the pull down list 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or LEFT CLICK the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the Event Log command 4 Click the Poll Command Details button and the Poll Command Event Log dialog box displays Poll Command Event Log ES x Event Log Configuration Event Log Selection Start Date Start Time End Date End Time n Days Entire Log w Output File Filename File Format New Data File Comma Delimited csv 5 From the Event Log Selection pull down list choose one of the following Event Log Additional Selections Selection Start End Time Start Date Start Time Poll Command Event L
282. ne m Xylene 106 17 0 326 3 6655 0 8687 1 243 0 3871 5219 9 4967 8 n Octane n Butane 58 1222 51 567 2 0068 0 5842 4 8706 0 815183 3269 85 3017 97 n Butane 04 n Decane 142 2817 0 06148 4 9126 0 73458 6 1244 0 613636 7760 81 7206 63 n Decane n Heptane 100 2019 1 619 3 4597 0 68823 5 7379 0 461258 5515 33 5111 8 n Heptane 45 SYABI60 EWOJYJ Sed 104 a4eM1L0S QOOZ NOW t g OLOC An oe qe eleq jueuodwo9 Table B 1 Example Standard Component Data Table Continued Component Mol Reid RelDens Rel Dens GPM GrossDry Net Dry AGA 8 Nico Name Wt Vapor Gas Liquid Lb Gal Factor BTU BTU Component I D No n Hexane 86 1754 4 961 2 9754 0 66406 5 5364 0 411121 4766 9 4414 19 n Hexane 39 n Nonane 128 2551 0 1809 4 4283 0 72224 6 0215 0 562592 7012 49 6508 02 n Nonane 38 n Octane 114 2285 0 5349 3 944 0 70655 5 8907 0 512168 6263 46 5809 41 n Octane 20 n Pentane 72 1488 15 576 2 4911 0 63071 5 2584 0 362396 4017 97 8715 58 n Pentane 06 Neohexane 86 18 9 856 2 9753 0 654 5 453 0 4175 4747 2 4394 1 n Hexane Neopentane 72 15 35 9 2 4911 0 5967 4 975 0 383 3993 9 3691 4 i Pentane 07 Nitrogen 28 0134 0 0 9672 0 80687 6 7271 0 10999 0 0 Nitrogen 14 NO2 46 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 19 NO 30 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None N20 44 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 18 o Xylene 106 2 0 264 3 6655 0 8848 7 377 0 3801 5222 4969 7 n Octane Oxygen 31 9988 0 1 1048 1 1423 9 5238 0 088739 0 0 Oxygen 16 1 Pentene 70 14 19 115 2 421
283. ned some registers can be user defined predefined Boolean coils user defined Numeric registers data types are predefined for registers 1000 to 9000 variables assigned to registers can be listed in the PC Config Report for instructions see Section 2 16 3 for an example report see Appendix A See Appendix F for more detail about individual registers data types are user defined variables assigned to registers can be listed in the PC Config Report for instructions see Section 2 16 3 for example report see Appendix A When using WinMB set Register Mode to DANIEL to view register contents When using WinMB set Register Mode to PLC LH or PLC HL to view register contents It is not necessary to assign scales to regis ters JULY 2010 It may be necessary to assign scales to regis ters to convert floating point values to whole integer representations Comparison of Modbus Protocols 10 4 MODBUS TEST MON2000 10 2 2 Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000 Set the communication parameters for the GC Controller serial port to which your PC or other device is connected To determine or reset the communications parameters at the GC Controller 1 Use the Application gt Serial Ports menu to access the Serial Ports function The Serial Ports dialog appears Serial Ports Eg Jal a op n ie Ge Handshake on og 0 None None ORTU None None 0 0 RTU None None 0
284. ng window 1 Select Valve Timing from the Control menu The Start Valve Timing Run dialog appears 2 Ifthe Auto BTU Start Up checkbox is selected uncheck it The valve timing feature is now enabled Start Valve Timing Run Stream 2 Calibration Purge stream for 60 seconds Auto BTU Start Up CDT Component Valve 2 7 nPENTANE 3 11 ETHANE QO Notused 3 MON2000 displays in the Stream field the calibration stream s to be used for the valve timing run 4 To allow sample gas to flow through the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to beginning the first analysis click the Purge stream for 60 seconds check box Starting a Valve Timing Run JULY 2010 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 13 MON2000 5 Youcan enter a valve number in the Valve field and select the component number from the drop down list of the CDT Component field in the table below the checkboxes The list of components are from the CDT of the corresponding calibration stream 6 Click the button to accept your selections and to continue Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 7 The Valve Timing run begins If no change was made to a valve s timing the following message will be posted in the Alarm Log Valve Timing N Failure where N is the ID number for the valve See Section 8 3 for detailed instructions on reading Alarm Logs If all valves are successfully optimized no messages will be rec
285. nges to the GC unit Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window ALARM LOG Use this function to read and or clear the Chromatagram Control 4 various entries in the Alarm Log The Alarm pee Log is a circular buffer that contains 50 entries EZENN Clear Ack All Active Alarms Event Log To clear or acknowledge all active alarms see Section 8 4 Alarm Log JULY 2010 LOGS 8 7 MON2000 To view the Alarm Log 1 Use the Logs gt Alarm Log menu to access this function MON2000 retrieves the last 50 alarms from the GC unit 2 The Alarm Log dialog appears m te Date Time E Display Option Alarm log Unacknowledged alarms only Active alarms ClearfAck All F4 Cancel Table 8 2 Alarm Log Attributes Attribute Description lt acknowledgement gt indicates whether the alarm has been acknowledge U unacknowledged status unknown State indicates whether the alarm is currently active SET currently active CLEAR inactive Date Time date and time the alarm condition began JULY 2010 Alarm Log 8 8 pi LOGS MON2000 Table 8 2 Alarm Log Attributes Continued Attribute Description Alarm Message 1 describes the alarm condition If an alarm message is changed see Section 5 6 and Section 5 7 all affected alarm entries including those previously recorded will include that change Alarm Message 2 displays the alarm limit and curre
286. nistrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit JULY 2010 jaum 2 8 2 Registering MON2000 After your have successfully performed your initial logon see Section 2 8 1 MON2000 automatically prompts you to register your copy of MON2000 software An active Internet connection is required for registration Registering your MON2000 software allows you to receive information about free updates and related products A direct link to the Emerson Internet website is provided via the File gt Update MON2000 menu You may choose to postpone registration You can register at any time via the File gt Register MON2000 menu Registering MON2000 2 20 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 1 Use the File gt Register MON2000 menu Follow the prompts in the Register MON2000 dialog to input your name MON2000 serial number located inside the CD jewel case and other relevant information Register MON2000 x Please enter your registration information Name Company Serial number Back Cancel 2 Click the button to continue 3 Choose the desired registration method by clicking the corresponding radio button NOTIC E Register MON2000 E x tns You must have an active egistration method l internet connection to register via the website C Emai C Print registration form C Register
287. no sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno sim compno Sim compno 10 11 No No No No No No 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 sim_compno sim_compno sim_compno sim_compno sim_compno sim_anlytime sim_stream sim_smask sim_month sim_day sim_year sim_hour sim_min sim_cycmonth sim_cycday sim_cycyear sim_cychour sim_cycmin sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_al sim_newdata arm arm arm arm arm arm arm arm arm arm arm arm sim_cal 10 FL 12 32 Bit Integer 5001 5002 sim_cyctime sim_calcycle Floating Point 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028 7029 sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim molpct sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw sim gpmw 10 11 12 1 3 No No No N
288. nt condition values as applicable 3 By default MON2000 displays all recorded alarms To view only the unacknowledged alarms click the Unacknowledged alarms only radio button To view only the active alarms click the Active alarms radio button 4 To acknowledge a single alarm An alarm triggered by a user defined value will continue to display as an active alarm until that value is no longer in the alarm state a Ensure you have selected the correct display option see Step 3 b Select the alarm you want to acknowledge c Click the Ack F2 button or press the F2 key Alarm Log JULY 2010 MON2000 Chromatogram Control Maintenance Log Parameter List Alarm Event Log Chromatogram Control Maintenance Log Parameter List Alarm Log Clear Ack All Active Alarms JULY 2010 LOGS 8 9 5 To acknowledge all unacknowledged alarms a Ensure you have selected the correct display option see Step 3 b Click the Ack All F3 button or press the F3 key In the Active Alarm view click the Clear Ack All Fa button or press the F4 key If an alarm is cleared before the condition has been resolved MON2000 redisplays the alarm entry as an active alarm 6 Click the Cancel button to exit and return to the main window CLEAR OR ACKNOWLEDGE ACTIVE ALARMS To clear or acknowledge all alarms click the Logs pull down menu and select the Clear Ack All Active
289. o 7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7050 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055 7056 7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 7062 sim gpmwt sim gpmwt sim gpmwt sim dbtu sim sbtu sim rden gas Sim compress sim wobbe sim unnormal sim totgpm calcval calcval calcval calcval calcval sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_dummy sim_abtu avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg 14 155 16 label label sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 7063 7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 7072 7073 7074 7075 7076 7077 7078 7079 7080 7081 7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avgs avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel avg archivel aincur aincur Sim cal abtu sim cal dbtu sim cal sbtu sim cal wobb sim cal rden sim cal comp sim cal gpm sim cal unno sim rf avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg avg
290. o vi JULY 2010 FID Configuration 5 66 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS b Click Modify to make the appropriate selection from the Digital filtering drop down list FID Advanced Configuration Digital filtering Disabled v Samples per second 50 vi Save Cancel c Click Save to accept the change or Cancel to reject the change d Click Close to leave the FID Advanced Configuration window 5 To reset the FID counts parameter click Autozero FID 5 16 LOI STATUS VARIABLES Use this function to select and configure up to 25 GC parameters that you would like to monitor using the LOI s Display mode refer to the Model 700 Gas Chromatograph System Reference Manual for more information about this mode MON2000 System Component Data F6 Timed Events FS User Defined gt Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Control LOI Status Variables Serial Ports TCP IP LOI Status Variables JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 67 1 Use the Application gt LOI Status Variables menu to access this function The LOI Status Variables window appears LOI Status Variables Include Mole Percents for current stream mb Copy F5 Copy C FB Cancel 2 If Include Mole Percents for current stream 1s checked which 1s the default
291. oatPT require only one register per variable Note that the Reg column displays the number for the GC Controller Modbus register that will be polled by a connected data acquisition system FE Galons 1000SCF C3 EN Loic 6 To change a variable assignment click the MAN Go peni br 100010 N appropriate Variable cell Use the provided 8 Gas Density kg m3 JULY 2010 ue Gross BTU Dry pull down menu and click the desired lue Gross BTU Sat ue Gross BTU Act variable to select it lue Net BTU Dry lue Net BTU Sat Net BTU Act a ke Sup MJ m3 Dy From the Variables menu you can assign cem MJ m Aet the results of optional base pressure s to lue Ia Min Se the Modbus register See Section 5 18 5 lue e Int MJ m3 Act ue Sup MJ kg Dry jue Inf MJ kg Dr Registers 5 82 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 7 To change the stream assignment click the appropriate cell Use the provided pull down menu and click the desired stream to select it To copy the stream settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy S F7 button or press the F7 key This feature also increments the Stream value to the next available stream e g incrementing from Stream 2 to Stream 8 per the GC application An error message displays when the last available stream is reached To change the component assignment click the appropriate cell Use the provided pull down menu and click the desired option to
292. ocol For this the Usage setting should be either User Modbus or SIM 2251 In any Modbus host slave configuration there must be one Host to which any one of the GCs can respond as a Slave Thus the controller could be connected to a maximum of 4 different serial data networks The serial interface protocol RS 232 will service most end connection devices i e PC and Report DCS connections use either RS 485 or RS 422 protocols although in some cases the RS 232 protocol can be used To access this function IEEE 1 From the Application gt Serial Ports menu System select the Usage column and use the pull Component Data F6 Timed Events FS down menu to select the appropriate User Defined configuration Calculations gt Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Serial Ports Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Ten rat TCPJIP Device ID 1 Registers F3 Cancel Selection field For Help press F1 JULY 2010 Serial Ports Configuration 5 74 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 The Mode column applies only to the following CPU boards e 2350A CPU board P N 2 3 2350 190 Model 700 CPU board P N 2 3 0700 036 5 18 GC SERIAL PORT AND CABLE CONFIGURATIONS This section provides more detailed information about the serial port connections of the 2350A GC Controller It 1dentifies serial port pin assignments and d
293. od Baseline Resolved 1 Fused 2 Last of Fused Group Tangent Skimmed 4 Resolved Rider Peak 5 Fused Rider 6 Last of Fused Rider 7 Tailing Peak 8 Forward Horizontal 20 Backward Horizontal 40 Baseline Forced at Valley 60 Inhibit On 100 Forced Integrate On 200 Forced Integrate End 300 Plateau Detect 400 Summation 500 View Raw Data 5 14 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 2 5 Sort Retention Time To sort the components listed in the displayed CDT by their retention times MON2000 sorts components by the corresponding detector number first then by the Retention Time Click the Sort AT F6 button or press the F6 key to access this function 2 MON2000 automatically sorts the components Sorting the CDT components by retention time may affect one or more of the following Analog Outputs Averages Bargraphs Limit Alarms e e e e User Defined Calculations 5 3 TIMED EVENTS Use this function to view and or edit the GC Timed Events Tables TEVs assigned to and used by particular gas streams Timed Events Description See Section 6 6 2 for details about editing from the Chromatogram gt Chromatogram Viewer menu Analysis Time Input total analysis time LIMITS 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds Cycle Time Input total cycle time LIMITS 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds OffDuring Baseline per sample valve toggle check boxes to select which valve s remain off du
294. odem 5 P Address 3 IC Multiplier 10 JULY 2010 Dial up Connection 2 34 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 The Extra Delay is enabled for Ethernet connections The default value is O and the default 30 seconds timeout is used If the value is changed to greater than O the value is used as the timeout The entered value is multiplied by 10 inside MON2000 therefore the maximum timeout is 100 000 ms or 100 seconds ex If timeout value needs to be 15 seconds the user should enter 1 500 Dial up Connection JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 35 MON2000 7 Click the button to accept the changes While connecting MON2000 dials the number attempts to connect via the selected modem and displays progress messages message box appears when a connection has been made or if the attempt to connect fails Once a connection has been established and while MON2000 remains connected via the modem the Connect button 1s disabled and the Disconnect button is enabled If the connection fails at any time MON2000 displays a message in the GC Status bar that 1t has been disconnected You can end the connection from the File Disconnect menu by clicking the disconnect icon on the MON2000 toolbar or by exiting MON2000 If you are using the Modbus RTU protocol the values for baud rate data bits stop bits and parity must match the settings you configured in the Modem Properties dialog These values are requ
295. og JULY 2010 MON2000 2 Save changes w JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 25 Event Log Additional Selections Selection Ending Date Ending Time Most Recentn Days Enter number of n Days Since Last Collected No further information 1s needed Entire Log No further information 1s needed For each entry in the Event Log which satisfies the selection criteria a record containing the following information is stored User ID of user initiating the change or SYSTEM Date time of occurrence Description of the event Parameter value prior to the event old value Parameter value after the event new value From the Output File table enter edit the filename and file format txt or csv for the Event Log Output file Click the OK button to apply the configuration changes MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes dialog 10 Click the Yes button to write the changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window Or Poll Command Event Log 9 26 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 Click the i button to discard your changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window 9 2 17 Poll Command Maintenance Log To configure the Maintenance Log command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands use the Commands pull down list and select the POLL command Genera
296. ogram launches inside a DOS window M upd_bin exe Communication 3 Press the TAB key to access the Communication menu Communication Connect 4 Use the ARROW keys to select the File Disconnect Director iex Exit Selection option and then press ENTER 5 The File Selection screen displays Communi Update Config USOS DA el Aces ae UPDATE BIN USING NEW STANDARD APPLICATION nnec Discon File Name Direct Maximum of 8 characters e g BIND ersio C GC APP Exit Dirs Drives 23561801 BIN 235 1S02 BIN 23561803 BIN 235 NW 1 BIN elect fipp lication File 1 Help ESC Exit Upgrade from Disk JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 5 Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the desired application file from disk This file is the file you will be upgrading 6 Press the TAB key to access the Upgrade Config menu 7 Use the ARROW keys to select the Merge option and then press ENTER opu of current bin file 8 Communication File Name Con a e rrr n imum of 8 characters e g BIN C GC APP Dirs Drives elect File to be copied for Data to be Merge into Fi Help ESC Exit Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the desired application file from disk This file is the new application file you wish to merge into the existing file see Step 5 9 The Merge screen displays Upgrade fr
297. oltmeter 13 Set Zero Adjustment to the value recorded in Step 8 14 Set Full Adjustment to the value recorded in Step 12 15 Set the Fixed Var parameter to Var 16 Click the j button to complete the calibration and return to the main window 5 10 5 Performing an Automated Calibration To perform an automated analog output calibration 1 Select the desired analog output by clicking anywhere in the corresponding row 2 Click the Auto Cal F button or press the F8 key You can abort this process at any time by button Cancel clicking the 3 The Zero Scale Adjustment dialog appears Current device value in engineering units T Carcel Input the appropriate value and click the egegeeeseesesesen 1 button A eessneno MON2000 To determine the uncalibrated Zero Scale and Full Scale analog output levels see Section 5 10 1 To prevent scale adjustment set both adjustment values to zero 0 0 See Appendix D for additional instructions on calibrating analog outputs Appendix D also includes a calibration example for an output scale of O to 1200 Performing an Automated Calibration JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 55 MON2000 4 The Full Scale Adjustment dialog appears Current device value in engineering units T Carcel Input the appropriate value and click the Mt il button 5 If the values entered are within toler
298. om Disk E 6 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 10 Use the ARROW ENTER keys to select the desired application settings to upgrade Press the SHIFT ENTER keys to select multiple settings Press the F2 key to select all the available settings Press the F3 key to clear your selected settings 11 Press the F4 key to begin the upgrade m 12 When the upgrade is done press the ESC mc File Selection key or use the Communication gt Exit menu weam to close the Update BIN program Ensure that you inspect the upgraded application file for any errors E 4 1 Upgrade from GC Controller To upgrade a user defined application file BIN currently being used by the GC Controller It is recommended that you upload a copy of your application file before performing the upgrade 1 Launch the Update BIN software by either clicking the MM Start button and using the Programs gt MON2000 gt Update BIN menu Me double click the Update BIN 1con on z Update BIN your PC desktop upd bin exe Upgrade from GC Controller JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 7 MON2000 2 The Update BIN software program launches inside a DOS window Ma upd bin exe Communication Update Config IPDATE BIN USING NEW STANDARD APPLICATION 3 Use the ARROW keys to select the Connect en option and then press ENTER Directory lection File io 4 The Connect screen displays list
299. on Com ID JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 79 MON2000 Table 5 15 Description of Com ID Settings Connection Usage Read Write Protocol PC or modem PC R ASCII direct serial connection User_Modbus RW RTU SIM_2251 DCS User_Modbus R ASCII SIM_2251 RW RTU Printer Report W ASCII direct serial connection 1 User Modbus and SIM 2251 are slave port protocols the GC Controller can operate only as a slave 2 User Modbus a PLC emulation Modbus protocol can use scaling to convert floating point numbers to integers 3 SIM_2251 emulates Daniel 2500 communication protocol and is a simulation of the 2251 GC Controller 4 See Appendix I for instructions on how to connect a modem to the GC Controller JULY 2010 Com ID 5 80 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 18 4 Registers To accommodate installations that use Modbus registers and the User Modbus protocol MON2000 enables you to assign GC analysis variables to registers This function is not required for normal GC operation Only use this function if you are designing a special installation to directly access the GC Controller Modbus registers See Appendix F for more information regarding GC Modbus registers For a list of variable assignments made to all registers print the communication section of the PC Config Report To assign GC analysis variables and scale FE ee ranges e Timed Events F5 A ser Defined 1 Use the Application gt Seria
300. on trolled by MON2000 and a standard GC appli cation Name text string label to identify a stream 12 character maximum Use how stream is used Settings include calibration CAL analysis ANL not used NOT Det detector used by this stream Control of the detector is application specific For example for Model 700 2350A Modes 0 and 1 the Det col is DET1 and read only for Model 700 2350A Mode 2 the Det col is editable for Model 700 2350A Mode 3 the Det col is DUAL and read only CD CD2 CDT associated with this stream see Section 5 2 CDT 2 For the Model 700 2350A Modes 2 and 3 an additional CD column displays TE TE2 TEV associated with this stream see Section 5 3 TEV 2 For the Model 700 2350A Modes 2 and 3 an additional TE column displays Streams JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 41 MON2000 For calibration CAL streams you can edit the following control parameters Table 5 5 Description of Calibration Stream Settings Cal Setting Description Tot number of runs made for each calibration Range 1 to 10 Avg number of last calibration runs to average E g if 5 calibration runs are performed and Aug is set to 3 then the last 3 runs are used to average the calibration results Start time the first automatic calibration is to be performed Int number of hours between automatic calibrations JULY 2010 S
301. on the screen 9 2 DATA COLLECTION CONFIGURATION Use the Data Collection gt Configuration gt New File or Data Collection gt Configuration gt Open File menu to access the Configuration for Data Collection window and the commands to configure the Polling Control file This function is performed in the Online or Offline mode A Polling Control file contains commands to be executed in order to acquire desired sets of data from one or more gas chromatographs JULY 2010 Data Collection Configuration 9 4 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 Select a desired command from the list of available commands and input the necessary data to complete the command see Table 9 1 for a list of commands The completed command is added to the Polling Control file Continue with the next desired command This process is continued until all commands are selected and configured for the file Edit the polling control file by adding deleting and inserting commands Data Collection Configuration JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 5 MON2000 Table 9 1 List of Commands Command Description Await This command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to await a specific time of day prior to con tinuing processing the commands in this file The user enters the desired time of day in hours and minutes Connect Logon Connect No Logon The Connect Logon command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to esta
302. on using the Modbus Test software JULY 2010 Introduction SIM 2251 8 User Modbus F 2 m MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 All other User_Modbus registers can be defined by the user To define User_Modbus register contents through assignment of variables see Section 5 18 4 To obtain a complete list of register assignments both SIM_2251 and User_Modbus use Model 700 to produce a PC Config Report To print a PC Config Report see Section 2 16 3 for an example report see Appendix A Section F 2 and Section F 2 1 F 1 2 NOTES ON SIM 2251 MODBUS To use the Modbus Test software and view the contents of SIM_2251 registers you will need to set Register Mode to Daniel as noted in Table F 1 To obtain a complete list of register assignments both SIM 2251 and User Modbus use MON2000 to produce a PC Config Report Introduction SIM 2251 8 User Modbus JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 F 3 F 2 USER MODBUS REGISTER LIST Slave Name USER MODBUS Field Indices Name S C Variable Name MODBUS Reg Boolean Coils 0 sysalarm_set 1 1 1 sysalarm_set 2 1 2 sysalarm_set 3 1 3 sysalarm set 4 1 4 sysalarm set 5 1 5 sysalarm set 6 1 6 sysalarm set 7 1 7 sysalarm set 8 1 8 sysalarm set 9 1 9 sysalarm set 10 1 10 sysalarm set 11 l 11 sysalarm set 12 1 12 sysalarm set 13 1 13 sysalarm_set 14 T 14 sysalarm_set 15 1 15 sysalarm set 16 1 16 sysalarm_set 17 1 17 sysalarm_
303. ond GC Controller 1 Use the File gt Disconnect menu or click the toolbar icon to access this function 2 MON2000 automatically terminates all open connections Disconnect from GC Unit 2 24 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 A Terminating communications message appears in the status bar If MON2000 does not detect an active connection to terminate an Invalid selection or not downloaded message appears 2 11 CUSTOMIZING MON2000 Use the following functions to customize users the directory of GC applications and PC communications parameters 2 11 1 Configure Users Use this function to create new user accounts or edit the existing account data An extra level of security is assigned to the File gt Users submenu The File gt Users submenu can only be accessed by first entering a Password into a dialog box titled Enter Administrator Password After gaining access to the Users dialog the operator then has the ability to create new user accounts or edit existing account data This feature is not available to the Regular and Read Only user 1 Use the File gt Users menu to access this File Application Reports Logs Chror Connect functio n Disconnect Download 2 The Enter Administrator Password dialog Upgrade Flash PC Config Report box appears Offine Edi m GC Directory Enter Administrator Password I x FER Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Password
304. onfig Report via the Report Viewer see Appendix A for instructions and an example When closed on the GC keylock switch protects many of the GC Controller s parameters from being changed using MON2000 Most of the dialog boxes in the Application s menu allows you to view data but does not allow you to save changes when the keylock switch is closed Several items in the Reports and Control menus are unavailable when the keylock switch is closed The Users dialog cannot be downloaded to the GC Controller when the keylock switch is closed A GC application cannot be downloaded to the GC Controller when the keylock switch is closed Since most of the GC Controller s parameters are protected by the keylock switch it is easiest to list the operations that are available when the keylock switch is closed The following operations are available when the keylock switch is closed Keylock Switch Control 3 16 GETTING STARTED MON2000 The stream sequences can be changed in the System dialog box GC applications version 1 7 and above Automatic calibration in the Analog Outputs dialog box Report display GC report request GC applications version 1 7 and above MON2000 printer control GC applications version 1 7 and above View archive data Trend data Maintenance Log editing GC applications version 1 7 and above Alarms except clear ack all active alarms Event log Chromatogram viewer
305. ons and detailed step procedures Section 6 Chromatogram Viewer This section includes description of available Chromatogram Viewer functions and detailed step procedures to view save and print chromatograms Section 7 Reports This section includes descriptions of available reports and sample outputs instructions on how to generate and print a given report Section 8 Logs This section includes description of Maintenance Alarm and Event logs description of the Parameter List step procedures for viewing editing and clearing logs JULY 2010 Description of Manual 1 4 INTRODUCTION MON2000 Section 9 Data Collection This section includes descriptions of Data Collection and Auto Sequencing instructions on how to configure generate and run the Data Collection and Auto Sequencing function using MON2000 PLUS Section 10 Modbus Test This section includes short description of the WinMB software minimum system requirements for installing WinMB on a 32 bit Microsoft Windowsg platform installation and start up instructions description of available Modbus Test functions and detailed step procedures description of the WinMB online help file and navigation instructions Description of Manual JULY 2010 MON2000 INTRODUCTION 1 5 Appendix A PC Config Report This appendix provides a sample PC Config Report for reference only Appendix B Component Data
306. ontrol pull down menu allow you to initiate various operating modes of the gas chromatograph GC unit AUTO SEQUENCE Use this function to start continuous GC analysis runs that follow a predefined stream sequence At the initial startup the current stream in the stream sequence is the first stream analyzed See Section 5 8 for detailed instructions on configuring the predefined sequence 1 Use the Control Auto Sequence menu or press the F2 key to access this function 2 The Start Auto Sequence dialog appears Start Auto Sequence x 3 Click the Purge check box to set the purging option Note that the default setting is ON Purging allows sample gas to flow through the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to beginning the first analysis 4 Click the 1 button to continue Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 5 The Auto Sequence GC Analysis begins if you selected the Purge Stream option MON2000 performs this 60 second task first Auto Sequence 4 2 CONTROL FUNCTIONS Use the status bar to monitor the progress of this function To change the operating parameters such as the Timed Event Tables TEVs and Component Data Tables CDTs See Section 4 for information about Application functions 4 2 SINGLE STREAM Eme ses Auto Sequence F2 Use this function to start continuous GC analysis run s on a single stream Halt F3 Calibration 1
307. oose the directory location and file name You can save the report in any of these formats txt ASCII Tab delimited cvs Comma deliminted Xis Excel htm HTML xml EXtensible Markup Language 7 Click the Cancel button to return to the main window 7 5 2 Archive Export Data Use this function to export data files for review at a later time From the Reports gt Archive Data gt Export Data menu MON2000 Reports Logs Chromatogram Control View Help Report Display Q GC Report Request GC Printer Control MON2000 Printer Control Archive Data View Data Trend Data Export Data Reset Archive Export Data JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 REPORTS 7 25 1 Click Export Data and the Export Archive window displays axi Saven SI SAVE AJE Alantic cal rpt 8603 csv cal rpt02 csv men Save as type EMRE 2 The exported data file is saved in the default GC gt Directory Use the pull down menu to save the data file to a different directory 3 Click an existing file to write over an existing file or enter a new file name in the Data Field 4 Save the file as either csv spreadsheet application format txt Word Pad or Note Pad application format ax Save in Gy SAVE yi 3 r E3 Alantic cal rpt 8603 csv cal rpt 2 csv Save as type csv Files csv yi Cancel p Z SY Files csv
308. operational mode for this discrete output Auto value is determined by application Off value is set to OFF On value is set to ON Current Value current state of the discrete output On Time time the digital output will be turned ON OFF MON2000 clock Off Time based on user PC system clock If the ON OFF times are the same the timing feature has no effect Application 3 Click the button to accept your n CRT changes and return to the main window Ries aoa Te Calculations gt Cancel Click the button to abort and return to the main window VALVES This function allows you to assign identifying labels monitor valve operation control the operation modes The number of discrete outputs available depends on the GC application To use the Valve function 1 Use the Application gt Valves menu to access this function Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Temperature Go Serial Ports TCP IP 2350A GC Controllers support up to 12 Stream valves and 5 Analyzer valves for a total of 17 valves Model 700 controllers support up to Analytical Valves AV 1 to AV 5 and S 1 to S 8 Stream valves Valves JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 59 MON2000 2 The Valves dialog appears per GC type Name Li Anlyzi01 2 Anlp2r02 Anly2r03 Unused Unused Stream01 Stream0
309. or Setting Up MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 If another user is already connected to the GC the unit will lock out the second user When a PC connection is active the GC Controller front panel will indicate a System Lockout This status times out after 10 minutes INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 23 3 MON2000 appears the connection status dialog while dialing the selected unit Device Conexant D850 56K V 9x DFVc Modem E Properties Number to dial Line call state Dialing Disconnect Close The messages Reading dictionary Reading GC Application data and Logon appears in the status bar and an information screen appears Reading GC application data e aje a po pa Sea hp Cancel Once connected the name of the GC unit displays in the lower left hand corner of the MON2000 main window File Application Reports Logs Chron Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PC Config Report Offline Edit GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit JULY 2010 2 10 2 Disconnect from GC Unit Use this process to terminate an active PC connection to a GC unit The menu driven procedure for disconnecting is completely optional MON2000 intelligently and automatically disconnects when you exit MON2000 or connect to a sec
310. orded 4 7 GC TIME ET Help Use the GC Time function to view and if sura necessary set the system date and time used Single Stream RN a by the GC Controller Calibration Baseline Run Valve Timing 4 7 1 View GC Time To view the system date and time used by the GC do the following 1 Use the Control gt GC Time gt View menu to select the View option JULY 2010 GC Time 4 14 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 2 The following MON2000 dialog appears Q Current GC time 6 2 00 1 42 59 PM Standard Time 3 Click the K button to exit this dialog and return to the main window 4 7 2 Set GC Time To set the system date and time used by the GC 1 Use the Control gt GC Time gt Set menu to select the Set option 2 The Set GC Time dialog appears MON2000 indicates whether the GC Controller is on daylight saving or standard time which depends on the configured system parameters 64 2 00 yi N 43 10 43 34 AM i Standard Time 3 Use the provided pull down arrow to access an interactive calendar EE June 2000 gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Click the left right arrows to view the IPIE previous or future months 2 s 2 23 an T Click the desired day for the date Note that l a blue oval appears on the selected day 4 Select which part of the time hour minute or seconds you wish to change Use the Set GC Time JULY 2010 MON
311. ormation refer to the MON2000 PLUS Quick Start Guide 3 9000 743 COPYING MON2000 TO DISKS Use this procedure to copy the MON2000 installation files to 3 floppy disks for future installation Installing the CrypKey License Service for MON2000 PLUS JULY 2010 MON2000 1 A A 4 a a T i JULY 2010 F View Go Favorites Too Toolbars w Status Bar Explorer Bar as Web Page Large Icons Small Icons List Details Customize this Folder Arrange Icons Line Up Icons Refresh Adobe Acrobat Reader Danalyzer Brochure PDFs GC Manual PDFs MON Installation Disks J amp Cg Disk2 k H Disk3 MON Software User Manual PDF Standard GC Applications _sys1 cab userl cab datal cab INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 5 Label 3 blank formatted 3 5 inch floppy disks MON2000 Install Disk 1 MON2000 Install Disk 2 and MON2000 Install Disk 3 Place the MON2000 CD in your CD ROM drive Launch Windowsg Explorerg Ensure that the Show all files option in Windowsg Explorerg is selected a Use the View gt Folder Options menu to access the Folder Options dialog b Click the View tab Folder Options x General View File Types Folder views You can make all your folders look the same Like Current Folder Reset All Folders Advanced settings Remember each folder s view settings O Display
312. own menu to select the appropriate mode setting e g AUTOMATIC MANUAL or OUT OF SERVICE Ensure that the temperature is constant for the Oven i e Multivalve System block and column module kit and the SSS Column Function Factory Default Setting Column 1 Detector s or Block Temperature 80 C 176 0 F Column 2 Column Temperature 80 C 176 0 F Column3 Sample Stream Block Temperature 40 C 104 0 F Column 4 Spare Future Use 4 Click the OK button to apply the changes or click the Cancel button to discard your changes and return to the MON2000 Main window 5 15 FID CONFIGURATION Use this function to view the status System information about the Model 700 Gas Chro oe Timed Events matograph s Preamplifier Assembly as well as User Defined to modify certain FID parameters Calculations 3 Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms To access the FID Configuration window iic MON2000 must be connected to a GC that has Analog Outputs its serial port 4 configured to use ADC700 Diii Valves Serial Ports Temperature Control Handshake IL Serial Ports None None TCP IP None None Device ID 1 Registers F3 Cancel Selection field For Help press F1 FID Configuration JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 63 MON2000 1 Use the Application gt FID Configuration menu to access this function The FID Configuration window appears FID Configuration
313. p to 8 chromatograms at one time Each chromatogram is color IV View current CGM Save A D values Print at end of run Save at end of run 1 Integrate Component i PENTANE Viewing a Live Chromatogram JULY 2010 MON2000 Chromatogram Viewer x CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 3 coded use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram 100 0127 59 46 00 T View current CGM BC Archive 10 0 O A Save A D values 765 1020 1275 1530 1785 2040 2295 2550 Printatendofmun PC File d Save at end of run Ehromatogram Baselines i oi Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Cal Cur All Save Cmp Raw Dat a Edit Cursor Print CGM 6 2350 P1 Stream 5 Det 2 1 5 2004 12 27 23 a W CGM 1 2350 PI Stream 1 Det 1 1 5 2004 12 18 23 Available Chromatograms x Last nalysis Stream 1 Last nalysis Stream 3 Last nalysis Stream 5 Last Analysis Stream 7 JULY 2010 Wi CGM 2 2350 PI Stream 1 Det 2 1 5 2004 12 18 23 ODHA AAEN Pee AD AA JE 004 45 55 68 6 2 2 From GC Archive To view the most recent chromatogram trace from the online GC archive 1 Click the GC Archive button The Available Chromatograms dialog appears 2 Double click the desired entry If a chromatogram contains data for more than one detector a Select Detector menu dialog displays Double click ei
314. ped into this normalization k number of components to be included in the normalization Conc Analysis with Response Factor JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 9 MON2000 C 4 POST ANALYSIS COMPUTATIONS C 4 1 Liquid Equivalent Computations The equivalent liquid volume in gallons per 1000 standard cubic feet GPM is given by Equation C 6 Equivalent Liquid Volume GPM BASEPRS BASETEMP 459 67 GPM CONCN x LCF x 1473 60 459 67 where GPM gallons 1000 standard cubic feet of component n CONCN normalized if selected concentration of 6699 component n LCF liquid equivalent conversion factor for component n at 14 73 PSIA and 60 degrees F BASE PRS base contact Pressure specified defaults to 14 73 C 4 2 Heating Value Calculations a Dry Gross BTU of Total Gas Equation C 7 Dry Gross BTU Value of Total Gas P Y CONCN BTU CF nal DRYBTU CF 100 where DRYBTU uncorrected dry BTU content per cubic foot of CF total gas sample CONCN normalized if selected concentration of 6 component n calculated from peak analysis BTU CF energy content per cubic foot of component n stored in permanent memory JULY 2010 Post Analysis Computations C 10 DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 P total number of components to be used in calcula tion of total BTU CF 100 removed the 100 factored into the calculation of the concentration earlier in the a
315. ph F5 Auto Cal F8 Cancel 3 Select the channel to be calibrated Output channels 1 and 2 can be scaled from either 4 20 mA or 1 5 V Channels 3 to 10 are scaled from 4 20 mA Although output channels for direct voltage measurement exist for analog output channels 1 and 2 it is recommended that they not be used for calibration purposes Instead use the current out terminals and the 250 ohm resistor as described Calibrating by Volts JULY 2010 MON2000 Your Voltmeter reading should be close to 1 0 V but does not have to be exactly 1 0 V If the reading is negative reverse the leads JULY 2010 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A D 3 4 To change a variable assignment click the appropriate Variable cell Use the provided pull down menu and click the desired variable to select it Variable run 3 Heati ie Inf Sat EWR Gallons 1000 SCF C3 BEI Galons 1000 SCF C4 EH Gallons 1000 SCF C5 Ei Gallons 1000 SCF C6 ANN Gas Density Ibm 1000 ft3 EM Gas Density kg m3 Lo Heating Value Gross BTU Dry Mo Heating Value Gross BTU Sat Heating Value Gross BTU Act lue Net BTU Dry lue Net BTU Sat lue Net BTU Act lue Sup MJ m3 Dry lue Sup MJ m3 Sat lue Sup MJ m3 Act Value Inf MJ m3 Dr lue Inf MJ m3 Sat ue Inf MJ m3 Act ue Sup MJ kg Dry ue Inf MJ kg Dr m 5 For voltage values set Zero Scale to 1 0 and Full Scale to 5 0 If the channel is calibrated 1n milliamperes set Z
316. pplication and differs from the factory released standard application from which it originated At the time when software is upgraded including application files it becomes important to know which factory released standard application formed the basis of the user application so the user application can be upgraded too with newer version of the standard application file You can determine which standard application formed the basis of the current user application by inspecting various MON2000 screens while connected to the GC in most cases you need only inspect the System dialog JULY 2010 Guide to Standard Application Files E 20 gt UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 E 10 2 Standard Applications v1 50 and Later If you are using a GC Application that is version 1 50 or later you can quickly determine the original standard application name by viewing the variables listed in the System dialog Use the Application gt System menu to access this dialog In the System dialog see Table E 2 find the value for the variable named CFG Base Name and locate it in the column labeled CFG Base Name then read the Analyzer Name BIN file to determine the application BIN file name Standard Applications v1 50 and Later JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 21 MON2000 Table E 2 System Variables for Standard Application Files Analyzer Unit CFG Base System Ma
317. pres_cal op_pres_cal stream_data op_pres_cal op_pres_cal op_pres_cal stream_data op_pres_cal op_pres_cal op_pres_cal stream_data op_pres_cal op_pres_cal op_pres_cal stream_data op_pres_cal op_pres_cal op_pres_cal stream_data op_pres_cal op_pres_cal op_pres_cal totl_gpmc3 totl_gpmc4 totl gpmc5 totl gpmc6 sup m3 dry sup m3 sat STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STRI STRI STRI STRI EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO EAM NO 20 32 21 33 10 22 34 11 23 35 12 24 36 13 25 14 26 156 60 Si 7 VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL 7 Si VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL 7 Si VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL s Si VARIABL VARIABL VARIABL VARIABLI 7 7 TRING TRING A A A A TRING TRING kri kri kri TRING TRING kri kri kri TRING TRING kri kri Lr TRING TRING VARIABLI Si 7 TRING TRING VARIABLI
318. puts JULY 2010 MON2000 Application System Component Data F6 Timed Events FS User Defined gt Calculations gt Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs vi Temperature Control Serial Ports TCP IP Signals routed to discrete outputs are assigned via the Limit Alarm and Discrete Alarm functions see Section 5 6 and Section 5 7 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 57 3 Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window DISCRETE OUTPUTS Use this function to assign labels to the GC discrete outputs and control their operational modes The number of discrete outputs available depends on the GC application 1 Use the Application gt Discrete Outputs menu to access this function 2 The Discrete Outputs dialog appears Channel Label E On Time Off Time m s e 4 Common_Alarm 5 Calib Maint To edit the settings displayed double click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus Discrete Outputs MON2000 5 58 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS See the following table for details Table 5 11 Description of Discrete Output Settings Setting Description Channel channel number assigned Label name used to identify the discrete output 12 characters maximum Switch sets
319. quired for communications on a system with keyboard and display an optional COMAA Board must be installed and a COM and COMS cable P N 3 2350 086 connected see Figure 2 5 The serial port setup in the MON2000 Software for COMS must be configured as Front Panel See Figure G 4b f Reinstall the Analog cable to J6 on the System Interface Board g Place the Unit Updated to 2350A label included with the upgrade kit on the instruction decal located on the inside right wall of the explosion proof units or on the card cage of the rack or panel mount units Serial Ports EC x jata None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None Device ID 1 Registers F3 Cancel BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 51 MON2000 Figure 2 4 Serial Port 4 with COM4A Board Serial Ports Front Panel Device ID 1 Registers F3 Cancel ee Figure 2 5 Serial Port 8 with COM4A Board JULY 2010 BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION 2 52 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 15 2350A OPTIONS The following board configurations are optional for the Model 500 GC with 2350A Controller 2 15 1 The COM4A Board 1 To add four additional communications ports at the GC Controller site remove the Controller enclosure s front panel SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller make certain the powe
320. r supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected Observe all safety precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death a For the explosion proof Controller the front panel is secured by 16 screws Remove those screws first b Then carefully lower the front panel on its bottom hinges The front panel is heavy so make sure it does not drop and cause damage c For the rack mount Controller the rear of the enclosure is open it allows access for most field wiring procedures without removing the enclosure 2 Locate the GC Controller s Terminal Board for Field Wiring TB The TB 1s attached to the GC Controller s Card Cage Assembly facing the enclosure s front panel In the rack mount Controller the TB faces outward toward the rear of the enclosure 3 Loosen the six screws that secure the TB Then unplug the TB from its connections at the back top of the board 2350A Options JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 53 4 Lower the TB down and out of the way held in place by its ground straps at the bottom of the board This exposes the Card Cage Assembly Loosen the four screws that secure the Card Cage Assembly to the chassis Then remove the Card Cage Assembly away from its chassis mount so that it is easy to work on Locate the System Interface and Driver board It is
321. r Defined 1 36 7342 7343 Second Archive of Averages User Defined 1 36 7378 User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 13 MON2000 G 3 continued _SIM_2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST No Description 7379 Second Archive of Maximum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7414 7415 Second Archive of Minimum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7450 7451 Third oldest Archive of Averages User Defined 1 36 7486 7487 Third oldest Archive of Maximum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7522 7523 Third oldest Archive of Minimum values from Averages User Defined 1 36 7558 G 3 continued SIM 2251 MODBUS COMMUNICATION INDICES ee eae RE RIE Description RW read write 1 or read only 0 LEN length REGS number of Modbus registers required TYPE LEN VARIABLE NAME POINTER or DESCRIPTION 9001 Log see device model number oo o string Reg No 3006 soos 1 3009 i e W 1 1 9007 9010 system time minutes 0 59 9011 ma system time seconds 0 59 9012 integer 9013 re integer 9014 long 9016 EN string 9022 E integer 0023 o imeger xo o meyer JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List F 14 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 G 3 continued SIM 22531 MODBUS COMMUNICATION INDICES RW read write 1 or read only 0 LEN length REGS numbe
322. r of Modbus registers required LEN VARIABLE NAME POINTER or DESCRIPTION ams o imeger i 9026 EN integer oom o ineger oo o ineger o9 o imeger Description Reg No run time 1 run time 2 for dual detector system so30_ o iege sos o f imen oss o f ieper 1 1 1 os o mee ofi oss o imer 2 i oss o mee 2 1 6 0 imeger 9037 Nu integer soss o meer 2 039 o mee 2 soso o imeser 2 sou o meg hourly average reset minutes 24 hour average reset year 24 hour average reset month 24 2 24 hour average reset da oo o os o mee 2 oom o mee 2 os o megr 2 o Ew E 1 1 g 1 g 1 g 1 1 g 1 g 1 g 1 os o meer 2 1 som o mee 2 1 sos o f meg 2 f 1 User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC F 15 MON2000 G 3 continued SIM 22531 MODBUS COMMUNICATION INDICES Description RW read write 1 or read only 0 LEN length REGS number of Modbus registers required soso o ineger 2 1 wectiyaveragerest minws i ost o imeger ss o incger 2 1 monty average reset mon 0000000000 2 monthly average reset dey S 2 9053 o integer 1 monthly average reset day xs o imegr 2 1 monty average reset hou a sss o meer 2 1 mony average rest mine
323. r this warranty clause shall be borne by Buyer unless accepted in writing by Seller Goods repaired and parts replaced during the warranty period shall be in warranty for the remainder of the original warranty period or ninety 90 days whichever is longer This limited warranty is the only warranty made by Seller and can be amended only in a writing signed by an authorized representative of Seller Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AS TO MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY OTHER MATTER WITH RESPECT TO ANY OF THE GOODS OR SERVICES It is understood that corrosion or erosion of materials is not covered by our guarantee 2 LIMITATION OF REMEDY AND LIABILITY SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES CAUSED BY DELAY IN PERFORMANCE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR CORRECTION REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY CLAUSE IN SECTION 1 HEREIN IN NO EVENT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT INFRINGEMENT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OTHER TORT OR OTHERWISE SHALL SELLER S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND OR ITS CUSTOMERS EXCEED THE PRICE TO BUYER OF THE SPECIFIC GOODS MANUFACTURED OR SERVICES PROVIDED BY SELLER GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION BUYER AGREES THAT IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER S LIABILITY TO BUYE
324. rLink PCI 172 16 23 125 Modem Properties F2 Cancel Alphanumeric field For Help press F1 4 Set the number of retries to three GC Directory Station Name Telephone Server Name IP Address Modem Properties F2 Cancel alphanumeric field For Help press F1 Click the 1 button to apply your changes JULY 2010 MON2000 TCP IP Settings 2 66 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 16 CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM Ensure you have a pre existing PC connection to the GC unit before installing the external modem If the GC unit is already on location do this via another remote operator connection or onsite via use of a portable PC and serial cable Ideally configure the GC unit and install the external modem prior to placement at the remote location Note You cannot set the Serial Ports parameters from the GC unit front panel 2 16 1 HARDWARE SETUP 1 Halt any ongoing analysis runs Use the Control gt Halt menu to access this function 2 Disconnect AC power from the GC MON2000 Controller SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller make certain the power supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected Observe all safety precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death For the explosion proof Cont
325. racters 4 To change the log entry text However the entire Maintenance Log can contain no more than 1100 characters a Click the appropriate Log Message cell b Click the Edit Message F3 button The Edit Log Message dialog appears c Type your edits Maintenance Log JULY 2010 LOGS 8 3 MON2000 d To accept your edits press the RETURN key To cancel your edits click the xi button or press the ESC key Edit Log Message 1 Added on 3 23 00 at 9 02 33 AM x test 5 To delete a log entry click the desired log entry and press the DELETE key 6 Click the 1 button to write this data to the GC unit Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window 8 2 PARAMETER LIST Chromatogram Control Use this function to keep a record of the Maintenance Log hardware components and associated Eius NIRE parameters for a given GC unit Event Log To read and edit the Parameter List 1 Usethe Logs Parameter List menu to access this function MON2000 retrieves the data from the GC unit JULY 2010 Parameter List 8 4 LOGS MON2000 2 The Parameter List dialog appears Parameter List for Jean s E E Print F2 Save As PAR ta Open PAR F4 Cancel Alphanumeric field For Help press F1 Table 8 1 Items in Parameter List Type Parameter Operational SO PN Purchaser Location Order Date Model Control Serial Analyzer Ser
326. rc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc avg arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3 3 34 35 36 10 11 12 13 14 LS 16 Ty 18 19 20 sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 1327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 7334 7335 7336 7337 7338 7339 7340 7341 7342 7343 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc
327. rd cage shield after the CPU assembly is reinstalled and all cables reconnected to the System Interface board No software setup is required for this board 7 To use an existing Modem 1414 a For operation with the 2350A CPU set the Standard 1414 Modem jumpers per the following table Table 2 6 1414 Standard Modem Jumper Settings Jumper Pin J4 J5 Open J6 3 5 4 6 J7 7 8 J9 Open b On the 2350A WinSystems CPU set J21 pin 13 14 JULY 2010 2350A Modem Installation 2 58 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 15 3 2350A Ethernet Installation To add an ethernet assembly 1 To add an ethernet card at the GC Controller site remove the Controller enclosure s front panel a For the explosion proof Controller the front panel is secured by 16 screws Remove those screws first b Then carefully lower the front panel on its bottom hinges The front panel is heavy so make sure it does not drop and cause damage c For the rack mount Controller the rear of the enclosure is open it allows access for most field wiring procedures without removing the enclosure d Locate the GC Controller s Terminal Board for Field Wiring TB The TB is attached to the GC Controller s Card Cage Assembly facing the enclosure s front panel In the rack mount Controller the TB faces outward toward the rear of the enclosure 2 Loosen the six screws that secure the TB Then unplug the TB from its connections at
328. ream currently being analyzed This function is also available via the Chromatogram menu F8 View Last CGM Display chromatogram stored in the GC unit This function is also available via the Chromatogram menu Downloading an Application JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 75 MON2000 2 18 UPGRADING FLASH Use this function to download a BOS file to a connected GC Controller Only download a BOS file when upgrading the GC firmware or after the GC unit has been out of service You must first connect to the GC to use the Upgrade Flash function a ER t JU EN 1 Use the File gt Upgrade Flash menu to Connect access the Select BOS File To Download dialog PC Config Report Offline Edit Select BOS File To Download a 2ix GC Directory Look in ag erE3 Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings L TEMP Print Setup Register MON2000 File name Files of type Bos Files BOS vi Cancel Li 2 Click the desired BOS file The file name appears in the File name data field 3 Click the button to download the selected BOS file to the connected GC unit Click the Cancel button to exit and return to the main window JULY 2010 Upgrading Flash 2 76 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 19 OFFLINE EDIT OF GC APPLICATION Use this function to edit a GC application file that is saved on disk or has been down
329. red high low limits in the appropriate cells 7 To copy the stream settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy S F5 button or press the F5 key This feature increments the Stream value to the next available stream e g incrementing from Stream 2 to Stream 8 per the GC application Limit Alarms 5 30 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 8 MON2000 To copy the component settings from a highlighted row and apply them to the next row click the Copy C F6 button or press the F6 key This feature increments the Component value to the next available component e g incrementing from Ammonia to Benzene per the GC application Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Limit Alarms Description Variable selected variable assigned to the limit alarm Stream stream number assigned to the variable or the channel number if an analog input or analog output Component component name and number assigned to the variable Discrete Output number of the discrete hardware output that will be set when the alarm is active zero indicates no discrete output will be set Limit Alarms JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 31 MON2000 Type High uses only the high and the high high limits Low uses only the low and the low low limits and All uses both
330. rgraph output see Section 5 10 3 for details A fixed offset percent of full scale added to the CGM analog output to allow the user to conveniently position the chromatogram on a strip chart recorder Displays chromatogram trace signals for strip chart generation from Detectors 1 and or 2 Identifies the baseline offset CFG Baseline Number Identifies the Standard GC Application software from which this GC application or configuration was developed i e the number of the standard configura tion file that was used to generate the current applica tion Metric Base Condition Enables metric or disables off whether MON2000 J displays the GC Control Calculation in metric units See Section 5 5 1 for details System JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 5 MON2000 Table 5 1 Description of Items in System Dialog Continued Item Function Edit Max Archive Averages maximum number of averages 1 254 J Max Archive Avg Records maximum number of archive records per average J without an extended memory card 1 128 Application Revision non edit revision level of the current application Application Base Name non edit base name of the application Archive Days non edit maximum number of days that archive V records are kept 1 400 BOS Revision non edit revision level of the BOS JULY 2010 System 5 6 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 2 COMPONENT DATA
331. ring a baseline run Application System Component Data F6 Timed Events User Defined gt Calculations a Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature control Serial Ports TCPIIP The Cycle Time must be at least 10 seconds greater than the Analysis Time Sort Retention Time JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 15 Valve Events Type use the pull down menu to select between valve number Valve discrete output channel number DO and stream switch Strm Sw additional selections SSO1 SSO2 Bleed1 Bleed2 Block1 and Block2 are available for the Model 700 GC applications Valve DO for valves and discrete outputs only input the valve number or discrete output channel number Use the provided combo box to select valve number by name State for all types except for stream switch use the pull down menu to toggle ON OFF Time input the time that the event is to occur LIMITS 0 0 to 6000 0 seconds Integration Events Type use the pull down menu to select between Inhibit Integrate Auto Zero Slope Sensitivity Peak Width Single Baseline FID Gain Summation or Fused Override Value For peak width or slope sensitivity input the number of points to be used LIMITS Peak Width and Slope Sensitivity 1 to 99 For FID gain use the pull down menu
332. ription field 9 2 7 Delay Hours Command Prior to executing the auto polling function the Delay Hours Command instructs the Auto Sequencing module to delay for a specified interval of time The user enters the time delay in one hour increments To configure the Delay Hours Command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands pull down list select Delay Hours General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay E ea I Delay Hours Delay Hours 2 Enter the time delay in one hour increments in the Delay field 3 Enter a description for the Delay Hours command in the Command Description field Delay Hours Command JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 13 MON2000 9 2 8 Disconnect Command Use the Disconnect Command to terminate communications with a currently connected GC Controller To configure the Disconnect command 1 From the General Configuration List of Commands use the Commands pull down list and select Disconnect General Configuration List of Commands Type Time GC Entry Delay let site l 1 2 Enter a description for the Disconnect Command in the Command Description field No additional input parameters are required for this command Also note if you are not connected to a GC Controller this command is ignored 9 2 9 End Command The End Command marks the end of the polling control file and signa
333. rms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature control Serial Ports TCPIIP Timed Events JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 17 MON2000 3 Click the i j button to accept your selection The Timed Events Table dialog appears Click the Cancel button to abort and MON2000 returns you to the main window Timed Events Table 1 Eg Spectrum Gain Events Sort Detector Gain Time Detector 1 Peak Width ji EMO Inhibit 1 Valve wwww w y Off MI inhibit 2 D02 MM Inhibit 3 Valve 3 i nhibit 3 Valve 3 l EIE Peak width nhibit nhibit Peak Width nhibit EMI Inhibit Peak Width nhibit nhibit mH BENI Detector 1 E Detector 1 4 View or edit data To add a new timed event move the cursor to the last table cell last row last column and press the ENTER key Em Events Use the check boxes to toggle the listed sample valves ON or OFF Double click a given table cell or use one of the edit function buttons to make your changes Some table cells will change into pull down menus when selected Choose your data from the pull down menu provided JULY 2010 Timed Events 5 18 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 To sort data based on time click the Sat button for the corresponding table 6 Click the _ button to accept your changes and return to the main windo
334. rnal modem s serial port Figure 5 3 GC DB 9 Port to External Modem DB 25 Port 5 18 2 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB 25 To make an RS 232 serial connection between one of the Phoenix Plug serial ports of the GC and an external modem with DB 25 serial port you will need to manufacture the cable and its DB 25 male plug cable end as illustrated in Figure 5 4 JULY 2010 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB 25 5 78 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 cable end 1 13 9 RI 22 RI out 8 CTS 5 CTS out 7 RTS GBDSR 6 DSR out 4 5 GROUND 7 GROUND 4 DTR 3 RxD 3 RxD out 2 TxD 2 TxD in 1 RLSD DCD GC Male DB 25 plug for connecting Phoenix Plug to external modem s serial port Figure 5 4 Phoenix Plug Port to External Modem DB 25 Port 5 18 3 Com ID The GC Controller Com ID is usually preset at the factory and defined by the DIP switch settings on the controller system interface board Five switches are reserved for defining the Com ID therefore Com ID values range from 1 to 31 Normally it is not necessary to change the Com ID value to anything other than 0 Setting the Com ID to zero allows the MON2000 software to automatically recognize the Com ID defined by the controller DIP switches When connected MON2000 displays the controller DIP setting as the Com ID in the main window titlebar See Table 5 15 for more informati
335. roller remove the cover from the GC Controller housing to expose the GC Controller Terminal Board for field wiring For the rack mount Controller the rear of the enclosure is open it allows access for most field wiring procedures without removing the enclosure CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 67 4 Connect a custom made serial line cable for RS 232 serial transmission from the serial port of the external modem to an available serial port on the GC Controller Terminal Board for field wiring Special hardware modifications may be needed when operating an external GC modem from the GC serial ports 3 or 4 COM3 or COMA as follows DE 20782 see drawing addendum of Model 500 Gas Chromatograph System Hardware Reference Manual P N 3 9000 537 Transient protection modules M7 and or M4 located on the back side of the GC Controller Terminal Board for field wiring may need replacement with the transient protection modules for RS 232 signals P N 3 2350 027 Note that M4 serves COM3 and M7 serves COMMA Make note of the serial port number you choose for connection You will need this information later to make appropriate software settings Use an RS 232 serial cable no longer than 50 feet Longer distances may result in spurious loss or corruption of transmitted data See Section 5 17 for details of GC Controller serial port connectivity 1 e port loca
336. row values to the default settings ENTER Add a blank item or row to selected table Activate the default control element e g the OK button in current window ESC Exit application or active window without saving data F1 Access context sensitive help topic INSERT Toggle between insert and type over mode 1n selected cell Insert a new row above the highlighted row SHIFT TAB Move to previous control element e g button or data field in window see TAB JULY 2010 description Shortcut to Save or Print Data 3 10 GETTING STARTED MON2000 Table 3 1 Frequently Used Keystrokes Continued Keystroke Action SPACE Toggle settings via radio buttons or check boxes TAB Move to next control element e g button in window use File gt Program Settings see Section 2 16 2 to use TAB key to move to next data field Table 3 2 Application Specific Function Keys Function Action Key F2 Start Auto Sequence These keystrokes are available from the main menu only Function key definitions will change per the active dialog function Starts the Auto Sequencing function see Section 4 1 F3 Halt Halts the GC program e g an analysis run at the end of the current cycle see Section 4 3 F5 Edit TEVs Displays the Timed Event Table TEV per specified stream see Section 5 3 F6 Edit CDTs Displays the Component Data Table CDT per specified stream see Section 5 2 F7 View Current CGM Displays the c
337. s Etan Print Data Edit Template Hel Use template to decode logs Help Repeat Count 1 Hard Soft Enors gg we Input Output 10 2 ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS Use the following instructions to configure the desired communications settings If you are accessing WinMB via MON2000 WinMB defaults to the same communications and serial port settings as those set for MON2000 To set up a WinMB specific configuration see Section 10 2 3 Establishing Communications JULY 2010 MON2000 MODBUS TEST 10 3 10 2 1 Comparison of Modbus Protocols MON2000 software and the WinMB program accommodate two different Modbus protocols SIM_2251 and User_Modbus For each protocol separate Modbus registers are reserved Thus some settings for MON2000 and WinMB depend on which Modbus protocol is used The protocol you need depends ultimately on the hardware used for data acquisition from the GC Controller Modbus register contents The following comparison should help clarify the differences between these protocols as well as the utility of each Table 10 1 Comparison of SIM_2251 and User_Modbus Protocols SIM 2251 serial slave port modified protocol that allows floating point numbers to be transmitted over Modbus via 2251 emulation slave type User Modbus serial slave port standard Gould protocol that accommodates PLC Emulation LO HI PLC LH most register contents are predefi
338. s JULY 2010 MON2000 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 43 2 13 CONVERSION PROCESS Use the following process to retrofit a 2850 GC Controller to a 2350A GC Controller 1 At the GC Controller site remove the Controller enclosure s front panel SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller make certain the power supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected Observe all safety precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death JULY 2010 a For the explosion proof Controller the front panel is secured by 16 screws Remove those screws first b Then carefully lower the front panel on its bottom hinges The front panel is heavy so make sure it does not drop and cause damage c For the rack mount Controller the rear of the enclosure is open it allows access for most field wiring procedures without removing the enclosure Locate the GC Controller s Terminal Board for Field Wiring TB The TB is attached to the GC Controller s card cage assembly facing the enclosure s front panel In the rack mount Controller the TB faces outward toward the rear of the enclosure Loosen the six screws that secure the TB Then unplug the TB from its connections at the back top of the board Conversion Process 2 44 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 4 Lower the
339. s asked to provide information as indicated on the following page entitled Customer Repair Report For product returns from locations outside the United States it will be necessary for you to obtain the import consignment address so that DMS s customs broker can handle the importation with the U S Customs Service DMS offers both on call and contract maintenance service designed to afford single source responsibility for all its products DMS reserves the right to make changes at any time to any product to improve its design and to insure the best available product This page is intentionally left blank CUSTOMER REPAIR REPORT FOR SERVICE COMPLETE THIS FORM AND RETURN IT ALONG WITH THE AFFECTED EQUIPMENT TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW COMPANY NAME TECHNICAL CONTACT PHONE REPAIR P O IF WARRANTY UNIT S N INVOICE ADDRESS SHIPPING ADDRESS RETURN SHIPPING METHOD EQUIPMENT MODEL S N FAILURE DATE DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM WHAT WAS HAPPENING AT TIME OF FAILURE ADDITIONAL COMMENTS REPORT PREPARED BY TITLE IF YOU REQUIRE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE PLEASE FAX OR WRITE THE CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT AT DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES DIVISION OF EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT PHONE 713 827 6314 ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE FAX 713 827 6312 11100 BRITTMOORE PARK DRIVE HOUSTON TEXAS 77041 FOR FASTEST
340. s for the 2350A GC Controller 1 Obtain the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway addresses numbers for the Target 2350A GC Controller from your supervisor or Information Technology Department If the controller has never been configured for Ethernet communications logon to the Model 500 GC using either the Direct Connect option or connect remotely via a Modem 2 Use the Application gt TCP IP menu to Application access this function EIU Component Data F6 Timed Events F5 3 The TCP IP dialog appears delo Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Device ID 1 Cancel Temperature control Serial Ports TCPHIP Selection field For Help press F1 4 Go to the Use DHCP Specify an IP Address field and select Specify an IP Address 5 Inthe JP Address field enter the IP Address number obtained from your Supervisor or the Information Technology Department Ethernet TCP IP Settings JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 Click the INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 63 In the Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address number obtained from your Supervisor or the Information Technology Department In the Gateway Address field enter the Gateway Address number obtained from your Supervisor or the Information Technology Department 1 button to apply
341. s i 056 o meme 2 1 variatie average resor yon oo ss o megr 2 1 variable average eset monh ooo ose o mee 2 f 1 n oos9 o megr 2 1 variante average reset ou 000000000 oso o megr 2 1 er JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List F 16 MODBUS REG LIST FOR 2350A GC MON2000 This page is intentionally left blank User Modbus Register List JULY 2010 WARRANTY CLAIM PROCEDURES To make a warranty claim you the Purchaser must 1 Provide Daniel Measurement and Control Inc or Rosemount Analytical Inc with proof of the Date of Purchase and proof of the Date of Shipment of the product in question Return the product to Daniel Measurement Services DMS within 12 months of the date of original shipment of the product or within 18 months of the date of original shipment of the product to destinations outside of the United States The Purchaser must prepay any shipping charges In addition the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any product shipped for return and assumes the risk of loss of the product during shipment To obtain warranty service or to locate the nearest DMS office sales office or service center call 713 827 6314 fax a request to 713 827 6312 or write to Daniel Measurement Services 11100 Brittmore Park Drive Houston Texas 77041 You can also contact DMS via www emersonprocess com daniel When contacting DMS for product service the Purchaser i
342. se the Variables pull down menu To select a stream or component click the appropriate cell and use the pull down menu to choose the desired stream component Enter any constant values in the Value 1 and Value 2 cells b Click the 1 button to accept your changes and return to the User Defined Calculation dialog Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the User Defined Calculation dialog 5 Click the j button to accept your new or edited calculation and return to the main window Cancel Click the button to abort and return to the main window LIMIT ALARMS Use this function to set threshold limits for GC analysis data When a limit is exceeded an alarm is activated and logged See Section 8 3 for information on Alarm Logs Note that Modbus Registers assigned to alarms are application specific Limit Alarms 5 28 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 1 Use the Application gt Limit Alarms menu to access this function 2 The Limit Alarms dialog appears Limit Alarms x Variable Stream Component Discrete Output 1 Stream 1 1 C6 47 35 17 2 Stream 2 11 ETHANE 3 Stream 3 11 1 1 1 2 am 2 3 i BUTANE 1 iu NEOPENTANE 1 iPENTANE 1 nPENTANE 1 8 Stream 8 NITROGEN 1 8 Stream 8 9 METHANE 1 8 Stream 8 10 CARBON DIOXIDE 1 8 Stream 8 11 ETHANE 1 0 Not used Naused 0 Notused Naued Not used Naued Not used Copy S F5
343. se the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced C Ill CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 L JCGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2 Click the Bese button The Edit Description dialog appears Edit Description Lx This is the last CGM saved from 1st shift prior to performing routine maintenance 3 Type the desired statement s 4 Press the ENTER key to accept this description Use the X button or press the ESC key to exit this dialog without accepting your entry 5 Click the Save button to save this description with the chromatogram file Entering a Description JULY 2010 MON2000 The selected GC Archive chromatogram must be from a good calibration gas run JULY 2010 6 6 7 6 6 8 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6 19 Forcing a Calibration Use the Forced Cal function to calibrate the GC using the raw data and stream number for the selected GC Archive chromatogram The results are stored in the CDT under the corresponding stream number To perform a forced calibration 1 Use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Cal E CGM 2 2350A Stream 1 Det 1 3 29 2001 8 13 51 AM LAST cgm Cur All Save Crp W CGM 1 2350A Stream 1 Det 1
344. se to span midpoint e g 3 20 Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and reselect the channel being calibrated 21 Set the Fixed Var parameter to Var and the Fixed Value to 0 0 changes i button to accept your The voltage output could change slightly from time to time and the MON2000 software will now maintain the correct span Calibrating by Percentages JULY 2010 MON2000 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 1 APPENDIX E UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND E 1 When halted GC runs have finished the status for Detector 1 mode will indicate Idle see GC Status bar see Section 3 3 E 2 JULY 2010 2350 EPROMS To upgrade the Model 500 2350A GC software and the 2350 EPROMIs perform all steps in the order they appear in this appendix Before beginning the upgrade procedure ensure that you have identified which standard i e factory released application file was used to form the current user application for this GC See Section E 10 for more information on standard applications CONNECT TO GC AND HALT ANALYSIS 1 Ensure that the MON2000 software is running and you are connected to the GC that is to be upgraded Use the File gt Connect menu to access this function See Section 2 10 1 for more information 2 Use MON2000 to halt any ongoing analysis or calibration runs Use the Control gt Halt menu to access this function See Section 4 3 for more information O
345. seline constant but termination is defined subsequently where the detector output is less than the same constant Sequences of fused peaks are also automatically handled This is done by testing each termination point to see if the region immediately following it satisfies the criteria of a baseline A baseline region must have a slope detector value less than the magnitude of the baseline constant for a number of sequential points When a baseline region is found this terminates a sequence of peaks A zero reference line for peak height and area determination is established by extending a line from the point of the onset of the peak sequence to the point of the termination The values of these two points are found by averaging the four integrated points just prior to the onset point and just after the termination points respectively Peak Detection C 4 DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 The zero reference line will in general be non horizontal and thus compensates for any linear drift in the system from the time the peak sequence starts until it ends In a single peak situation peak area is the area of the component peak between the curve and the zero reference line The peak height is the distance from the zero reference line to the maximum point on the component curve The value and location of the maximum point is determined from quadratic interpolation through the three highest points at the peak of the discrete valued curve s
346. set 18 1 18 sysalarm_set 19 1 19 sysalarm_set 20 1 20 sysalarm_set 21 1 21 sysalarm_set 22 1 22 sysalarm_set 23 1 23 sysalarm_set 24 1 24 sysalarm_set 25 1 25 sysalarm set 26 1 26 sysalam set 27 1 27 sysalam set 28 1 28 sysalarm set 29 1 29 sysalam set 30 1 30 sysalarm set 31 1 31 sysalarm set 32 1 32 sysalarm set 33 i 33 sysalarm set 34 34 sysalarm_set 35 1 35 sysalarm_set 36 1 36 sysalarm_set 37 1 37 sysalarm_set 38 1 38 sysalarm_set 39 1 39 sysalarm_set 40 i A0 sysalarm set 41 1 JULY 2010 Application Checksum Failure ROM Checksum Failure RAM Diagnostics Failure A D Converter Failure Detector Oven Failure Liquid Sample Valve Heater Failure Sample System Oven Failure Catalytic Converter Failure Heater 5 Failure Heater 6 Failure Heater 1 Controller Failure Heater 2 Controller Failure Heater 3 Controller Failure Heater 4 Controller Failure Heater 5 Controller Failure Heater 6 Controller Failure FID Flame out Warmstart Calibration Failure Valve Timing Failure Excess Response Factor Deviation M200 Invalid Non Volatile Data M200 Invalid A Module Data M200 Invalid B Module Data M200 Bad Options M200 Stack Overflow M200 Hardware Shutdown M200 Synchronization Failure Preamp Input 1 Out of Range Preamp Input 2 Out of Range Preamp Input 3 Out of Range Preamp Input 4 Out of Range Preamp Failure Analog Output Analog Output Analog Output Analog Output Analog Output Analog Output Analog Output Analog
347. st Up to three 3 optional base pressures can be used for GC analysis calculations These optional base pressure values are entered via the Streams function see Section 5 8 Results Opt Base Press A group of 12 GC analysis calculations can be used to reflect the use of different base pressures See Section C 3 for more information To assign the Optional Base Pressure variable 1 Verify the values for optional base pressures Application Reports Logs Chre that have already been entered System Component Data F6 imed e a Use the Application gt Streams menu to isis ER access this function Calculations Limit Alarms b The Streams dialog box displays Discrete Alarms Streams sj E x Analog Inputs n Analog Outputs Name Ti PSIA F Opt Pres 1 Opt Pres 2 Opt Pres 3 Discrete Inputs a Discrete Outputs Valves Temper ontral ADC7O0 p Serial Ports TCP IP Baseline Values F2 Cancel Alphanumeric field For Help press F1 Setting Optional Base Pressures JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 87 MON2000 c Scroll to the Opt Press columns and note these values along with the corresponding optional pressure and stream number s d If you wish to enter different pressure values do so now and then click the l button to accept your changes Otherwise click the Cancel button to ret
348. ster MON2000 Date Time Format Poll Command Registers JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 31 MON2000 c For the standard registers the values returned are stored in a single record in the output file following the Date and Time when the registers are polled the Starting Register and Number of Registers d For SIM_2251 registers 701 999 one record is stored in the output file for each record retrieved with fields within the record starting the date and time when the record is polled starting Register 701 999 Record Number and the data for the record 5 From the Output File table enter edit the filename and file format txt dat or csv for the Registers Output file The DAT file format is for customized chroma data 6 Click the OK button to apply the configuration changes 7 MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes dialog Q2 Save changes e 8 Click the Yes button to write the changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window Or 9 Click the button to discard your changes and return to the Configuration for Data Collection window JULY 2010 Poll Command Registers 9 32 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING MON2000 9 2 19 Poll Command Reports The archived analysis reports as viewable under MON2000 when connected to a controller from the Reports gt Archived Data gt View Data menu can be retr
349. t i GPA2145 94 LVpercent liquid volume percent from Equation C 18 JULY 2010 Heating Value Calculations C 16 gt DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 Equation C 20 Liquid Density NOTICE All components on sample k must be measured to gt LV LD calculate Liquid Density LD 9 where LD liquid density of total sample in pounds per gallon LD liquid density of component GPA 2145 94 LV liquid volume percent Equation C 21 Gas Density GD RD 76 4976 where GD gas density in Ib 1000 ft RD relative density relative to air 76 4976 density of air at 14 73 PSIA and 60 F in 1b 1000 ft Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 ResponseFactor DATA COMPUTATIONS C 17 C 4 3 Multi Level Calibration The properties of each gas component can be viewed using the Component Data menu Included with the component properties in the Component Data Table are four coefficients labeled Multi Level Calib a b c and d for each component If these parameters are all zero then linear calibration 1s used See Section C 3 1 for the response factor calculations If any of these parameters have a value other than zero then multi level or polynomial calibration is used for that component The response factors are then calculated as Equation C 22 Multi Level Calibration aP bP cP d CalibrationConcentration mol where peak size Area or Height as selec
350. t Averages menu if connected to GC controller If you are using a Direct Connection rather than an Ethernet Connection the reading process could take a long time 1 From the Configuration for Data Collection window select the Poll command General Configuration List of Commands Commands Type Time GC Entry 1 Pol Averages 2 Press the RIGHT ARROW key or click in the Type field then select Averages from the pull down list 3 Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your keyboard or left click the mouse in the Command Description field Enter a description for the Averages command Poll Command Averages JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 17 MON2000 4 Click the Poll Command Details button and the Poll Command Averages dialog box displays Poll Command Averages x Averages Configuration Average Max Result Grouping Output Type CA Average Single BEES v Complete Output Output File Average Single Record Filename File Format Text txb Stream 5 From the Averages Configuration dialog for a single record select Average Single Record If the Average Single Record is selected only the average values are included in the output file Result Grouping Output Type Average Single Record JULY 2010 Poll Command Averages 9 18 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING If Complete Output Complete Output is selected click the check boxes to se
351. t HeatVal Sup Dry MJ m3 HeatVal Sup Sat MJ m3 HeatVal Sup Act MJ m3 HeatVal Inf Dry MJ m3 HeatVal Inf Sat MJ m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Inf Act MJ m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Sup Dry MJ kg N N N N N N N N HeatVal Inf Dry MJ kg N N N N N N N N HeatVal Sup Dry Kc m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Sup Sat Kc m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Sup Act Kc m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Inf Dry Kc m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Inf Sat Kc m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Inf Act Kc m3 N N N N N N N N HeatVal Sup Dry Kc kg N N N N N N N N HeatVal Inf Dry Kc kg N N N N N N N N Metric Rel Dens Lqd N N N N N N N N Metric Gas Density N N N N N N N N Metric Lqd Density N N N N N N N N kok kok kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk ck kk kk kk kk ck kCk ck ck ck ck kCk ck kk ck kCk ck ck ck ck kk k kk ck k ck ck kk ck k ck ck k ck k k ck k k kk kk k Calculation Average Report from 2350 001 2350 001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 Resets Time 00 00 Weekday Sun Day of Month 1 No Variable Name Se wc Hourly No entries found 24 Hour No entries found Weekly No entries found Monthly No entries found Variable No entries found KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Calculation User Defined Report from 2350_001 2350_001 BIN 6 2 2000 15 02 49 No Variable S C 1 label 1 Avg Molecular Weight
352. t Command Dea se o J ca 5 6 T Use the Add Insert Delete Poll Command Details buttons to modify the Data Collection configuration or Polling Control file When you have finished modifying the file click the sae button to apply the changes The Save Polling Control File dialog appears 21x Save in Cul BIN A lim EJ a AutoPollTest_051004 apc 8 AutoPollTest_new_12 apc 8 AutoPollTest a AutoPollTest 2 051004 apc a AutoPollTest new 13 apc a AutoPollTest autoPoliTest 1 new ape ja AutoPollTest new 2 apc a AutoPollTest a AutoPollTest new 1 apc ja AutoPollTest new 3 apc la AutoPollTest a AutoPollTest new 10 apc a AutoPollTest new 4 apc is AutoPollTest new 11 apc ja AutoPoliTest new 5 apc Save as type Poling Control File apc Cancel VA File name AutoPaliTest new 5 apc Open an Existing Polling Control File JULY 2010 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION AUTO POLLING 9 9 MON2000 8 A Save Polling Control message prompts you to replace the exiting file or rename the Polling Control file apc file Click the Yes button to replace the existing file Or 9 Click the changes j button to discard your 9 2 3 Await Command This command instructs the auto sequencing module to wait for a specific time of day prior to processing the commands in the file The user enters the desired time of day in hours and m
353. t to Override will make the GC Controller ignore the time change from Standard to Daylight Savings 1 e Standard Time will remain 3 Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window System JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 3 MON2000 Table 5 1 Description of Items in System Dialog Item Function Edit Stream Sequence Defines the order of stream analysis for Detector 1 V Stream Sequence 2 Defines the order of stream analysis for Detector 2 only available with selected hardware Note that this item is not available in all GC applica tions Aux Stream Sequence Defines the auxiliary order of stream analysis for Detector 1 Can be used to run an alternative stream sequence when a Discrete Input is set see Section 5 11 for detailed instructions Note that this item is not available in all GC applica tions Aux Stream Sequence 2 Additional alternative stream sequence provided for J second detector in dual detector applications Auxiliary order of stream analysis for Detector 2 Can be used to run an alternative stream sequence when a Discrete Input is set see Section 5 11 for detailed instructions Note that this item is not available in all GC applica tions Analyzer Name Defines the GC unit name that appears in the status V bar of the main window when connected to the GC Con tro
354. te analog input used with auxiliary analyzer RT Percent Dev maximum acceptable percentage of deviation of V the new retention time from the current retention time RT Secs Dev maximum acceptable deviation time in seconds of the new retention time from the current retention time RT Update Method determines when component retention time will be updated Select Analysis to update after each run Select Calib to update only during final calibration run Resp Factor Dev maximum acceptable percent deviation between the new response factor and the current response factor Total Concentration JULY 2010 total concentration of all components Component Data 5 10 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 See Table 5 2 an asterisk in the column heading indicates a column that contains standard component values If any of these values is modified the corresponding component becomes non standard i e user defined It is not recommended that you edit a standard component value 5 2 1 Select Standard Component s To select standard component s to be used by the displayed CDT 1 Select the Component cell where you want the new component 2 Click the STD Comps F2 button or press the F2 key to access the Standard Components menu 3 The Standard Components menu appears Double click the selected component to add it to the CDT The component is automatically inserted into the selected
355. ted by the Operator from average calibration runs Coefficients Calculated Offline A B C andD Entered after Multi Level Calibration using several calibration gases typically seven gases 1 Note If the coefficient values are correct values the response factor will be close to one Multi Level Calibration C 18 C 4 4 mole neoC5 mole Propane DATA COMPUTATIONS MON2000 The mole value in the sample gas is then calculated as Equation C 23 Mole Value aP bP cP d Mole responsefactor where peak size measured in Sample Gas Indirect Calibration Component gases which are NOT found in the calibration gas but may be found in the sample gas can be assigned a response factor which is a fixed multiple the Relative Response Factor to a Reference Component that IS found in the calibration gas The Relative Response Factors and Reference Component Values are included in the Component Data Table following the Multi Level Calibration coefficients see Appendix B If the Reference Component is None then normal direct calibration is used If the Reference Component is defined e g Propane then the mole 6 value for the indirect component e g neoC5 is calculated as Equation C 24 Mole Value Indirect Component Pls RRFneoCS5 P Propane Indirect Calibration JULY 2010 DATA COMPUTATIONS C 19 MON2000 where P peak size RRF Relative Response Factor JULY 2010 In
356. tep 2 of 2 screen displays Transfer License Out Step 2 of 2 Congratulations The license has been successfully transferred to the floppy disk Now take the floppy disk back to the original computer and complete the transfer Press Finish to continue Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 13 MON2000 11 Click Finish MON2000 PLUS on the source computer is no longer licensed l MON2000 PLUS License Configuration m Program License Help Program not authorized Site Code 6839 8886 30D4 1890 49 e Site Key MON2000 PLUS Thank you for your interest in MON2000 PLUS To obtain a license please click here GC CSCi emersonprocess com Please include the following with your authorization request 1 Your contact information 2 Your Company name 3 Your Site Code 4 Your purchase order no if available Once you receive your Site Key you can eanble MON2000 PLUS by 12 Remove the removeable storage medium from the source computer and reinsert it into targeted computer JULY 2010 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License 7 2 14 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 13 On the targeted computer click Next on the Transfer License In Step 2 of 3 screen The Transfer License In Step 8 of 3 screen displays Transfer License In Step 3 of 3 Congratulations The license has been successfully transferred Press Finish to continue
357. ter Quantity value Result Read Quantity fields i e the number of fields specified by the Quantity setting from the specified Record No of the register Data Addr log template Enter Record No value Read all fields associated with the Record No Enter Data Addr value Enter 0 for the Record No value Read all fields in all records for the specified log register Data Addr To verify which record number should be entered consult the Modbus specifications for your device For more information on GC Modbus registers see Appendix F 4 Click the Edit Template button The Template File dialog appears with a new template displayed File C Program FilesXDaniel Industries IncXDaniel Modbus Test Program Ed Template Type 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits Lo si Unsigned Integer 16 bits Integer 32 bits Float Open Save As AutoReset Cancel Laj JULY 2010 Integer l6 bits Integer 16 bits z Use Template Mixed Data Types 10 12 MODBUS TEST MON2000 5 To open an existing template file click the Open button The Select Template Configuration File dialog appears Select Template Configuration File 21x Look in a Daniel Modbus Test Program la ei j mg Data Fiename EA Files of type AN Files kI yi Cancel Use the directory tree to locate the desired file e g temp1 cfg highlight
358. ters MON2000 c Input the new Zero Scale or Full Scale values as appropriate To convert floating point data to a whole integer each scale definition follows this algorithm R R R AZ integer Gen Dy 3077 where Rp range Full Scale 4095 R range Zero Scale 0 Sr scale Full 100 S scale Zero 0 Dip data floating pt 97 13 from Methane d Click the button to accept your changes and return to the Registers dialog Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the Registers dialog JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 c Click the APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 85 11 To check for conflicting Modbus register assignments button or press the F6 key b MON2000 displays the first encountered error MON2000 ZAN Bad register number for row 2 For this example you would change the register number for Row 2 You would then verify all subsequent register numbers as well 1 button to accept your changes and return to the Serial Ports dialog MON2000 automatically checks for conflicting Modbus register assignments Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the Serial Ports dialog Registers 5 86 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 5 18 5 Setting Optional Base Pressures As discussed in Section 5 18 4 you can assign GC analysis variables to various Modbus registers Follow the procedure below to add the Optional Base Pressure variable to the Registers Li
359. that allows floating point numbers to be transmitted over Modbus via 2251 emulation slave type The standard Gould Modbus protocol that accommodates PLC Emulation LO HI Nearly all register contents are predefined a few 9000 series registers can be user defined i e read write Boolean coils are predefined Numeric registers are user defined Variables assigned to registers can be listed in contents of a PC Config Report for instructions see Section 2 16 3 for an example report see Appendix A For more detail about register contents see Section F 2 1 When using the Modbus Test software set Register Mode to DANIEL to view register contents see Section 10 2 3 F 1 1 NOTES ON USER MODBUS Variables assigned to registers can be listed in contents of a PC Config Report for instructions see Section 2 16 3 for an example report see Appendix A Boolean coils contents also listed in Section F 2 When using the Modbus Test software set Register Mode to PLC LH to view register contents see Section 10 2 3 Section F 2 lists only variables included in the User_Modbus Boolean Modbus registers These registers are not user defined and primarily contain alarm flags possibly useful for debugging purposes To use the Modbus Test software to view the contents of these registers you will need to set the Function parameter to 1 Read Coil See Section 10 2 through Section 10 4 for details
360. the date of shipment or completion of the Services Products purchased by Seller from a third party for resale to Buyer Resale Products shall carry only the warranty extended by the original manufacturer Buyer agrees that Seller has no liability for Resale Products beyond making a reasonable commercial effort to arrange for procurement and shipping of the Resale Products If Buyer discovers any warranty defects and notifies Seller thereof in writing during the applicable warranty period Seller shall at its option promptly correct any errors that are found by Seller in the firmware or Services or repair or replace F O B point of manufacture that portion of the Goods or firmware found by Seller to be defective or refund the purchase price of the defective portion of the Goods Services All replacements or repairs necessitated by inadequate maintenance normal wear and usage unsuitable power sources unsuitable environmental conditions accident misuse improper installation modification repair storage or handling or any other cause not the fault of Seller are not covered by this limited warranty and shall be at Buyer s expense Seller shall not be obligated to pay any costs or charges incurred by Buyer or any other party except as may be agreed upon in writing in advance by an authorized Seller rep resentative All costs of dismantling reinstallation and freight and the time and expenses of Seller s personnel for site travel and diagnosis unde
361. the source of the analog input signal c Set the anticipated Full Value d Click the Auto Cal F3 button or press the F3 key You can abort this process at any time by clicking the No button Analog Inputs JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 47 4 The Zero Scale Adjustment dialog appears MON2000 1 Is Al 1 set to zero scale value Click the MON2000 accepts a Zero Scale calibration value that is higher than the Full Scale value A higher Zero Scale value can be useful in the applications that require an inverse display or record of analog signal levels 2350A GC Controllers and Model 700 units support up to 4 Analog channels button to continue The Full Scale Adjustment dialog appears Adjust the Analog Input to its Full Scale value MON2000 1 Is Al 1 set to full scale value Click the Yes button to continue MON2000 verifies that the recorded values are acceptable A confirmation dialog displays MON2000 Q Save these values to be written to the GC controller when finished in this screen Zero Scale 79 2051 Full Scale 90 5207 E Click the changes j button to accept your Click the No button to cancel and return to the Analog Input dialog Analog Inputs 5 48 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 7 To perform a GRI Gain Ratio Index calculation click the GRl Zero F4 button or N
362. ther Detector 1 Detector 2 or Both 3 MON2000 plots the archived chromatogram The corresponding data is dynamically displayed in the provided legends Use the Graph and Chromatogram functions to manipulate the display To From GC Archive 6 4 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER MON2000 zoom in on a particular point click and drag your mouse over that area repeat as necessary Use the Restore State or Zoom Out options from the right click menu see Section 6 9 to return to the original display You can display up to 8 chromatograms at one time Each chromatogram is color coded use the Chromatogram pull down menu to select a specific chromatogram Chromatogram Edit Results Desc Save Remove Forced Cal E CGM 5 Model 500 2 Det 2 2 27 2001 8 47 08 AM todav cam ME 500 Stream 2 Det 1 6 13 2002 2 0 ST cgm W CGM 2 Model 500 Stream 1 Det 1 6 5 2001 10 02 41 AM 551 60501 cam E CGM 3 Model 500 Stream 3 Det 1 6 13 2002 2 12 58 PM cam red6 13 02 cgm W CGM 4 Model 500 SNGL Stream 1 Det 1 8 10 2001 12 47 36 PM 81001 cgm Model 500 22 Det 2 2 27 2001 8 47 08 AM today cgm Cur All Save Cmp w 6 2 3 From File on Disk To view a chromatogram trace from a file previously saved to disk 1 Click the PE Eile button The Open Chromatogram File dialog appears Look in a save x ek E3 A 022701 cgm P ssi 60501 cam kd o30901 cam El 551 cam2 cam
363. ting an Auto BTU Start Up Run 4 7 4 6 2 Starting a Valve Timing Run 4 12 4 7 GC Time lseessseesssee enne nnne nnn nnns 4 13 4 7 1 View GC Time ssessseeen m 4 13 4 4 2 SetGC Timeless cernere redeas REA YER 4 14 4 8 Stop NOW dee sidecases san aksan baka cece ka kwak pwan Anak 4 15 APPLICATION 5 1 SYST M fk kaki ki ka ki a n l e l ka a a e ki a l in a 5 1 FUNCTIONS 5 2 Component Data eese nennen 5 6 5 2 1 Select Standard Component s 5 10 5 2 2 Select Standard Values sssssss 5 11 5 2 3 Update Standard Component s 5 11 5 2 4 View Raw Data cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaees 5 12 5 2 5 Sort Retention Time esee 5 14 5 3 Timed Events eese 5 14 Timed Events Description ussuesss 5 14 Wale EVeits MM 5 15 integrati n EVBHhES eee ms 5 15 Spectrum Gain Events cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 16 5 4 User Defined teke ok akote koken kon re nexus 5 19 BAT TU ST E ke kaka on kak deran t ak a dak aa 5 19 5 4 2 Selection cccccceee eee ateesensetoensesvsenoseoesoooe 5 20 5h43 Text Strings iver cia ere tx is rena ns kok 5 20 5 5 Calculations ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaenaeeees 5 21 WET COMM serii errore ea stead bier hex ea quede eua nd 5 21 5 5 2 Averages ics ie RRRATERRR ERMRURERERRRRERRRERUR 5 2
364. tion such as the software motre version number copyright date and the call query ratio 1 Use the Help gt About MON2000 menu to access this dialog JULY 2010 Operating Modes for Model 700 3 20 GETTING STARTED MON2000 2 MON2000 appears the About MON2000 dialog About MON2000 es EMERSON MON2000 Version 2 46 025 Process Management Copyright C 2002 Emerson Process Management All rights reserved Registration information Name Call query ratio 1 gt retries fi Company Es TAPI version 0 0 Canada Europe USA Phone 713 827 6314 Fax 713 827 6312 E mail tech service emersonprocess com http www emersonprocess com daniel service The Call Query Ratio estimates the quality of your serial communications If this ratio is less than or equal to 0 5 then the connection is problematic The maximum value of 1 indicates a good connection The TAPI version represents the Telephony API software MON2000 accesses for dial up 1 e remote communications 3 Click the button to exit and return to the main window About MON2000 JULY 2010 MON2000 Coo view Her Single Stream Y Halt F3 Calibration Baseline Run Valve Timing GC Time Stop Now Use the Report Display option in the Reports menu to view the results of the Auto Sequence function JULY 2010 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 1 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 1 The options in the C
365. tion to stop the current operation mode at the end of the run in progress 1 Use the Control gt Halt menu or press the F3 key to access this function MON2000 prompts you to confirm your selection MON2000 1 Halt analysis No Click the Yes button to proceed Click the No button to abort and return to the main window After the current run finishes the function stops and Idle appears in the status bar Halt 4 4 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 4 4 CALIBRATION Use this function to calibrate the GC unit ET view ose i Single Stream Calibration runs are determined by the CDT Ba F3 alibration and Streams settings See Section 5 2 and poin Section 5 8 for detailed instructions on howto peta n edit these settings Stop Now 1 Use the Control Calibration menu to access this function If the GC unit is in Auto Sequence mode calibration will not start until 2 or more analysis runs have been completed This delay is required to complete the current analysis and the analysis of the stream currently purging through the valve 2 The Start Calibration dialog appears Stream N M Purge stream for 60 seconds Calibration type Normal C Forced Cancel MON2000 displays the stream to be used for the calibration To select which stream is used for NOTICE calibration See Section 5 8 N OTI CE 3 Click the Purge check box to set the purging See Section 7 1 to
366. tions pinouts connector types gender cabling etc 5 Connect a telephone line from wall phone jack 1f available to the phone jack for the external modem 6 Set external modem for Auto Answer see external modem user manual Hardware Setup 2 68 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 2 16 2 Select Program Settings File Application Reports Logs Chron Connect This function allows you to configure where database GC applications and Modbus Test sed program files are stored Offine Edit GC Directory Users 1 Use the File gt Program Settings menu to Change Administrator Password access this function Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 m Update MON2000 xj 5 Recent File 2 The Program Settings dialog appears Folders Saved Data In pere Exit Database esn n GC Applications Inn ER Chromatogram file extension fcgm IV Editing replaces existing text in tables IV Prompt to confirm discard changes IV Prompt to confirm save changes Iv Synchronize GC controller s time to PC on download IV Tab from spreadsheet to next control IV Enable display in PPM 3 To use a Chromatogram file extension other than the default e g CGM or to select the location of saved data GC database and GC application files click in the Chromatogram file extension data field and type the desired file
367. to ON and click OK Note that setting the Option to OFF disables the delayed discrete alarm feature 3 Select Applications gt Discrete Alarms The Discrete Alarms window displays Discrete Alarms Discrete Input Discrete Output Alarm Text EB 3 D03 DelydDiscrete Alarm 1 Discrete Output 3 2 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Not used 0 Not used Selection Field For Help press F1 JULY 2010 Delayed Discrete Alarms 5 36 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 4 For the appropriate alarm select the discrete output that should be activated if the associated discrete input is closed By default discrete outputs 1 2 and 3 can be selected To make discrete output 4 available for selection do the following a Select Applications gt User Defined gt Selection The User Defined Selections window displays b Set EnableComAlarm to Disable c Select Applications gt Discrete Outputs The Discrete Outputs window displays d Set the Switch field for discrete output 4 to Auto To make discrete output 5 available for selection do the following a Select Applications gt User Defined gt Selection The User Defined Selections window displays b Set EnableCalMan to Disable c Select Applications gt Discrete Outputs The Discrete Outputs window displays d Set the Switch field for discrete output 5 to Auto All discrete inputs should be set to O Not used 5 Ent
368. tored in 2350A This interpolation technique is used both for peaks as well as valleys minimum points in fused peak sequences In the latter case lines are dropped from the interpolated valley points to the zero reference line to partition the fused peak areas into individual peaks The use of quadratic interpolation improves both area and height calculation accuracy and eliminates the effects of variations in the integration factor on these calculations While calibrating the controller may run several analyses of the calibration stream Using entries from an example program five analyses would be run Since only the last three are to be averaged data from runs one and two are not saved Results are stored on the third run Data from runs four and five are added to that stored for run three Peak Detection JULY 2010 MON2000 Equation C 1 uses an external standard JULY 2010 C 3 C 3 1 HRF Arean Ht Cal DATA COMPUTATIONS C 5 ANALYSIS COMPUTATIONS There are two basic analysis algorithms included in the controller Area Analysis calculates area under component peak Peak Height Analysis measures height of component peak CONC ANALYSIS WITH RESPONSE FACTOR Calibration The concentration calculations discussed as follows require a unique response factor for each component in an analysis These factors may be manually entered by an operator or automatically calculated by calibratin
369. tput is set to the number entered for the Fixed Value Analog Output Dialog Description JULY 2010 MON2000 When defining a new analog output perform a calibration first to obtain accurate Zero and Full Adjustment values see Section 5 10 4 or Section 5 10 5 JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 51 Table 5 9 Description of Analog Output Settings Continued Setting Description Fixed Value analog output value used during fixed operation Zero Adjustment value used to correct Zero Scale Full Adjustment value used to correct Full Scale 3 Click the j button to accept your changes and return to the main window Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Analog Output Dialog Description 5 52 5 10 2 5 10 3 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS Changing a Variable To change a variable assignment click the appropriate Variable cell Use the provided pull down menu and click the desired variable to select it Changing the Bargraph Use this function to designate which AEM output analog signals can be used to drive the bargaph device inputs Each of the 16 available AEM output signals can be assigned to represent various GC analysis data variables To edit the variables and corresponding settings displayed by the bargraph 1 Click the Bararaph F5 button or press the F5 key 2 The Bargraph dialog appears 1 2 34 56 7 8310 Cancel Selection field
370. treams 5 42 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Table 5 5 Description of Calibration Stream Settings Continued Cal Setting Description Auto Cal Auto Base enable disable the automatic calibration and baseline run first check box sets the automatic calibration second check box sets the baseline run For the automatic calibration to work at least one stream switch valve event Strm Sw must be included in the corresponding TEV see Section 5 3 If the automatic baseline run is enabled the GC performs an additional calibra tion run before the calibration runs to be averaged without the calibration gas This run evaluates peaks caused by the GC valve action alone any peak areas found are subtracted from the subse quent analyses To view or print the baseline run results see Step 4 Disabling the Auto Base setting will delete existing CDT baseline data for the associated stream You can edit the following parameters for a defined stream used in GC calculations These parameters are also used for post analysis calculations that use stream specific base pressure and temperature values Note that these parameters are not applicable for every application Streams JULY 2010 MON2000 If a stream is not used you cannot access baseline data for that stream JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 43 Table 5 6 Description of GC Calculation Parameters Par Setting Description PSIA base temperat
371. troller settings to verify see Section 10 2 2 For direct connection to the GC Controller ensure that the Port setting is the same as the Com ID number of the serial port used Set Up Port via WinMB JULY 2010 MON2000 10 3 To access previous settings use the spin arrows to view and select Slave Addr 1 Ar Addr Function MODBUS TEST 10 7 GETTING MODBUS DATA Use the following steps to read or write register contents to the GC Controller or any other device See the following subsections for additional details Before retrieving data print a PC Config Report see Section 2 16 3 and check the Communication data for variable names assigned to the Modbus registers Data Addr pon pen Record No Any change is applied to the corresponding register value at each device Table 10 4 shows which function codes support the broadcast mode JULY 2010 1 In the Slave Addr data field type the Comm ID of the GC unit or other device WinMB will accept a slave address of 1 to 247 Enter 0 to use the broadcast mode In the broadcast mode WinMB polls all known devices Each device interprets this message as an instruction to read and take action however a response message may not be received by WinMB Getting Modbus Data 10 8 MODBUS TEST MON2000 2 Use the Function pull down menu to select the desired read or write option Table 10 4 Available Modbus Function Codes Function
372. trongly recommended that you use the Default CDT TEV When the Default CDT TEV checkbox is selected the Valve and CDT Component fields are read only 5 To use the GC s existing CDT TEV tables select the Configured CDT TEV checkbox Start Valve Timing Run Stream 2 Calibration Purge stream for 60 seconds Iv Auto BTU Start Up C Default CDT TEY Configured CDT TEV Valve CDT Component 2 7 n PENTANE 3 11 ETHANE Q0 0 Notused You can enter a valve number in the Valve field and select the component number from the drop down list of the CDT Component field in the table below the checkboxes The list of components are from the CDT of the corresponding calibration stream neo Pentane is not available in the CDT Component drop down list JULY 2010 Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run 4 10 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 6 To allow sample gas to flow through the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to beginning the first analysis click the Purge stream for 60 seconds check box It is strongly recommended that you check the Purge stream for 60 seconds check box 7 Click OK to begin the Auto BTU Start Up process When the process starts the GC Status window indicates that the GC is in Viv Timing mode MON2000 Online Edit GC Device ID 1 Modbus TCP 155 176 59 213 File Application Reports Logs Data Collection Chromatogram Control View Help tc 8 Blt dlh l or Help
373. un to assess chromatogram peaks caused by the GC valve action alone A baseline run is a calibration like run during which no calibration or sample gas is injected i e the valve is not fired Baseline Run 4 6 CONTROL FUNCTIONS MON2000 1 Use the Control gt Baseline Run menu to access this function If the GC unit is in Auto Sequence mode MON2000 prompts that the continuous analysis must be stopped Halt the analysis See Section 4 3 and wait for an Idle status Then continue initiating the baseline run 2 The Start Baseline Run dialog appears Stream MON2000 displays the stream to be used for the baseline run To select which stream is used for the baseline calibration See Section 5 8 3 Click the J button to continue Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Use the status bar to monitor the progress a of this function Use the Report Display option in the Reports menu to view the results of the Baseline Run function Baseline Run JULY 2010 MON2000 Control View Help Auto Sequence F2 Single Stream Halt F3 Calibration Baseline Run GC Time Stop Now JULY 2010 4 6 4 6 1 CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4 7 AUTO BTU START UP AND VALVE TIMING The Auto BTU Start Up process which takes about an hour to complete automatically performs the following sequence of tasks 1 Sets the timing for each valve 2 Matches all the
374. ure in PSIA or bar units BAR NOTICE To change the displayed system units see Section 5 1 for details deg F base temperature in degrees Fahrenheit deg C or Celsius Opt Pres 1 If compressibility is activated for a par Opt Pres 2 ticular stream Calculation Control Opt Pres 3 function see Section 5 5 1 up to 3 optional pressures can be defined to calculate additional post analysis data Only the base pressure can be edited The base temperature is a constant 6 F 15 C for all calculations 4 To view or print the baseline run results click the Baseline Values F2 button or press the F2 key The Baseline Values dialog appears Area Height Det 0 0005213 83 456 1 Cancel 5 Click the Cancel button to return to the main window Streams 5 44 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 9 ANALOG INPUTS This function allows you to assign identifying labels assign scale ranges calibrate analog inputs for zero and full Application System Component Data Timed Events User Defined MON2000 F6 FS Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs scale values pen Valves Temperature Gontrol Electrical current signals ranging from 4 to cia 20mA 10 are accepted as analog inputs To use the Analog Inputs function 1 Use the Application gt Analog Inputs menu to access this function 2 The Analog Inp
375. ure use MON2000 GC Offline edit Upload Application JULY 2010 MON2000 By default GC BOS files are stored in C GC APP folder JULY 2010 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 81 2 19 3 Upload BOS When connected to the GC this function allows you to upload the current BOS i e firmware file from the GC Controller to save for future download see Section 2 18 1 Use the File gt Offline Edit gt Upload BOS menu to access this function File Application Reports Logs Chron Connect Disconnect Download Upgrade Flash PG Config Report Offline Edit File Selection GC Directory Users Change Administrator Password Modbus Test Program Settings Print Setup Register MON2000 Update MON2000 Recent File Exit 2 The Save Uploaded GC BOS File dialog appears Save Uploaded GC BOS File E 2 x Save in ape ef EB 4 2350A 173 805 2350A 188 E 700 R1 189 805 Filename 23504_188_081804 bos Save as type Bas Files bos vi Cancel L ZA Upload BOS 2 82 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 3 Use this dialog to choose the directory location and file name or create a file name for this particular upload Click the Save button to continue The message Uploading C GC APP 2350A bos appears in the status bar and a progress bar appears Uploading C AGC APPA2530A bos BEBEEEEH MON2000 begins to upload
376. urn to the main window 2 Use the Application gt Serial Ports menu to access the Register function Serial Ports x Parity Handshake RTS ATS Protocol d E On Off None None 0 ORTU None None 0 0 RTU 0 a 3 Report AW 9600 None None 0 RTU Egg oi se YS 3600 None None ORTU JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Pressures 5 88 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 3 From the Serial Ports dialog click the Registers F3 button or press the F3 key The Registers dialog appears C_ Reg ble Stream Co ni BEE Avo Molecular Weigh 2 12 Avg Molecular Weight Stream 1 O Notused 22 Avg Molecular Weight Stream 1 Noued 33 Gas Density kg m3 Stream 3 Noued 36 Heating Value Gross BTU Dry Stream 3 O Notused 344 Gallons 1000 SCF Stream 3 1 C6 47 35 17 0 ojojojojojojojojo Edt Scales F2 Scale F5 Check FE Copy F7 Copy C F8 Cancel Integer field 0 8990 4 From the Registers dialog use the Variable pull down menu to select the Optional Base Pressures option 5 Use the corresponding component pull down menu to select the desired optional base pressure option Average Min Value Average Time Stamp 2 Archived Average Value Archived Average Max Value i Optional Base eee Archived Average Min Value Archived Average Time Stamp Custom Stim Data Field 1 Custom Stim Data Field 2 Custom Strm Data Field 3 Custom Strm Data Field
377. use the Variable pull down menu to select the Results Opt Base Press option 5 Use the corresponding component pull down menu to select the desired optional N OTI G E base pressure option Metric GC analysis variables are available only if the Metric Base Conditions option has been enabled see Section 5 1 Average Min Value Average Time Stamp Archived Average Value Archived Average Max Value Archived Average Min Value Archived Average Time Stamp Analog Input Custom Strm Data Custom Strm Data Field 2 Custom Strm Data Field 3 Custom Strm Data Field 4 Custom Strm Data Field 5 Custom Comp Data Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 See Table 5 16 to determine which number you should enter 6 To assign a scale ensure that the correct row is selected and click the Scale F5 button or press the F5 key Double click the desired scale option to apply For instructions on creating or editing a scale see Section 5 18 4 7 The Results Opt Base Press variable should be listed with the settings specified 8 Click the changes button to accept your Setting Optional Base Results JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS MON2000 Table 5 16 GC Analysis Variable Number per Optional Pressure GC Analysis Variable Optional Pressure US Metric 1 2 3 Gross Heating Value or Heating Value 1 13 25 Btu
378. uts dialog appears m Analog Inputs 100 Var 100 Var 100 Var 100 Var Fixed Value Auto al Faye m Preamp Stages w GAY Zen FA To edit the settings displayed click the appropriate cell or click and use the provided pull down menus Alphanumeric field For Help press F1 Cancel The 2350A GC Controller and the Model 700 unit supports up to four Al channels Analog Inputs JULY 2010 MON2000 MON2000 accepts a Zero Scale calibration value that is higher than the Full Scale value A higher Zero Scale value can be useful in applications that require an inverse display or record of analog signal levels JULY 2010 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 45 See the following table for details or refer to Step 3 for a more automated process Table 5 7 Description of Analog Input Settings Setting Channel Description channel number assigned Number of available analog inputs is dependent upon the GC Controller model Label name used to identify the analog input 12 characters maximum Zero Scale value used as the zero scale when con verting the analog input value Full Scale value used as the full scale when convert ing the analog input value Fixed Variable analog input operation mode FXD fixed VAR variable If the operation mode is fixed the analog input is set to the number entered for the Fixed Value
379. vel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim axim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim inim 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 10 11 sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed sed 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 74 26 27 28 29 30 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc avg_arc hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel hivel
380. ver to remove the access panel on the right side of the card cage assembly see Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Right Side View Rack and Panel Mount Units 18 Inspect or change the DIP switch settings as necessary a See Table 2 5 as a guide b Make sure you record in the GC Controller s maintenance records any changes you make to the switch settings Switches 1 through 5 form a 5 bit binary number for setting the Modbus slave address also known as COM ID or Device ID Switch number 1 is the least significant bit and switch number 5 is the most significant bit Switch to ON 1 Switch to OFF 0 JULY 2010 Conversion Process 2 48 INSTALLATION AND SETUP MON2000 Switch 6 is a spare for future use Switches 7 and 8 are set as needed for the presence of an optional LOI Local Operator Interface connected via COMS8 When the COMAA Board is installed If the COMAA Board is not installed the LOI 1s connected via COMA Table 2 5 Dip Switch Settings Switch Positions COMID 1 2 3 4 5 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF RAM CLEAR Dip Switch Setting Positions Clears RAM when unit is powered down ON Keeps RAM data when unit is powered down OFF Conversion Process JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 2 14 INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2 49
381. vision specified on the work order package and insert into the floppy drive Type C then ENTER to change to the C drive Reprogramming the DiskOnChip JULY 2010 MON2000 JULY 2010 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS E 17 4 After the C gt prompt is displayed type ERASE then press ENTER When prompted ARE YOU SURE Type v then press ENTER 5 At the C N prompt type DIR then press ENTER Verify that only the Command com file remains on the C drive that the file size is 54 645 bytes and that there are 16 105 472 bytes free 6 Type A then ENTER to change back to the A drive Type INSTALL then follow Steps 6 through 11 see Section E 8 1 E 8 3 GC Reassembly Use the following instructions to reassemble the GC Controller CPU PC 104 Bus and the Modem Figure E 1 CPU PC 104 and Modem 1 Place and securely plug the WinSystems CPU Board into slot number 2 of the Card Cage Assembly 2 Reconnect all ribbon cables that were unplugged GC Reassembly E 18 UPGRADE 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS MON2000 3 Return and secure the Card Cage Assembly back into the chassis mounting Tighten the four screws 4 Return and secure the field wiring TB to the original position Tighten the six screws 5 Reconnect the AC power cord to J21 on the TB and restore AC power to the GC Controller E 9 CONNECT TO GC FOR UPGRADED APP 1 Use MON2000 software to connect with the GC un
382. w If you configure duplicate TEVs i e 2 or more TEVs contain the same parameter settings an error dialog will display but your data will be saved Click the Cancel button to abort and return to the main window Timed Events JULY 2010 MON2000 Application System Component Data Timed Events User Defined F6 FS Calculations Limit Alarms Discrete Alarms Streams Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs Valves Temperature Gontrol Serial Ports TCP IP JULY 2010 Numeric Selection Text Strings 5 4 5 4 1 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5 19 USER DEFINED The user defined functions allow you to edit a user defined operator entry for an application specific variable These variables may be used in reports calculations and or for controlling the GC operations however user defined variables are not used by all applications Numeric Use this function to edit values for defined initialized variables The User Defined Numerics dialog defines the names types and values for all application specific numeric variables 1 Use the Application gt User Defined gt Numerics menu to access this function 2 The User Defined Numerics dialog appears User Defined Numerics Name 1 Cancel Double click the desired Value cell and type the new number 3 Click the J button to accept your chan
383. with Response Factor C 5 CSR ARNO ei eiecerunt eR eet e n n a kaa a eh ita C 5 Calc in Mole Percent w o Normalization C 7 C 4 Post Analysis Computations C 9 C 4 1 Liquid Equivalent Computations C 9 C 4 2 Heating Value Calculations C 9 C 4 3 Multi Level Calibration eseesseessse C 17 C 4 4 Indirect Calibration eeeeeeereerennrenreenoens C 18 APPENDIX D ANALOG D 1 Calibrating by Volts sususus D 1 OUTPUT CAL FOR 2350A D 2 Calibrating by Percentages D 5 APPENDIX E UPGRADE E 1 Connect to GC and Halt Analysis E 1 2350A GC S W AND 2350 EPROMS p Offline Edit to Upload App amp Rename E 1 E 3 Upgrade User Defined Applications E 3 E 4 Upgrade from Disk ss E 3 E 4 1 Upgrade from GC Controller E 6 E 4 2 Configure GC Connection ussusus E 9 E 5 Disconnect Power and Disassemble E 10 E 6 Replace EPROMS Reset CPU E 12 E 7 Reassembly Procedures E 13 E 8 Set Up and Programming E 14 ES Procedure tice ee ri Ree k s ke E 14 E 8 2 Reprogramming the DiskOncChip E 16 E 8 3 GC Reass

Emerson Process Management MON2000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents